8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch with 2 SFP+ Ports
Contents
1 Get Started
2 Configure System Information
3 Configure Switching
4 Configure Routing
5 Configure Quality of Service
6 Manage Device Security
7 Monitor the Switch and the Traffic
8 Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch
A Configuration Examples
B Specifications and Default Settings

NETGEAR MS510TXM User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for MS510TXM by NETGEAR which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

NETGEAR NETGEAR Manual

NETGEAR AGM731F Manual

NETGEAR ProSafe GS724TR Manual

NETGEAR GS608-300PES Manual

NETGEAR N600 Manual

NETGEAR GSM7248 Manual

NETGEAR WN2500RP Manual

NETGEAR, Inc.

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134, USA

May 2021

202-12154-03

User Manual

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet

(Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

with 2 SFP+ Ports

MS510TXM

MS510TXUP

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual2

Support and Community

Visit netgear.com/support to get your questions answered and access the latest downloads.

You can also check out our NETGEAR Community for helpful advice at community.netgear.com.

Regulatory and Legal

Si ce produit est vendu au Canada, vous pouvez accéder à ce document en français canadien à

https://www.netgear.com/support/download/.

(If this product is sold in Canada, you can access this document in Canadian French at

https://www.netgear.com/support/download/.)

For regulatory compliance information including the EU Declaration of Conformity, visit

https://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory/.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

For NETGEAR's Privacy Policy, visit https://www.netgear.com/about/privacy-policy.

By using this device, you are agreeing to NETGEAR's Terms and Conditions at

https://www.netgear.com/about/terms-and-conditions. If you do not agree, return the device to your place of

purchase within your return period.

Do not use this device outdoors. The PoE source is intended for intra building connection only.

Trademarks

trademarks are used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication

Part Number

Publish Date Comments

202-12154-03 May 2021 We made minor changes to the following sections:

• Switch management options and default management mode

• Credentials for the device UI.

• Configure HTTP access settings

We made very minor changes to other sections as well.

We removed the following section: Discover the switch in a network without a

DHCP server using the Smart Control Center.

202-12154-02 January 2021 We made minor corrections.

202-12154-01 January 2021 First publication.

Contents

Chapter 1 Get Started

Available publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Switch management options and default management mode . . . . . . . . .14

About managing the switch with the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Software requirements for the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Supported web browsers for the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Configuration and status options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Buttons in the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

User-defined fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

About on-network and off-network access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet . . . . . . . . . .19

Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Use the NETGEAR Insight mobile app to only discover the

IP address of the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the

switch when it is connected to the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server using

the Smart Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Use other options to discover the switch IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Access the switch on-network and connected to the

Internet when you know the switch IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet . . . . . . .27

Credentials for the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

access the switch online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

a registration key for offline access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Access the switch offline with a registration key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Change the language of the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Change the management mode of the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

About changing the management mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Change the management mode to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Change the management mode back to Directly Connect

to Web Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Use the Device View of the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Configure interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual4

Access the NETGEAR support website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Access the user manual online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

Switch system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

View or define system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

View the temperature and fan status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

View the software versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

View the system CPU status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Configure the CPU thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Management access IP network and VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the

device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Configure the IPv6 network settings for the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

View the IPv6 network neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Time and SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Configure the time settings manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Configure the time settings with SNTP and configure the

global SNTP settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

View the SNTP global status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Configure an SNTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Configure daylight saving time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

View the daylight saving time status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Denial of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Configure Auto-DoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Configure denial of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Domain Name System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server. . . . . . . . . . .79

Remove a DNS server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Configure and view host name-to-IP address information. . . . . . . . . . .81

Green Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Configure the global green Ethernet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Configure green Ethernet interface settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Manage switch discovery with UPnP and SSDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Power over Ethernet (model MS510TXUP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

PoE concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Device class power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Power allocation and power budget concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Configure the global PoE settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Manage the uninterrupted PoE feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Configure the PoE port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

PoE timer schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Create a PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Specify the settings for an absolute PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Change the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule entry . . . . . 101

Delete a PoE timer schedule entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual5

Delete a PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

View the supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Configure SNMPv3 users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Link Layer Discovery Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Configure LLDP global settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Configure LLDP port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

View the LLDP-MED network policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure the LLDP-MED port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

View the local information advertised through LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

View the LLDP neighbors information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

DHCP Layer 2 relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Enable the DHCP L2 relay for the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Enable the DHCP L2 relay for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Configure an interface as a DHCP L2 relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Display the DHCP L2 relay interface statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

DHCP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Enable DHCP snooping for the switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Enable DHCP snooping for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Configure DHCP snooping interface settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Add a static DHCP binding and display dynamic DHCP bindings . . 133

Remove a static DHCP binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Configure DHCP snooping persistent settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

View or clear DHCP snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Dynamic ARP inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Configure the global DAI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Configure DAI VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Configure DAI interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Create a DAI access control list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure a rule for an existing DAI ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Delete a rule from an existing DAI ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Delete a DAI access control list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Display the DAI statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Chapter 3 Configure Switching

Port settings and maximum frame size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Link aggregation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Configure LAG settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Configure LAG membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Set the LACP system priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Set the LACP port priority settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Configure VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Configure VLAN membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

View the VLAN status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual6

Configure the PVID settings for an interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Configure a MAC-based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Configure protocol-based VLAN groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Configure protocol-based VLAN group membership . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Configure a voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Configure the GARP switch settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Configure GARP ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Auto-VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Configure the VoIP OUI-based port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Manage the VoIP OUI table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Display the Auto-VoIP status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Auto-VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Configure the Auto-VLAN properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Configure the Auto-VLAN port settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Manage the OUI table for Auto-WiFi and Auto-Camera VLANs . . . . 186

Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Configure the STP settings and view the STP status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configure the CST settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Configure the CST port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

View the CST port status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

View the Rapid STP information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Manage the MST settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance. . . . . . . . . 200

Display the STP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

View, search, or clear the MFDB table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Display the MFDB statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configure the auto-video multicast settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

IGMP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Configure IGMP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Configure IGMP snooping for interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

View, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Configure IGMP snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces. . . . . . . . . . 215

Configure an IGMP multicast router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

IGMP snooping querier overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Configure an IGMP snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Configure an IGMP snooping querier for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Remove the IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Display the status of the IGMP snooping querier VLANs . . . . . . . . . . 220

MLD snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Enable MLD snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Configure MLD snooping for interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Configure the MLD VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Modify the MLD snooping settings for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual7

Remove MLD snooping from a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 228

Configure an MLD multicast router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Configure an MLD snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Multicast VLAN registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Configure the global MVR settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Configure an MVR group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Remove an MVR group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Configure an MVR interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Configure the interface members of an MVR group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Display the MVR statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

MAC address table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

View, search, or clear the MAC address table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Set the dynamic address aging interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Add a static MAC address to the MAC address table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Remove a static MAC address from the MAC address table . . . . . . . 244

Layer 2 loop protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Configure global Layer 2 loop protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Configure the loop protection settings for ports and

display the loop protection state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Chapter 4 Configure Routing

Routing concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

IPv4 routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Manage the IPv4 routing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

View the IPv4 routing statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

IPv6 routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Manage the IPv6 routing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Display the IPv6 route table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Configure prefix settings for an IPv6 routing VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Delete a prefix setting from an IPv6 routing VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Display the IPv6 and ICMPv6 statistics for an IPv6 routing VLAN . . . 262

Display the IPv6 neighbor table or clear IPv6 neighbor entries . . . . 266

Configure an IPv6 static route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Delete an IPv6 static route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Configure the IPv6 route preference for the switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

VLAN routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing Wizard . . . . 272

Manage a VLAN routing interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Remove the routing function from a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Router discovery for a VLAN routing interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276

Routes and the routing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Manually add a route and display the routing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Modify a route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Delete a route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Address Resolution Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual8

Display the ARP cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Add or change a static entry in the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Delete a static ARP entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Configure the ARP table settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Remove ARP entries from the ARP cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Chapter 5 Configure Quality of Service

Quality of Service concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

CoS configuration concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Configure the global CoS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Configure the CoS settings for an interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Configure the CoS queue settings for an interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Map 802.1p priorities to queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Map DSCP values to queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Differentiated Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Defining DiffServ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the

DiffServ private MIB tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Configure a DiffServ class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Configure IPv6 DiffServ class settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Configure a DiffServ policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Configure the DiffServ service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Display DiffServ service statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Chapter 6 Manage Device Security

Device admin password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

RADIUS servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Configure the global RADIUS server settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Configure a RADIUS authentication server on the switch. . . . . . . . . . 327

Configure a RADIUS accounting server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

TACACS+ servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

Configure the global TACACS+ settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Add a TACACS+ server to the switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch . . . . . . . . . . 337

Remove a TACACS+ server from the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Authentication lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Configure an HTTP authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Configure an HTTPS authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configure the dot1x authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Smart Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

HTTP and HTPPS management access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Configure HTTP access settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Configure HTTPS access settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Browser security warning with HTTPS access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Manage certificates for HTTPS access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Management access profiles and rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual9

Add an access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Add a rule to the access profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Activate the access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Display the access profile summary and the number of

filtered packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Deactivate an access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Remove an access profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Port authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Configure the global 802.1X settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Manage port authentication on individual ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Display the port summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Display the client summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

MAC filters for traffic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Create a MAC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Delete a MAC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Display the MAC filter summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Storm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Configure global storm control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Configure storm control settings for one or more ports. . . . . . . . . . . 373

Port security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

Configure the global port security mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Configure a port security interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Display learned security MAC addresses and convert them

to static MAC addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Protected ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

Private VLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

Configure a private VLAN type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Configure a private VLAN association with a primary and

secondary VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Remove an existing private VLAN association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Configure the private VLAN port mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Configure primary and secondary VLANs on a private

VLAN host interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private

VLAN host interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Configure primary and secondary VLANs on a private

VLAN promiscuous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private

VLAN promiscuous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Access control lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

Use the ACL Wizard to create a simple ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Configure a MAC ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Configure MAC ACL rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Configure MAC bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Display or delete MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding table . . . 406

Configure a basic or extended IPv4 ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Configure rules for a basic IPv4 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Configure rules for an extended IPv4 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Configure an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual10

Configure rules for an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Configure IP ACL interface bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Display or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding table . . . . . 434

Configure VLAN ACL bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Chapter 7 Monitor the Switch and the Traffic

Monitor the switch and the ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Display or clear switch statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Display port statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Display and manage detailed port statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Display or clear EAP and EAPoL statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Perform a cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Manage and display the memory log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Manage and display the flash log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Manage the server log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Display or clear the trap logs and the counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Port mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

Chapter 8 Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch

Reboot from the device UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Reset to factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

Reset the switch to factory default settings but maintain the

registration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Reset the switch to factory default settings and reset the

registration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Export a file from the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469

Use TFTP to export a file from the switch to a TFTP server. . . . . . . . . 469

Use HTTP to export a file from the switch to a computer . . . . . . . . . . 470

Update software or download a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471

Use TFTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Use HTTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL

security certificate file on the switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Manage software images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477

Copy a software image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Configure dual image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

View the dual image status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Diagnostics and troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

Ping an IPv4 address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Ping an IPv6 address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Send an IPv4 traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Send an IPv6 traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Enable remote diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

User Manual11

Appendix A Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

VLAN configuration examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Access control lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

MAC ACL example configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Basic IPv4 ACL example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495

Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

DiffServ traffic classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Create policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

DiffServ example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

802.1X access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

802.1X example configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

MSTP example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

VLAN routing interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505

Appendix B Specifications and Default Settings

Switch default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

General feature default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

System setup and maintenance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Port characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Traffic control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518

Quality of Service settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518

Security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

System management settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

Settings for other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

Hardware technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

Model MS510TXM hardware technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Model MS510TXUP hardware technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 522

1Get Started

This user manual describes how you can use the device user interface (UI) to configure and

operate the following switches:

• MS510TXM: NETGEAR 8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch

with 2 SFP+ Ports

This high-speed model provides four 100M/1000M/2.5G ports, four

100M/1000M/2.5G/5G/10G ports, and two dedicated 1G/10G SFP+ fiber uplink ports.

• MS510TXUP: NETGEAR 8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet Ultra60 PoE++ Smart

Managed Pro Switch with 2 SFP+ Ports

This high-speed PoE++ (802.3bt) model provides four 100M/1000M/2.5G Ultra60 PoE++

ports, four 100M/1000M/2.5G/5G/10G Ultra60 PoE++ ports, and two dedicated 1G/10G

SFP+ fiber uplink ports.

Each PoE++ port can deliver up to 60W, while the maximum PoE power budget across

all active PoE++ ports is 295W.

The manual describes the software configuration procedures and explains the options that are

available within those procedures.

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Available publications

•Switch management options and default management mode

•About managing the switch with the device UI

•About on-network and off-network access

•Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet

•Access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet

•Credentials for the device UI

•Register the switch

•Change the language of the device UI

•Change the management mode of the switch

•Use the Device View of the device UI

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual13

•Configure interface settings

•Access the NETGEAR support website

•Access the user manual online

Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the

support website at netgear.com/support.

Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made available

from time to time at netgear.com/support/download/. Some

products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or

you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the

features or behavior of your product does not match what is described

in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.

Available publications

The following information is available at netgear.com/support/download/:

•Installation Guide

•Hardware Installation Guide

•Product Data Sheet

For information about the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal, visit

netgear.com/insight and netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base

articles about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual14

Switch management options and default

management mode

If you prefer, you can use the switch as a plug-and-play device, so you do not need to set up

a custom configuration. Just connect power, connect to your network and to your other

devices, and you’re done.

The switch provides administrative management options that let you configure, monitor, and

control the network. The device UI is enabled by default, allowing you to configure the switch

and the network from a web browser. If you are an Insight Premium or Pro subscriber, you

can choose to manage the switch by using the NETGEAR Insight app on a smartphone or

tablet or from the Insight Cloud portal that is available from a web browser on your

Windows-based computer, Mac, or tablet.

The switch provides the following management options that let you discover the switch on the

network and configure, monitor, and control the switch:

• Device UI: By default, the management mode of the switch is set to Directly Connect to

Web Browser Interface, which lets you access the device UI. In this mode, you can

change all settings of the switch.

• NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal: If you set the management mode of

the switch to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, you can use the

following applications to manage the switch remotely:

-NETGEAR Insight app. As an Insight Premium or Insight Pro subscriber, you can

use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the switch on the network and add the

switch to a NETGEAR Insight network location. You can then set up the switch in the

network and manage and monitor the switch remotely from your smartphone or tablet.

You can choose from four methods to add the switch to the NETGEAR Insight app:

You can scan your network for the switch, scan the QR code or the barcode of the

switch, or add the serial number of the switch. A free trial is available for new

customers.

-Insight Cloud portal: As an Insight Premium or Insight Pro subscriber, you can use

the NETGEAR Insight Cloud portal to set up the switch in the network, perform

advanced remote setup, configuration, and management, monitor the switch, analyze

the switch and network usage, and, if necessary, troubleshoot the switch and the

network. A free trial is available for new customers.

For more information about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/insight and

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about

NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

To use the NETGEAR Insight app or Insight Cloud portal methods, you must change the

management method to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. After you do

so, you can also change the management method back to Directly Connect to Web Browser

Interface and use the device UI. For more information, see Change the management mode

of the switch on page 35.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual15

About managing the switch with the

device UI

This manual describes how to use the device UI to manage and monitor the switch.

For information about using the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal to manage

the switch, visit netgear.com/insight and netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For

knowledge base articles about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

Software requirements for the device UI

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

•HTML version 4.0, or later

•HTTP version 1.1, or later

Supported web browsers for the device UI

The following browsers were tested and support the device UI. Later browser versions might

function fine but were not tested.

The supported web browsers include the following:

•Mozilla Firefox version 67

•Chrome version 78

•Microsoft Edge

•Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 11

•Safari on MAC OS X version 13.0.3

•Safari on Windows OS versions 5.1.7

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual16

Navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu

Navigation tabs

Configuration menus Logout button

Buttons

Page menus

Configuration status

Help page

and options

Language menu

The System Information page is the start page in the device UI. The following figure shows

the System Information page for model MS510TXUP.

Figure 1. Switch navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu

The navigation tabs along the top of the device UI give you quick access to the various switch

functions. The tabs are always available and remain constant, regardless of which feature

you configure.

When you select a tab, the features for that tab appear as menus directly under the tabs. The

configuration menus in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected.

The configuration pages for each feature are available as submenu links in the page menu on

the left side of the page. Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple submenu links, as

the following figure shows.

Link

Submenu

links

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual17

Figure 2. Switch page menu link and submenu links

Configuration and status options

The area directly under the configuration menus and to the right of the links displays the

configuration information or status for the page you select. On pages that contain

configuration options, you might be able to enter information into fields, select options from

menus, select check boxes, and select radio buttons.

Each page contains access to the HTML-based help that explains the fields and

configuration options for the page.

Buttons in the device UI

Each page also contains command buttons. The following table shows the command buttons

that are used throughout the pages in the device UI:

Table 1. Command buttons in the device UI

Button Function

Add Clicking the Add button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.

Apply Clicking the Apply button to save your settings. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Cancel Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the page and resets the data on the

page to the previous values of the switch.

Clear Clicking the Clear button clears all the counters and resets the switch summary and detailed

statistics to default values.

Delete Clicking the Delete button removes the selected item.

Refresh Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual18

User-defined fields

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the

configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the ones stated in the following

table (unless specifically noted in a procedure for a feature).

Table 2. Invalid characters for user-defined fields

Invalid characters for user-defined fields

\ | / < > * ?

Context-sensitive help

When you log in to the switch, every page contains a link to the online help ( ) that contains

information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help pages are

context sensitive. For example, if the IP Configuration page is open, the help topic for that

page displays if you click the link to the online help.

About on-network and off-network access

You can access the switch either on-network or off-network:

• On-network and connected to the Internet: When you use the device UI, for easiest

access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network that is connected to the

Internet and that includes a router or DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on

the switch, and then use a computer that is connected to the same network as the switch

to connect to the device UI. We refer to this setup as on-network or online.

For more information, see Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet

on page 19).

• Off-network and not connected to the Internet: You can also configure the switch

connected directly only to the computer that you are using to configure it. That is, the

switch is not connected to the network and the Internet. We refer to this setup as

off-network or offline. If your network does not include a DHCP server (or a router that

functions as a DHCP server), you must access the switch off-network.

For more information, see Access the switch off-network and not connected to the

Internet on page 27.

Note: We recommend that you register the switch to activate your warranty.

For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual19

Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default, allowing a DHCP server or router on the

network to assign an IP address to the switch.

If the switch is on-network, connected to a DHCP server, and connected to the Internet, you

can use a Windows-based computer to access the device UI. We also recommend that you

accessing the device UI, see Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet on page 20.

If you use a Mac, or if you do not know the IP address of the switch, use one of the following

tools to discover the IP address of the switch on the network:

• NETGEAR Insight mobile app: You can install the NETGEAR Insight mobile app on an

iOS or Android mobile device and discover the IP address of the switch. See Use the

NETGEAR Insight mobile app to only discover the IP address of the switch on page 21.

• NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool (NSDT): If you use a Windows-based computer or

Mac, you can use the NSDT to discover the switch on your network. See Use the

NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the switch when it is connected to the

Internet on page 22.

• NETGEAR Smart Control Center (SCC): You can install the SCC on a Windows-based

computer. See Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server using the Smart

Control Center on page 24

• Other tools: You can also get the IP address of the switch from the DHCP server in the

network or use a third-party IP scanner utility. See Use other options to discover the

switch IP address on page 25.

When you know the IP address, you can configure the switch in the following ways:

• Device UI: For configuration of all switch features, access the switch over the device UI.

See Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet when you know the

switch IP address on page 25.

• NETGEAR Smart Control Center (SCC): For configuration of a limited number of switch

features, use the SCC on a Windows-based computer. By default, you can use the SCC

to discover the IP address of the switch, but you cannot use the SCC to perform any

actions on the switch. However, if you enable the configuration option of the SCC, you

can use it to configure the switch. See Smart Control Center on page 342.

For more information about the SCC, visit netgear.com/support/product/SCC.

• NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal: You can change the management

mode of the switch so that you can use the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud

portal to manage the switch remotely. For more information, see Change the

management mode of the switch on page 35.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual20

Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet

To use a Windows-based computer to determine the switch IP address and access the

switch on-network and connected to the Internet:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Open Windows Explorer.

5. Click the Network link.

6. If prompted, enable the Network Discovery feature.

7. Under Network Infrastructure, locate the switch model number.

The model number is either MS510TXM or MS510TXUP

8. Double-click either MS510TXM-XXXXXX or MS510TXUP-XXXXXX, in which XXXXXX

represents the last six digits of the switch MAC address.

The page that displays depends on whether your browser is connected to the Internet,

whether the switch is connected to the Internet, and whether you activated the warranty.

9. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to activate your warranty page displays: If you did not yet activate your

warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page displays.

-Register Your Device: To activate your warranty, click the Register Your Device

button, and follow the directions onscreen to register the switch with your email

address and password. After you activate your warranty, you are no longer

prompted to register the switch.

If you do not have a NETGEAR account, you can create one.

- Enter Registration Key: If you obtained a registration key, enter it. For more

information, see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a

registration key for offline access on page 31.

- Skip Registration & Access the UI: You do not need to register the switch to

activate your warranty, but if you do not activate your warranty within 30 days of

purchase, your warranty entitlement might be affected.

If you do not activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

continues to display when you log in.

• Device UI login page displays: If you previously registered the switch with

NETGEAR to activate your warranty, the Device UI login page displays. Enter one of

the following credentials:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual21

- Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default device

admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default device

admin password, the Change Default Password page displays, requiring you to

customize the device admin password for greater security.

- Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you

changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the switch

to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access the

device UI. (In such a situation, the Insight network password replaces the switch

device admin password.)

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

10. Click the Go button.

11. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Use the NETGEAR Insight mobile app to only discover the

IP address of the switch

If the switch is connected to a WiFi router or access point, and the switch is connected to the

Internet, the NETGEAR Insight mobile app lets you discover the IP address of the switch in

your network.

If you do not use the NETGEAR Insight app to claim the switch by adding it to an Insight

network location, the switch is not registered and your warranty is not activated.

Using the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address of the switch is not the same as

managing the switch with the Insight app or the Insight Cloud Portal.

Note: The default management mode of the switch is the device UI. If you

want to use the Insight app or the Insight Cloud Portal to manage the

switch, you first must change the management mode (see Change the

management mode to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight

Cloud Portal on page 36). After you do so, you can manage the switch

with Insight and add the switch to an Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual22

To use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address of the switch in your

network when the switch is connected to the Internet:

1. On your mobile device, go to the app store, search for NETGEAR Insight, and download

the latest version of the app.

2. Connect your mobile device to the WiFi network of the WiFi router or access point to which

the switch is connected.

3. Open the NETGEAR Insight mobile app.

4. If you did not set up a NETGEAR account, tap Create NETGEAR Account and follow the

onscreen instructions.

5. Enter the email address and password for your account and tap LOG IN.

After you log in to your account, the IP address of the switch displays in the device list.

6. Write down the switch IP address.

You can use this IP address to access the switch directly from a web browser. For

information about how to access the device UI of the switch, see Access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet when you know the switch IP address on

page 25.

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the

switch when it is connected to the Internet

For easiest access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network with a router or

DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the switch, and then use a computer that

is connected to the same network as the switch.

The NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool (NSDT) lets you discover the switch in your network

and access the device UI of the switch from a Mac or a Windows-based computer.

To install the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool and discover the IP address of the

switch in your network when the switch is connected to the Internet:

1. Download the NSDT by visiting

netgear.com/support/product/netgear-switch-discovery-tool.aspx.

Depending on the computer that you are using, download either the Mac version or the

Windows version.

2. Temporarily disable the firewall, Internet security, antivirus programs, or all of these on the

computer that you use to configure the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual23

3. Unzip the NSDT files, and click or double-click the .exe file (for example,

NSDT-1.2.102.exe) to install the program on your computer.

You might see the tool icon appear on your Mac dock or Windows desktop.

4. Reenable the security services on your computer.

5. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

6. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection. The computer and the switch must be on the

same Layer 2 network.

7. Open the Switch Discovery Tool.

To open the program, double-click the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool icon on your

dock on desktop.

The initial page displays a menu and a button.

8. From the Choose a connection menu, select the network for this switch.

9. Click the Start Searching button.

The NSDT displays the IP addresses of the switches that it discovers.

10. To access the switch from the NSDT, do the following:

a. Click the ADMIN PAGE button next to your switch.

The page that displays depends on whether you activated the warranty.

b. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to activate your warranty page displays: If you did not yet activate

your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page displays.

- Register Your Device: To activate your warranty, click the Register Your

Device button, and follow the directions onscreen to register the switch with

your email address and password. After you activate your warranty, you are

no longer prompted to register the switch.

If you do not have a NETGEAR account, you can create one.

- Enter Registration Key: If you obtained a registration key, enter it. For more

information, see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a

registration key for offline access on page 31.

- Skip Registration & Access the UI: You do not need to register the switch to

activate your warranty, but if you do not activate your warranty within 30 days

of purchase, your warranty entitlement might be affected.

If you do not activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty

page continues to display when you log in.

• Device UI login page displays: If you previously registered the switch with

NETGEAR to activate your warranty, the Device UI login page displays. Enter one

of the following credentials:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual24

- Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default

device admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default

device admin password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the device admin password.

- Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you

changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the

switch to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to

access the device UI. (In such a situation, the Insight network password

replaces the switch device admin password.)

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

c. If you enter a password, click the Go button; If you enter a registration key, click the

Submit button.

d. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device

admin password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server using

the Smart Control Center

This section describes how to set up your switch in a network that includes a DHCP server.

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default. When you connect the switch to your

network, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address to the switch. Use the Smart

Control Center (SCC) to discover the IP address automatically assigned to the switch.

For information about the SCC, visit netgear.com/support/product/SCC.

Note: By default, you can use the SCC to discover the IP address of the switch,

but you cannot use the SCC to perform any actions on the switch.

However, if you enable the configuration option of the SCC, you can use it

to configure the switch (see Smart Control Center on page 342).

To install the switch in a network with a DHCP server:

1. Connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the SCC on your computer.

4. Start the SCC.

5. Click the Discover button for the SCC to discover all the devices in the subnet.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual25

6. Write down the switch IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

For information about how to access the device UI of the switch, see Access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet when you know the switch IP address on

page 25.

Use other options to discover the switch IP address

If the switch is on-network, you can use one of the following options to determine the switch

IP address:

• Access the DHCP server: You can access the DHCP server (or router that functions as

a DHCP server) in your network and view the IP address that is assigned to the switch.

For more information, see the documentation for your DHCP server (or router).

• Use an IP scanner utility: IP scanner utilities are available free of charge on the Internet.

An IP scanner utility lets you discover the IP address that is assigned to the switch.

For information about how to access the device UI of the switch, see Access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet when you know the switch IP address on

page 25.

Access the switch on-network and connected to the

Internet when you know the switch IP address

If the switch is on-network and you know the switch IP address, you can access the device

UI.

For the following procedure, the network must provide Internet access.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual26

To access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet when you know the

switch IP address:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

The page that displays depends on whether your browser is connected to the Internet,

whether the switch is connected to the Internet, and whether you activated the warranty.

3. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to activate your warranty page displays: If you did not yet activate your

warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page displays.

-Register Your Device: To activate your warranty, click the Register Your Device

button, and follow the directions onscreen to register the switch with your email

address and password. After you activate your warranty, you are no longer

prompted to register the switch.

If you do not have a NETGEAR account, you can create one.

- Enter Registration Key: If you obtained a registration key, enter it. For more

information, see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a

registration key for offline access on page 31.

- Skip Registration & Access the UI: You do not need to register the switch to

activate your warranty, but if you do not activate your warranty within 30 days of

purchase, your warranty entitlement might be affected.

If you do not activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

continues to display when you log in.

• Device UI login page displays: If you previously registered the switch with

NETGEAR to activate your warranty, the Device UI login page displays. Enter one of

the following credentials:

- Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default device

admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default device

admin password, the Change Default Password page displays, requiring you to

customize the device admin password.

• Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you

changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the switch to

an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access the

device UI. (In such a situation, the Insight network password replaces the switch

device admin password.)

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

4. If you enter a password, click the Go button; If you enter a registration key, click the Submit

button.

5. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual27

Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet

The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.0.239. The IP address of the computer that

you use to access the switch off-network must be in the same subnet as the default IP

address of the switch.

Note: If you prefer to use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to configure the

switch, you must access the switch off-network as described in the

following procedure and then enable the configuration option of the

SCC (see Smart Control Center on page 342).

To access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet:

1. Change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same subnet as the IP settings of

the switch.

If the DHCP client of the switch is enabled and you remove the switch from the network

with the DHCP server, the IP address reverts to the default IP address of 192.168.0.239

with a subnet of 255.255.255.0. If you already disabled the DHCP client and assigned a

static IP address to the switch, change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same

subnet as the static IP address.

For more information about changing the IP settings on your computer, see one of the

following knowledge base articles at the NETGEAR website:

•Windows-based computer: See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/27476/How-to-set-a-static-IP-address-in-Windows

• Mac: See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/000037250/Setting-a-static-IP-address-on-your-network-a

dapter-in-Mac-OS-for-direct-access-to-an-access-point

(The Mac article is written for an access point but is also valid for a switch.)

2. Connect your computer to the switch using an Ethernet cable.

3. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

4. Launch a web browser.

5. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default IP address of the switch. If you already disabled the DHCP client and

assigned a static IP address to the switch, enter the static IP address of the switch.

The Enter Registration Key page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual28

6. Do one of the following:

• Enter a registration key. If you obtained a registration key, do the following:

a. Type or paste the key.

For more information, see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and

get a registration key for offline access on page 31.

b. Click the Submit button.

• Do not register at this time and access the device UI: Do the following:

a. Click the Skip Registration & Access the UI button.

The Device UI login page displays.

b. Enter one of the following credentials:

-Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default

device admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default

device admin password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the device admin password.

- Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you

changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the

switch to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to

access the device UI. (In such a situation, the Insight network password

replaces the switch device admin password.)

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on

page 28.

7. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

8. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

Credentials for the device UI

The information in this section applies to accessing the switch device UI in either

management mode. That is, it does not apply to accessing the NETGEAR Insight app and

Cloud portal.

To access the device UI, and depending on your situation, use one of the following

credentials:

• NETGEAR account credentials:

You can register the switch online to activate your warranty by entering your NETGEAR

account credentials (see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and access

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual29

the switch online on page 30). If you do not have a NETGEAR account, you can create

one.

Alternatively, you can obtain a registration key and enter the key when the switch is offline

so that you are no longer prompted to activate your warranty (see Register the switch

with your NETGEAR account and get a registration key for offline access on page 31).

• Device admin password:

You can access the device UI with your device admin password.

The first time that you access the device UI, enter the default device admin password

(password), after which you are required to customize the password for greater security.

Subsequent times that you log in to the device UI, use your customized device admin

password.

• NETGEAR Insight network location password:

NETGEAR Insight can affect how you access the switch device UI. After you add the

switch to an Insight network location and change the management mode of the switch so

that you can use the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal to manage the

switch remotely (see Change the management mode of the switch on page 35), the

Insight network location password replaces the switch device admin password. To

access the device UI, you must enter the Insight network location password.

Even if you temporarily change the management mode of the switch back to Direct

Connect Web Browser Interface, for example to change settings that are not

Insight-manageable or for debugging purposes, you must enter the Insight network

location password.

For information about how the Insight network password functions, visit

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about

NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

The following table lists the essential credential options for access to the device UI.

Table 3. Credentials for access to the device UI

Management mode in the

device UI

Added to an

Insight network

Credentials Device UI menu

Default mode:

Direct Connect Web Browser

Interface (Local LAN Only)

No Device admin password

Full device UI menu

Yes1

1. This situation occurs if you temporarily change the management mode of the switch from NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and

Insight Cloud Portal back to Direct Connect Web Browser Interface.

Insight network password

NETGEAR Insight Mobile App

and Insight Cloud Portal (Cloud/

Remote)

No Device admin password Limited device UI menu.

Not managed through

NETGEAR Insight.

Yes Insight network password Limited device UI menu.

Managed through

NETGEAR Insight.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual30

You can register the switch online or offline to activate your warranty, after which you are no

longer prompted to activate your warranty when you log in:

• Online registration for on-network access: If your switch is on-network or connected to

the Internet, you can register the switch with your NETGEAR account credentials and

activate your warranty. During the registration process, the switch contacts a NETGEAR

server. For more information, see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and

access the switch online on page 30.

• Registration for off-network access: You can register your switch from any device that

is connected to the Internet and get a registration key. If the switch is off-network or not

connected to the Internet, you can enter the registration key. After you do so, the Register

to activate your warranty page no longer displays when you log in. For more information,

see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a registration key for

offline access on page 31.

access the switch online

For registration and activation of your warranty with your NETGEAR account, the switch must

be connected to the Internet so that it can communicate with a NETGEAR server.

If you do not have a NETGEAR account, you can create one during the registration process.

To register and access the switch online over the device UI with your NETGEAR

account:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

For information about finding the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch

on-network and connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network

and not connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Register to activate your warranty page displays.

4. Click the Register Your Device button and follow the directions onscreen to register the

switch with your email address and password and activate the warranty.

You are only prompted to do this once to confirm registration of your switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual31

If you did not yet create a NETGEAR account, click the Create account link, follow the

directions onscreen to create an account, and register the switch with your email address

and password.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

a registration key for offline access

Note: If you register your switch with your NETGEAR account and then

access the switch connected to the Internet, you do not need a

registration key because the Device UI login page displays. That is,

you are no longer prompted to activate your warranty.

After you register your switch with your NETGEAR account, you can get a registration key,

access the switch offline or not connected to the Internet, and either before or after you log in

to the device UI, enter the registration key. After you enter the registration key, you are no

longer prompted to activate your warranty. Instead, the Device UI login page displays.

You can visit mynetgear.com, log in to your NETGEAR account, register the switch using its

serial number, and get a registration key.

You can also use the NETGEAR Insight app to get a registration key. NETGEAR Insight

Premium or Pro subscribers can use the Insight Cloud Portal to get a registration key. For

information about how the registration key functions with Insight, visit

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about NETGEAR

Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

To register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a registration key:

1. From a computer or mobile device that is connected to the Internet, go to

mynetgear.com.

2. Log in to your NETGEAR account.

If you do not have a free NETGEAR account, you can create one.

3. From the menu on the left, select Register a Product.

The page adjusts.

4. In the Serial Number field, enter the serial number of the switch.

The serial number consists of 13 digits. The serial number is usually printed on a label on

the bottom or the back panel of the switch.

5. Click the Register button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual32

The switch is registered with NETGEAR.

6. If the My Products page does not display, select My Products from the menu.

The page adjusts.

7. Select the radio button for the newly registered switch, and click the Get Registration Key

button.

The registration key is displayed, and an email with the registration key is sent to your

NETGEAR account email address.

Access the switch offline with a registration key

After you get a registration key, you can access the switch offline and enter the registration

key. For more information, see one of the following sections:

•Access the switch offline and enter the registration key before you log in on page 32

•Access the switch offline and enter the registration key after you log in on page 33

After you enter the registration key, you are no longer prompted to activate your warranty

when you log in. Instead, the Device UI login page displays.

Access the switch offline and enter the registration key before you log in

If you obtain a registration key, you can access the switch offline and enter the key before you

To access the switch offline and enter the registration key before you log in to the

device UI:

1. Change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same subnet as the IP settings of

the switch.

If the DHCP client of the switch is enabled and you remove the switch from the network

with the DHCP server, the IP address reverts to the default IP address of 192.168.0.239

with a subnet of 255.255.255.0. If you already disabled the DHCP client and assigned a

static IP address to the switch, change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same

subnet as the static IP address.

For more information about changing the IP settings on your computer, see one of the

following knowledge base articles at the NETGEAR website:

•Windows-based computer: See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/27476/How-to-set-a-static-IP-address-in-Windows

• Mac: See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/000037250/Setting-a-static-IP-address-on-your-network-a

dapter-in-Mac-OS-for-direct-access-to-an-access-point

(The Mac article is written for an access point but is also valid for a switch.)

2. Connect your computer to the switch using an Ethernet cable.

3. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual33

4. Launch a web browser.

5. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default IP address of the switch. If you already disabled the DHCP client and

assigned a static IP address to the switch, enter the static IP address of the switch.

The Enter Registration Key page displays.

6. Enter the registration key.

7. Click the Submit button.

The registration takes effect on the switch and you are no longer prompted to activate

your warranty when you log in.

The Device UI login page displays.

8. Enter one of the following credentials:

•Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default device

admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default device admin

password, the Change Default Password page displays, requiring you to customize

the device admin password.

• Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you changed

the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the switch to an Insight

network location, enter the Insight network password to access the device UI. (In such

a situation, the Insight network password replaces the switch device admin

password.)

9. Click the Go button.

10. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

11. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

Access the switch offline and enter the registration key after you log in

If you access the switch offline and obtain a registration key afterwards, you can enter the

key on a page in the device UI.

To access the switch offline and enter the registration key after you log in to the

device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual34

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Register to activate your warranty page displays.

4. Click the Skip Registration & Access the UI button.

The Device UI login page displays.

5. Enter one of the following credentials:

•Device admin password: Enter the device admin password. The default device

admin password is password. The first time that you enter the default device admin

password, the Change Default Password page displays, requiring you to customize

the device admin password.

• Insight network password: If you previously logged in to the device UI, you changed

the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the switch to an Insight

network location, enter the Insight network password to access the device UI. (In such

a situation, the Insight network password replaces the switch device admin

password.)

6. Click the Go button.

7. If the Change Default Password page displays, specify and confirm a new device admin

password, click the Submit button, and log in again with your new password.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

8. Select Maintenance > Registration Key.

The Registration Key page displays.

9. In the field, type or paste the registration key.

10. Click the Submit button.

The registration takes effect on the switch and you are no longer prompted to activate

your warranty when you log in.

Change the language of the device UI

By default, the language is set to Auto. You can set the language to a specific one.

To change the language of the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual35

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. At the top of the page, to the left of Welcome, select a language from the language menu.

A confirmation pop-up window displays.

7. Click the OK button.

You are logged out. The language of the device UI is set to the language that you

selected.

8. To continue configuring the switch, log in again.

Change the management mode of the

switch

By default, the management mode on the switch is Directly Connect to Web Browser

Interface (which is the same as the device UI). You can also change the management mode

to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal.

About changing the management mode

The following applies to changing the management mode:

• Changing to the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal mode:

-The first time that you enable this mode, the switch is reset to its factory default

settings so that you can create the switch configuration and network topology using

the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal.

-If you previously added the switch to a network location on the Insight app or Insight

Cloud portal, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual36

configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch device admin password

(that is, the password is reset to the Insight network location password).

-If you use the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal, you can temporarily change the

management mode of the switch back to Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface.

You can then access the device UI for settings that are not Insight-manageable, for

complex tasks such as integrating with an existing network of devices that are not

managed through Insight, and for debugging purposes. When you are done, you can

change the management mode back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight

Cloud Portal.

• Changing back to Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface mode:

After you change the management mode, back up your configuration. Then, reset the

switch to factory defaults. Finally, restore your configuration and reboot the switch. For

more information, see Change the management mode back to Directly Connect to

Web Browser Interface on page 38.

After you change the management mode, the follow occurs:

-The NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal management mode is

disabled and the current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud

server.

-Any changes that you make using the Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface

management mode are not saved to the cloud server.

-All configuration menus and options are available in the device UI.

Change the management mode to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal

To change the management mode of the switch to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and

Insight Cloud portal:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual37

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal radio button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

7. Read the text, and click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes.

8. Click the Apply button.

Another pop-up window displays.

9. Click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes, the System Information page closes, and your settings are

saved.

The following occurs:

•The first time that you enable this mode, the switch is reset to its factory default

settings.

•The switch connects to the cloud server.

•If you previously added the switch to a network on the Insight app or Insight Cloud

portal, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration

saved on the cloud server, including the device admin password (that is, the

password is reset to the Insight network password).

•The Device UI login page might displays again. (You can close the page.)

You can now manage the switch using the Insight mobile app or Insight Cloud portal.

For more information about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/insight and

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about

NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual38

Change the management mode back to Directly Connect

to Web Browser Interface

To change the management mode of the switch back to Directly Connect to Web

Browser Interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select the Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface radio button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

7. Read the text, and click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes.

8. Click the Apply button.

Another pop-up window displays.

9. Click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes, the System Information page closes, and your settings are

saved. Any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server.

The Device UI login page displays.

10. Log in again.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual39

Note: The following step uses an HTTP session to back up the configuration.

For information about using a TFTP session, see Use TFTP to export a

file from the switch to a TFTP server on page 469.

11. Back up the configuration:

a. Select Maintenance > Export > HTTP File Export.

The HTTP File Export page displays.

b. From the File Type menu, select Text Configuration.

c. Click the Apply button.

A pop-up window displays.

d. Navigate to a location on your computer and save the file.

The file transfer begins. The page displays information about the file transfer

progress.

12. Reset the switch to factory default settings:

a. Select Maintenance > Reset > Factory Default.

The Default Settings page displays.

b. Select the Reset configuration to factory default (EXCEPT registered device

status), and clear device logs radio button.

This option resets the switch to its factory default settings but does not change its

registration status with NETGEAR.

c. Click the Apply button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

d. Click the OK button.

All configuration settings are reset to their factory default values. The DHCP client on

the switch is enabled. Your device admin password is reset to the default password

(password). This process takes about 135 seconds.

The Device UI login page displays.

In the unlikely situation that the Device UI page does not display and you cannot log

in, see Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet on page 19 or

Access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet on page 27.

e. Enter the device admin password.

The default device admin password is password. The first time that you enter the

default device admin password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the device admin password.

The System Information page displays.

Note: The following step uses an HTTP session to restore the configuration. For

information about using a TFTP session, see Use TFTP to download a file

to the switch or update the software image on page 472.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual40

13. Restore the configuration that you saved in Step 11:

a. Select Maintenance > Update > HTTP Firmware/File Update.

The HTTP Firmware/File Update page displays.

b. From the File Type menu, select Text Configuration.

c. Click the Browse button and locate and select configuration file that you saved in

Step 11.

d. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins. The page displays information about the progress of the file

transfer. The switch applies the configuration automatically.

14. Reboot the switch:

a. Select Maintenance > Reset > Device Reboot.

The Device Reboot page displays.

b. Select the check box.

c. Click the Apply button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

d. Click the OK button to confirm.

The switch reboots.

The Device UI login page displays.

15. Log in again.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch using all

options in the device UI.

Use the Device View of the device UI

The Device View displays the ports on the switch. This graphic tool provides an alternate way

to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic tool also provides

information about device ports, configuration and status, tables, and feature components.

To use the Device View:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual41

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Device View.

The Device View page displays.

The following figure shows the Device View page of model MS510TXUP.

The Device View shows system LEDs and port LEDs:

• Power LED: The Power LED serves as an indicator of power and management mode

status:

- Solid green: The switch is powered on and operating normally. If you changed

the management mode of the switch to NETGEAR Insight, the switch is not yet

added to an Insight managed network or not yet connected to the Insight cloud

management server.

- Solid blue: The management mode of the switch is NETGEAR Insight, the switch

is added to an Insight managed network, and the switch is connected to the

Insight cloud management server. You can manage and monitor the switch using

the NETGEAR Insight app or Insight Cloud portal

The physical Power LED on the switch can be blinking green while the switch is

booting but this does not apply to the Device View. (If the switch is off or booting, you

cannot access the Device View.)

• Fan LED: The Fan LED serves as an indicator of the fan status:

- Solid green: The fans are operating normally.

-Solid yellow: A problem occurred with the fans.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual42

• PoE Max LED (Model MS510TXUP only): The PoE Max LED indicates the following

status:

- Off: Sufficient (more than 7W of) PoE power is available.

- Solid amber: Less than 7W of PoE power is available.

• Port LEDs 1–8: The Ethernet ports 1–8 provide a left LED that functions as the

combined link, speed, and activity LED, as described in the following table.

For model MS510TXUP only, in addition to a left LED, the Ethernet PoE++ ports 1–8

provide a right LED that indicates the PoE status, as described in the following table.

• Ports 9 and 10: The SFP+ fiber uplink ports each provide a single LED that functions

as the combined link, speed, and activity LED, as described in the following table.

LED Description

RJ-45 left LED

Link, speed, and activity

for Ethernet ports 1 to 4

• Black: No link is established.

• Solid green: A valid link at a speed of 2.5 Gbps is established.

• Blinking green: The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

2.5 Gbps.

• Solid yellow: A valid link at a speed of 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps is

established.

• Blinking yellow: The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps.

RJ-45 left LED

Link, speed, and activity

for Ethernet ports 5 to 8

• Black: No link is established.

• Solid green: A valid link at a speed of 10 Gbps is established.

• Blinking green: The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

10 Gbps.

• Solid yellow: A valid link at a speed of 5 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 1000 Mbps,

or 100 Mbps is established.

• Blinking yellow: The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

5 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 1000 Mbps, or 100 Mbps.

Model MS510TXUP only:

RJ-45 right LED

PoE status for Ethernet

ports 1 to 8

• Black: The port is not delivering PoE power.

• Solid green: The port is delivering PoE power.

• Solid amber: A PoE fault occurred.

Link/ACT LED

Link, speed, and activity

for SFP fiber uplink ports

9F and 10F

• Black: No module is installed in the SFP+ port or no link is established

on the SFP+ port.

• Solid green: The module in the SFP+ port established a valid link at a

speed of 10 Gbps.

• Blinking green: The module in the SFP+ is transmitting or receiving

packets at 10 Gbps.

• Solid yellow: The module in the SFP+ port established a valid link at

a speed of 1 Gbps.

• Blinking yellow: The module in the SFP+ is transmitting or receiving

packets at 1 Gbps.

7. To see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options, right-click on a port.

The following figure shows the Device View page of model MS510TXUP.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual43

If you select an option from the menu, the associated page opens.

8. To display the main menu that contains the same options as the navigation menu at the top

of the page, right-click the graphic without clicking a specific port.

The following figure shows the Device View page of model MS510TXUP.

If you select an option from the menu, the associated page opens.

9. To return to the Device View page, select System > Device View.

Configure interface settings

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports are multispeed and high-speed Ethernet interfaces

and SFP+ ports and are numbered on the front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by

using the device UI.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual44

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Table 4. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Example

Physical Ethernet ports 1–4 The physical ports are multispeed Ethernet interfaces and

are numbered from 1 to 4.

mg1, mg2, mg3,

and mg4

Physical Ethernet ports 5–8 The physical ports are high-speed and multispeed

Ethernet interfaces and are numbered from 5 to 8.

xmg5, xmg6,

xmg7, and xmg8

Physical SFP+ ports 9F and 10F The physical ports are SPF+ ports in which you can insert

transceiver modules and are numbered 9 and 10

xg9 and xg10

Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are used only for

bridging functions. They are numbered from 1 to 8.

l1, l2, and l3

through l8

CPU management interface This is the internal switch interface for the switch base

MAC address. The interface is not configurable and is

always listed in the MAC Address Table.

For some features that allow you to configure interface settings, you can apply the same

settings simultaneously to any of the following:

•A single port

•Multiple ports

•All ports

•A single LAG

•Multiple LAGs

•All LAGs

•Multiple ports and LAGs

•All ports and LAGs

Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to

display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.

Use these links as follows:

•To display all ports, click the 1 link.

•To display all LAGs, click the LAG link.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The

procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to

page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual45

To configure a single port by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the port number.

For example, type mg4.

For more information, see Table 4, Naming conventions for interfaces on page 44.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the LAG number, for example l3.

For information, see Table 4, Naming conventions for interfaces on page 44.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the heading row.

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single port:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the port number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the LAG number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual46

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each port to configure.

The row for each selected interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each LAG to configure.

The check box associated with each interface is selected, and the row for each selected

interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying only ports, and not LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check boxes for all ports are selected and the rows for all ports are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link to display only the LAG interfaces.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every LAG is selected, and the rows for all LAGs are

highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual47

To configure multiple ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box associated with each port and LAG to configure.

The rows for the selected ports and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every port and LAG is selected, and the rows for all ports

and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Access the NETGEAR support website

From the device UI, you can access the NETGEAR support website at

netgear.com/support.

To access the support website from the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual48

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Help > Support.

The Support page displays.

7. To access the NETGEAR support site for the switch, click the Apply button.

Access the user manual online

The user manual (the guide you are now reading) is available at the NETGEAR download

center at netgear.com/support/download/.

To access the user manual online from the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Help > Online Help > User Guide.

The User Guide page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Get Started User Manual49

7. To access the NETGEAR download center, click the Apply button.

8. Enter the model number of the switch.

9. Locate the user manual on the product support web page.

2Configure System Information

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Switch system information

•Management access IP network and VLAN

•Time and SNTP

•Denial of service

•Domain Name System

•Green Ethernet

•Power over Ethernet (model MS510TXUP)

•PoE timer schedules

•SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3

•Link Layer Discovery Protocol

•DHCP Layer 2 relay

•DHCP snooping

•Dynamic ARP inspection

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual51

Switch system information

You can view or define system information, view temperature information, view fan

information, and view software information.

View or define system information

When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general

device information.

To view or define system information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Define the following fields:

•System Name: Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Location: Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Contact: Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

7. Click the Apply button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual52

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the status information that the System Information page

displays.

Table 5. System Information

Field Description

Product Name The product name of this switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.

System Object OID The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.

Date & Time The current date and time.

System Up Time The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Base Mac Address Universally assigned hardware address of the switch.

View the temperature and fan status

You can view the temperature and fan status.

The fans remove the heat generated by the power, CPU, and other components, and allow

the switch to function normally.

To view the temperature and fan status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual53

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Temperature Sensors and Fans sections.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable temperature and fan status information.

Table 6. Temperature and fan status

Field Description

Temperature Sensors

Sensor The temperature sensor index used to detect the temperature.

Description The description of the temperature sensor.

Temp (C) The current temperature in Celsius.

State The temperature state.

Max Temp (C) The maximum measured temperature in Celsius.

Fans

FAN The fan index used to identify the fan for the switch.

Description The description of the fan temperature sensor.

Type Specifies whether the fan module is fixed or removable.

Speed The fan speed.

Duty level(%) The duty level of the fan.

State Specifies whether the fan is operational.

View the software versions

You can view the software versions that are running on the switch.

To view the software versions:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual54

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Versions section.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Versions

section of the System Information page.

Table 7. Versions information

Field Description

Model Name The model name of the switch.

Boot Version The version of the bootloader software of the switch.

Software Version The version number of the software that is running on the switch.

View the system CPU status

You can monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization patterns across various

intervals to assess the performance, load, and stability settings of the switch.

To view the system CPU status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual55

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > System CPU Status.

The CPU Utilization section shows the memory information, task-related information, and

percentage of CPU utilization per task.

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Table 8. CPU Memory Status information

Field Description

Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

Configure the CPU thresholds

The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that,

when exceeded, trigger a notification. The notification occurs through SNMP trap and syslog

messages.

To configure the CPU thresholds:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual56

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold.

The CPU Threshold page displays.

7. Specify the thresholds:

• Rising Threshold: Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds

this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

• Rising Interval: This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to

86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

• Falling Threshold: Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below

this level for a configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold

value. The falling utilization threshold notification is sent only if a rising threshold

notification was sent previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time

period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization settings are not configured, the switch

uses the same values as the values that are used for the Rising CPU utilization. The

range is 1 to 100.

• Falling Interval: The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from

5 seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

• Free Memory Threshold: The free memory threshold value for the CPU in KB.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Management access IP network and VLAN

You can configure network information for the device UI, which is the logical interface used

for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports. The

settings associated with the device UI do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports

through which traffic is switched or routed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual57

Configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the

device UI

You can configure the IPv4 network information for the device UI, which is the logical

interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s ports.

To configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

7. Select one of the following radio buttons to specify how the network information for the

switch must be configured:

• Static IP Address: Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio

button.

• Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP): Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a BootP server.

• Dynamic IP Address (DHCP): Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a DHCP server. This is the default setting.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual58

8. If you select the Static IP Address radio button, configure the following network information:

• IP Address: The IP address of the network interface. The default value is

192.168.0.239. Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero.

For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.

• Subnet Mask: The IP subnet mask for the interface. The default value is

255.255.255.0.

• Default Gateway: The default gateway for the IP interface. The default value is

192.168.0.254.

9. In the Management VLAN ID field, leave the default value or specify the VLAN ID for the

management VLAN.

The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a

computer that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active

management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established

through any port.

When you change the management VLAN, an IP connection can be made only through a

port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID) of the port to be

connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the management VLAN ID.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN that must be the management VLAN exists. Also

make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the VLAN is the same as

the management VLAN ID. For information about creating VLANs and

configuring the PVID for a port, see VLANs on page 157.

The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:

•Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

•When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing

management VLAN is lost.

•The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management

VLAN.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the IPv6 network settings for the device UI

You can configure IPv6 network information for the device UI, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports.

To access the switch over an IPv6 network, you must initially configure the switch with IPv6

information (an IPv6 prefix, prefix length, and default gateway). You can configure IPv6 using

one of the following options:

•IPv6 auto-configuration

•DHCPv6

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual59

When in-band connectivity is established, IPv6 information can be changed using

SNMP-based management or web-based management.

To configure the IPv6 network settings for the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Configuration.

The IPv6 Network Configuration page displays.

7. Make sure that the Admin Mode Enable radio button is selected.

8. Determine how the switch acquires an IPv6 address:

• IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode: When this mode is enabled, the network

interface can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol

(NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages. When this mode is

disabled, the network interface does not use the native IPv6 address

auto-configuration features to acquire an IPv6 address. Auto-configuration can be

enabled only when DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the management interfaces.

• DHCPv6: Next to Current Network Configuration Protocol, select the DHCPv6 radio

button to enable the DHCPv6 client on the interface. The switch attempts to acquire

network information from a DHCPv6 server. Selecting the None radio button disables

the DHCPv6 client on the network interface.

When DHCPv6 is enabled, the DHCPv6 Client DUID field displays the client identifier

used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled) when sending messages to the DHCPv6

server.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual60

9. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the IPv6 network interface.

The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link-local address format.

10. To configure one or more static IPv6 addresses for the management interface, do the

following:

a. In the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length field, specify the static IPv6 prefix and prefix to the

IPv6 network interface.

The address is in the global address format.

b. In the EUI64 menu, select True to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI)

flag for IPv6 address, or select False to omit the EUI flag.

c. Click the Add button.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 network neighbors

You can view information about the IPv6 neighbors that the switch discovered through the

network interface by using the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).

To view the IPv6 Network Neighbor Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual61

6. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Neighbor.

The IPv6 Network Neighbor page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the information the IPv6 Network Neighbor page displays

about each IPv6 neighbor that the switch discovered.

Table 9. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information

Field Description

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the neighbor that was detected by the switch.

MAC Address The MAC address of the neighbor.

IsRtr • true (1): The neighbor is a router.

• false (2): The neighbor is not a router.

Neighbor State The state of the neighboring switch:

• reachable (1): The neighbor is reachable by th3 switch.

• stale (2): Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion.

• delay (3): No information was received from the neighbor during the delay period.

• probe (4): The switch is attempting to probe for the neighbor.

• unknown (5): The status is unknown.

Last Updated The last time that the neighbor information was updated.

Time and SNTP

The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a

less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the

clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the

Internet. You can also set the system time manually.

Configure the time settings manually

You can view and adjust date and time settings manually.

To manually configure the time setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual62

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

7. Select the Clock Source Local radio button.

8. In the Date field, specify the current date by entering the month, day, and year

(MM/DD/YYYY).

9. In the Time field, specify the current time by entering in hours, minutes, and seconds

(HH:MM:SS).

Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and

time using the CPU’s clock cycle.

10. In the Time Zone Name field, specify the acronym for a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is

different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

11. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from the

UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step 10. The allowed

range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual63

12. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step 10. The allowed

range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the time settings with SNTP and configure the

global SNTP settings

To configure the time by using SNTP and configure the global SNTP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Clock Source SNTP radio button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual64

The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:

•An SNTP server is configured.

•The switch can contact the SNTP server.

8. Next to Client Mode, select the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

• Unicast: SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

• Broadcast: SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a

single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.

The default value is Unicast.

9. If the SNTP client mode is Unicast, use the SNTP Server Configuration page to add the IP

address or DNS name of one or more SNTP servers for the switch to poll.

For more information, see Configure an SNTP server on page 67.

10. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and 123. The default value is 123. When the default

value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the

switch.

11. In the Unicast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual65

12. In the Broadcast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is

6 to 10. The default value is 6.

13. In the Unicast Poll Timeout field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP

response to a unicast poll request.

The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

14. In the Unicast Poll Retry field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to

an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured

server.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

15. In the Time Configuration section (above the SNTP Global Configuration section),

configure the following settings:

a. In the Time Zone Name field, specify the acronym for a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone

is different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

Note: When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the

time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the

same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time

zone in which the switch is located.

b. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different

from the UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step a. The allowed

range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

c. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is

different from UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step a. The allowed

range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual66

View the SNTP global status

When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, you can view the SNTP global status.

To view the SNTP global status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

7. Make sure that the Clock Source SNTP radio button is selected.

The SNTP Global Status section displays below the SNTP Global Configuration section.

8. Click the Refresh button to update the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 10. SNTP Global Status information

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system clock.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual67

Configure an SNTP server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as

an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock.

The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device

receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

The following is an example of strata:

• Stratum 0: A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1: A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited

message.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

• Other: The status of the last request is unknown.

• Success: The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out: After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad Date Encoded: The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported: The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized: The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field in the SNTP message.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message was

received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Reference Clock ID The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max

Entries

The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client.

Unicast Server

Current Entries

The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and processed

by the SNTP client since the last reboot.

Table 10. SNTP Global Status information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual68

• Stratum 2: The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

•T1: Time that the original request was sent by the client.

•T2: Time that the original request was received by the server.

•T

3: Time that the server sent a reply.

•T

4: Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol

SNTP servers.

Add an SNTP server

To add an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual69

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

7. From the Server Type menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the address field.

The address can be an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or host name (DNS).

8. In the Address field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or

host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this

address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each

time an SNTP request is sent to it.

9. If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard

port (123), specify the port number in the Port field.

The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

10. In the Priority field, specify the priority order which to query the servers.

The SNTP client on the device continues sending SNTP requests to different servers until

a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the

order in which to query the servers. The request is sent to an SNTP server with a priority

value of 1 first, then to a server with a priority value of 2, and so on. If any servers are

assigned the same priority, the SNTP client contacts the servers in the order that they

appear in the table. The range is from 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

11. In the Version field, specify the NTP version running on the server.

The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.

12. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added.

13. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status

information.

Table 11. SNTP Server Status information

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating

that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update

the system clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:

• Other: The status of the last request is unknown, or no SNTP responses were

received.

• Success: The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out: After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad Date Encoded: The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported: The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized: The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death: The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to

be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message

received from a server.

Requests The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot.

Failed Requests The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since the last reboot.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual70

Change the settings for an existing SNTP server

To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual71

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the configured server.

8. Specify new values in the available fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an SNTP server

To remove an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual72

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the configured server to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

Configure daylight saving time settings

You can configure settings for summer time, which is also known as daylight saving time.

Used in some countries around the world, summer time is the practice of temporarily

advancing clocks during the summer months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or

more hours near the start of spring and are adjusted backward in autumn.

To configure the daylight saving time settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

The DayLight Saving Configuration page displays.

7. Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

•Disable: Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring: Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and

end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual73

• Recurring EU: The system clock uses the standard recurring summer time settings

used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Recurring USA: The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Nonrecurring: Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date

and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the summer time

settings do not repeat on an annual basis.

8. Depending on your selection, configure the additional fields:

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring

USA radio button, the fields in the following table are visible and you must configure

them.

Table 12. Daylight saving setting is Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring USA

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week: Configure the start week in the month.

• Day. Configure the start day in the week.

• Month: Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week: Configure the end week in the month.

• Day: Configure the end day in the week.

• Month: Configure the end month.

• Hours: Configure the end hour.

• Minutes: Configure the end minutes.

Offset Configure recurring offset in minutes. The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Nonrecurring radio button, the fields in the

following table are visible and you must configure them.

Table 13. Daylight saving setting is Nonrecurring

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Month: Configure the start month.

• Date: Configure the start date in the month.

• Year: Configure the start year.

• Hours: Configure the start hour.

• Minutes: Configure the start minutes.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual74

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the daylight saving time status

The Daylight Saving (DST) Status section shows information about the summer time settings

and whether the time shift for summer time is currently in effect.

To view the daylight saving time status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Month: Configure the end month.

• Date: Configure the end date in the month.

• Year: Configure the end year.

• Hours: Configure the end hour.

• Minutes: Configure the end minutes.

Offset Specify the number of minutes to shift the summer time from the standard time.

The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes.

Zone Specify the acronym associated with the time zone when summer time is in

effect. This field is not validated against an official list of time zone acronyms.

Table 13. Daylight saving setting is Nonrecurring (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual75

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

The DayLight Saving Configuration page displays.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.

Table 14. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information

Field Description

Daylight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Nonrecurring

Begins At The start date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At The end date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving

time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is

disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Indicates whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Denial of service

You can configure the denial of service (DoS) settings for the switch. The switch provides

support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks.

Configure Auto-DoS

You can automatically enable all the DoS features available on the switch, except for the L4

Port attack. For information about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block,

see Configure denial of service on page 76.

To enable the Auto-DoS feature:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual76

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Auto-DoS Configuration.

The Auto-DoS Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Auto-DoS Mode Enable radio button.

When an attack is detected, a warning message is logged to the buffered log and is sent

to the syslog server. At the same time, the port is shut down and can be enabled only

manually by the admin user.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure denial of service

You can select which types of denial of service (DoS) attacks the switch monitors and blocks.

To configure individual DoS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual77

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Denial of Service Configuration.

The Denial of Service Configuration page displays.

7. Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any

associated values:

• Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size: Specify the minimum TCP header size

allowed. If you select the Denial of Service TCP Fragment radio button, the switch

drops the first TCP fragment with a TCP payload packet for which the minimum TCP

header size is larger than the IP payload length minus the IP header size. The range

for the minimum TCP header size is from 0 to 31. The default value is 20.

• Denial of Service Max ICMP Packet Size: Specify the maximum ICMPv4 packet

size allowed. If ICMPv4 DoS prevention or ICMPv6 DoS prevention is enabled, the

switch drops ICMPv4 or ICMPv6 ping packets with a size greater than the configured

value. The range is from 0 to 16376. The default value is 512.

• Denial of Service ICMPv4: Enabling ICMPv4 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv4 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than

the configured ICMPv4 packet size.

• Denial of Service ICMPv6: Enabling ICMPv6 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv6 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than

the configured ICMPv6 packet size.

• Denial of Service Ping of Death: Enabling Ping of Death DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop ICMP ping packets that are larger than 65535 bytes.

• Denial of Service IPv6 Fragment: Enabling IPv6 Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop IPv6 packets that contain a fragment header with the more flag set

to 1 and for which the payload length less than 1240.

• Denial of Service ICMP Fragment: Enabling ICMP Fragment DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop ICMP fragmented packets.

• Denial of Service Smurf: Enabling Smurf DoS prevention causes the switch to drop

broadcast ICMP echo request packet.

•Denial of Service SIP=DIP: Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets with a source IP address equal to the destination IP address.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual78

• Denial of Service SMAC=DMAC: Enabling SMAC=DMAC DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a source MAC address equal to the destination MAC

address.

• Denial of Service TCP FIN&URG&PSH: Enabling TCP FIN & URG & PSH DoS

prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags FIN, URG, and PSH set

and the TCP sequence number equal to 0.

• Denial of Service TCP Flag&Sequence: Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP control flags set to 0 and the TCP sequence

number set to 0.

• Denial of Service TCP Fragment: Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a TCP payload for which the IP payload length minus

the IP header size is less than the minimum allowed TCP header size.

• Denial of Service TCP Offset: Enabling TCP Offset DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop packets with a TCP header offset set to 1.

• Denial of Service TCP Port: Enabling TCP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets for which the TCP source port is equal to the TCP destination port.

• Denial of Service TCP Source Port: Enabling TCP Source Port DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop packets for which the TCP source port number is lower than

1024.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&FIN: Enabling TCP SYN & FIN DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and FIN set.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&RST: Enabling TCP SYN & RST DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and RST set.

• Denial of Service UDP Port: Enabling UDP Port DoS prevention causes the switch

to drop packets for which the UDP source port is equal to the UDP destination port.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual79

Domain Name System

You can configure information about Domain Name System (DNS) servers that the network

uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client.

Configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server

You can configure the global DNS settings and DNS server information.

To configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

The DNS Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Disable or Enable radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the

administrative status of the DNS client.

• Enable: Allows the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.

• Disable: Prevents the switch from sending DNS queries.

8. In the DNS Default Name field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS

queries.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual80

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The name

must not be longer than 255 characters.

9. In the DNS Server field, specify the IPv4 address to which the switch sends DNS queries.

10. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference

field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which

preferences were entered.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Table 15. DNS Server Configuration information

Field Description

ID The identification of the DNS Server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are determined by the

order in which they were entered.

Remove a DNS server

You can remove a DNS server that you no longer need.

To remove a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual81

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

The DNS Configuration page displays.

7. In the DNS Server Configuration table, select the check box for the DNS server.

Note: If you do not select a DNS server, all the DNS servers are removed

after you click the Delete button.

8. Click the Delete button.

The DNS server is removed.

Configure and view host name-to-IP address information

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or view dynamic host mappings.

Add a static entry to the dynamic host mapping table

To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual82

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The Host Configuration page displays.

7. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a required field.

8. In the IPv4/IPv6 Address field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.

9. Click the Add button.

Your settings are saved. The entry displays in the Dynamic Host Mapping table.

Remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table

To remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The Host Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the entry to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed from the Dynamic Host Mapping table.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual83

Change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping

table, view all entries, or clear all entries

To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping table,

view all entries, or clear all entries:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The Host Configuration page display.

7. Select the check box next to the entry to update.

8. Enter the new information in the appropriate field.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.

The dynamic host mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Table 16. Dynamic Host Mapping information

Field Description

Host Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Total Time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual84

Green Ethernet

You can configure the green Ethernet features to reduce power consumption.

Configure the global green Ethernet settings

You can configure the global green Ethernet settings.

To configure the global green Ethernet settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

The Green Ethernet Configuration page displays.

Elapsed Time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

IPv4/IPv6 Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name.

Table 16. Dynamic Host Mapping information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual85

7. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC

with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined

by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive

sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when the load is light.

Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not

dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is

transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure green Ethernet interface settings

You can configure green Ethernet settings for individual interfaces.

To configure the green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

The Green Ethernet Interface Configuration page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual86

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the EEE mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

By default, this mode is disabled for the port. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines

the MAC with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is

defined by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and

receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when the load is

light. Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are

not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is

transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage switch discovery with UPnP and

SSDP

By default, Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and Simple Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP)

are enabled on the switch. UPnP and SSDP allow the switch to be discovered in your

network, for example on Windows-based computers and mobile devices on the NETGEAR

Insight app is installed. For greater security you can disable UPnP and SSDP.

You cannot manage the settings for these protocols independently.

To manage switch discovery with UPnP and SSDP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual87

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Switch Discovery > UPnP / SSDP

The UPnP / SSDP page displays.

7. Select the Enable or Disable radio button.

By default, the Enable radio button is selected so that both UPnP and SSDP are enabled

and the switch can be discovered in the network.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The UPnP / SSDP Administrative Mode field shows the status of UPnP and SSDP.

Power over Ethernet (model MS510TXUP)

You can configure the global Power over Ethernet (PoE) configuration settings and the PoE

settings for each Ethernet port of model MS510TXUP.

PoE concepts

The PoE++ ports on model MS510TXUP support IEEE 802.3bt PoE. This model is also

compatible with PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) and PoE (IEEE 802.3af) and can support non-PoE

devices.

The maximum PoE power budget across all active PoE++ ports is 295W. The maximum PoE

power that an individual PoE++ port can supply is 60W.

Device class power requirements

PoE++, PoE+, and PoE use Ethernet cables to supply power to PoE-capable devices on the

network, such as WiFi 6 PoE+ and other access points, pan–tilt–zoom (PTZ) cameras, IP

cameras, VoIP phones, LED lighting, PoE speakers, and AV encoders. The switch is

compliant with the IEEE 802.3bt standard (PoE++) and backward compatible with the IEEE

IEEE 802.3at (PoE+) and 802.3af (PoE) standards. The switch can pass power through to

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual88

any powered device (PD) that supports these standards and lets you power such a device

without the need for a separate power supply.

The switch supports a plug-and-play process by which it detects the type of device that is

connected to one of its PoE++ ports and whether that device needs power and how much so

that the switch can provide the correct power to the device.

During the plug-and-play process, the connected device can provide its PoE class response

to the switch in many ways, depending on how the vendor programmed the device.

The following table shows the device classes for PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ devices adhering to

the IEEE 802.3at standard.

Table 17. PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ device class power allocation

Device class Compatible PoE standard Minimum output power

allocated by the port

Range of power delivered

to the powered device

0 PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ 15.4W 0.44W–13.0W

1 PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ 4.0W 0.44W–3.84W

2 PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ 7.0W 3.84W–6.49W

3 PoE, PoE+, and PoE++ 15.4W 6.49W–13.0W

4 PoE+ and PoE++ 30.0W 13.0W–25.5W

5 PoE++ 45.0W 25.5W–40.0W

6–81

1. The switch can support a Class 7 or Class 8 device up to 60W.

PoE++ 60.0W 40.0W–51.0W

The previous table shows the standard power ranges, calculated with the maximum cable

length of 328 feet (100 meters). If a powered device (PD) receives insufficient PoE power

from the switch, consider using a shorter cable.

Power allocation and power budget concepts

The switch is a smart switch in that it can allocate the required power to a connected device

by using a prioritization scheme: By default, power is supplied in ascending port order (that is,

lower port numbers are served first) until the power budget is consumed and insufficient

power remains to allocate to the next device. When less than 7W of PoE power is available

on a port, the port PoE LED lights yellow, and the attached device does not receive power

from the port. However, the switch continues to send data through the port connection.

The switch is also a smart switch in that it can override the IEEE power classification of a

powered device (PD): If the PD consumes less power than required by its power

classification, the switch provides only the power that the PD consumes instead of the power

that is required by the PD’s power classification.

If some PoE++ ports are in use and deliver power, you can calculate the available power

budget for the other PoE+ ports by subtracting the consumed (that is, delivered power) from

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual89

the total available power budget. (For information about the total available power budget, see

PoE concepts on page 87.)

An example:

Port 1 delivers 4.4W to a PD. The available power budget is 290.6W (295W–4.4W).

Another example:

A Class 3 PD is attached to Port 1, a Class 6 PD to Port 2, and another Class 6 PD to Port 3.

However, the PDs consume less power than defined by their classes: The PD attached to

Port 1 consumes 7.3W, the PD attached to Port 2 consumes 44.7W, and the PD attached to

Port 3 consumes 46.9W. So even though the switch provides power to two Class 6 devices

and one Class 3 device, the available power budget is 196.1W (295W–7.3–44.7–46.9W).

To determine the delivered power by a PoE++ port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual90

The delivered power is stated in the Output Power (mW) column.

Configure the global PoE settings

To configure the global PoE settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

The PoE Configuration page displays.

7. In the System Usage Threshold field, enter a number from 1 to 99 to set the threshold level

at which a trap is sent if the consumed power exceeds the threshold power. The default

setting is 95 percent.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual91

8. From the Power Management Mode menu, select the power management algorithm that

the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting powered devices (PDs):

• Static: Specifies that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power

threshold configured on the port.

• Dynamic: Specifies that the power consumption on each port is measured and

calculated in real time. The default setting is Dynamic.

9. To active the PoE traps, from the Traps menu, select Enable.

Selecting Disable deactivates the PoE traps. The default setting is Enable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 18. PoE Configuration fields

Field Description

Firmware Version The firmware version of the PoE firmware component.

Power Status The power status.

Total Power Available Watts The maximum amount of power in watts that the switch can deliver to all ports.

Threshold Power Watts If the consumed power is below the threshold power, the switch can power up

another port. The consumed power can be between the nominal and threshold

power. The threshold power is displayed in watts.

Consumed Power Watts The total amount of power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.

Manage the uninterrupted PoE feature

By default, the uninterrupted PoE feature is disabled, causing the switch to stop providing

PoE power while it is rebooting. If you enable the uninterrupted PoE feature, the switch

continues to provide PoE power to any attached PDs while the switch is rebooting, even if it

is rebooting after a regular firmware update.

However, note the following situations during which the switch temporarily stops providing

PoE:

•The switch reboots because you reset it to factory default settings.

•The switch reboots because you upgrade the switch firmware with a change in the

configuration structure, an update to the chip driver, or a change to the default PoE

settings.

Note: The threshold power value is determined by the value that you enter in the

System Usage Threshold field.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual92

To manage the uninterrupted PoE feature:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

The PoE Configuration page displays.

7. To enable or disenable uninterrupted PoE feature, select one of the following radio buttons:

•Disable: The uninterrupted PoE feature is disabled. The default setting is Disabled.

• Enable: The uninterrupted PoE feature is enabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the PoE port settings

To configure the PoE port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual93

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Port Power menu, select the PoE mode of the port:

• Enable: The port’s capacity to deliver power is enabled. This is the default setting.

• Disable: The port’s capacity to deliver power is disabled.

9. From the Port Priority menu, select the priority for the port in relation to other ports if the

total power that the switch is capable of delivering exceeds the total power budget:

• Low: Low priority. This is the default setting.

•Medium: Medium priority.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual94

• High: High priority.

• Critical: Critical priority.

The port priority determines which ports can still deliver power if the total power delivered

by the switch exceeds the total power budget. In such a situation, the switch might not be

able to deliver power to all connected powered devices (PDs). If the same priority applies

to two ports, the lower-numbered port receives higher priority.

10. From the Power Mode menu, select the PoE mode that the port must function in:

• 802.3af: The port is powered in and limited to the IEEE 802.3af mode. A PD that

requires IEEE 802.3at or IEEE 802.3bt does not receive power if the port functions in

IEEE 802.3af mode.

• Legacy: The port is powered using high-inrush current, which is used by legacy PDs

that require more than 15W to power up.

• Pre-802.3at: The port is initially powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode and, before

75 msec pass, is switched to the high power IEEE 802.3at mode. Select this mode if

the PD does not perform Layer 2 classification or if the switch performs

2-event Layer 1 classification.

• 802.3at: The port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode and is backward compatible

with IEEE 802.3af. In this mode, if the switch detects that the attached PD requests

more power than IEEE 802.3af but is not an IEEE 802.3at Class 4 device, the PD

does not receive power from the switch.

• Pre-802.3bt. The port supports Class 4 devices that use 4-pair PoE (4PPoE) to

receive power higher than 30W (up to the maximum power of 60W) but that are not

compliant with IEEE 802.3bt. The port also supports the IEEE 802.3at and IEEE

802.3af modes.

• Pre-802.3bt (max power): The port supports Class 4 devices that use 4-pair PoE

(4PPoE) to receive power higher than 30W (up to the maximum power of 60W) but

that are not compliant with IEEE 802.3bt. In this mode, the port allocates the

maximum power of 60W to the device. The port also supports the IEEE 802.3at and

IEEE 802.3af modes.

• 802.3bt-type3: The port supports the IEEE 802.3bt Type 3 mode, the IEEE

802.3atmode, and the IEEE 802.3af mode. The 802.3bt-type3 mode is the default

mode.

11. From the Detection Type menu, select how the port detects the attached PD:

• IEEE 802: The port performs a 4-point resistive detection. This is the default setting.

• 4ptdot3af+legacy: The port performs a 4-point resistive detection, and if required,

continues with legacy detection.

• Legacy: The port performs legacy detection.

12. From the Timer Schedule menu, select a timer schedule or select None, which is the

default selection.

For information about setting up and configuring PoE timer schedules, see PoE timer

schedules on page 96.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual95

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 19. PoE Port Configuration

Field Description

High Power All ports supports high power mode.

Max Power (mW) The maximum power in milliwatts that can be provided by the port.

Class The class defines the range of power that a powered device (PD) is drawing from

the switch. The class definitions are as follows:

• 0: 0.44–16.2W

• 1: 0.44–4.2W

• 2: 0.44–7.4W

• 3. 0.44–16.2W

• 4: 0.44–31.6W

• 5: 0.44–45.0W

• 6: 0.44–60.0W

• 7: 0.44–60.0W

• 8: 0.44–60.0W

• Unknown: The class cannot be detected, or no PD is attached to the port.

Power Limit Type The port power limit is equal to the class of the attached PD.

Output Voltage (Volts) The voltage that is delivered to the PD in volts.

Output Current (mA) The current that is delivered to the PD in mA.

Output Power (mW) The power that is delivered to the PD in milliwatts.

Status The operational status of the port:

• Disabled: No power is delivered.

• Delivering Power: Power is being drawn by the PD.

• Requesting Power: The port is requesting power.

• Fault: A problem occurred with the power.

• Test: The port is in test mode.

• Other Fault: The port is idle because of an error condition.

• Searching: The port is not in one of the other states in this list.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual96

PoE timer schedules

You can define multiple timer schedules (each with a unique name) that you can use for PoE

power delivery to attached powered devices (PDs).

After you create a timer schedule, you can associate it with one or more PoE ports (see

Configure the PoE port settings on page 92). You can use a separate timer schedule for

each PoE port.

IMPORTANT:

After you associate a timer schedule with a PoE port, the start date

and time force the PoE port to stop delivering power and the stop

date and time enable the PoE port to start delivering power.

You can create absolute timer schedules, which apply to specific dates and times, and you

can create recurring timer schedules. For each timer schedule, you can add multiple entries

that apply to the selected timer schedule only.

Create a PoE timer schedule

The maximum number of timer schedules that you can add is 100.

To create a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Fault Status The error description when the PoE port is in a fault state:

• No Error: The port is not in any error state and can provide power.

• MPS Absent: The port detected the absence of the main power supply,

preventing the port from providing power.

• Short: The port detected a short circuit condition, preventing the port from

providing power.

• Overload: The PD that is connected to the port attempts to draw more power

than allowed by the port’s settings, preventing the port from providing power at

all.

• Power Denied: The port was denied power because of a shortage of power or

because of an administrative condition. In this condition, the port cannot

provide power.

Table 19. PoE Port Configuration (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual97

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Name field, specify the name for a timer schedule.

8. Click the Add button.

The timer schedule is added to the table on the Timer Schedule Name page and is

assigned an ID.

Specify the settings for an absolute PoE timer schedule

An absolute timer schedule applies to specific dates and times. The schedule is executed

once only.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses specific dates and times:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual98

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE timer

schedule on page 96).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Absolute.

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule for specific dates and times.

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

8. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the times and dates:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Next to the Date End field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

9. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual99

Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule

A recurring schedule allows you to set up a single schedule that starts at a particular date

and that recurs either with a specific end date or indefinitely.

For a single recurring PoE timer schedule, you can add a daily, weekly, and monthly schedule

configuration. That is, these schedule configurations are not mutually exclusive but

complement each other.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses a recurring pattern:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE timer

schedule on page 96).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Periodic.

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule with a recurrence pattern.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual100

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

8. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the recurrence pattern:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Either select the No End Date radio button or select the End Date radio button, and

next to the End Date field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

e. From the Recurrence Pattern menu, select the pattern:

• Daily: The timer schedule works with daily recurrence. The fields adjust.

Either select the Every Weekday radio button to let the schedule operate from

Monday through Friday or select the Every Day(s) radio button and enter a

number from 0 to 255 in the field.

In the latter case, the schedule is triggered every specified number of days. If the

number of days is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered

only once.

• Weekly: The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Every Week(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 255 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of weeks. If the number of

weeks is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

Select a single Week Day check box, multiple check boxes, or all check boxes to

specify the day or days of the week that the schedule must operate.

• Monthly: The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Day field, enter a number from 1 to 31 to specify the day of the month when

the schedule must be triggered.

In the Every Month(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 99 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of months. If the number of

months is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

9. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual101

Change the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule

entry

You can change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry. (You cannot

do this for an existing absolute PoE timer schedule.)

To change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

8. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

9. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

10. Make the changes to the schedule entry.

For more information, see Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule on

page 99.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual102

Delete a PoE timer schedule entry

You can delete a PoE timer schedule entry that you no longer need.

To delete a PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

8. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

9. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

10. Click the Delete button.

The entry is deleted.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual103

Delete a PoE timer schedule

You can delete a PoE timer schedule that you no longer need. All entries that are part of the

PoE timer schedule are also deleted.

To delete a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the schedule that you want to delete.

8. Click the Delete button.

The schedule is deleted.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual104

SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3. The switch software

supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP

agent generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a hyphen (-) prefix. The

main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some

interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 community

Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP V1 and

SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to

change the configuration using SNMP.

Add an SNMP community:

To add an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual105

The Community Configuration page displays.

7. In the Management Station IP field, specify the IP address of the management station.

8. In the Management Station IP Mask field, specify the subnet mask to associate with the

management station IP address.

Together, the management station IP address and the management station IP mask

denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to

access this device. If either the management station IP address or management station

IP mask value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client’s

address is ANDed with the mask, as is the management station IP address. If the values

are equal, access is allowed.

For example, if the management station IP address and management station IP mask

settings are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, any client with an IP address in the range from

192.168.1.0 to 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only

one station, use a management station IP mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that

computer’s IP address as the client address.

9. In the Community String field, specify a community name.

10. From the Access Mode menu, select the access level for this community, which is either

ReadOnly or ReadWrite.

11. From the Status menu, select to enable or disable the community.

If you select Enable, the community name must be unique among all valid community

names or the set requests are rejected. If you select Disable, the community name

becomes invalid.

12. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added.

Modify an existing SNMP community

To modify an existing SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual106

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the community.

8. Update the desired fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP community

To delete an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual107

The Community Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the community to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The community is removed.

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap settings

You can configure settings for each SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 management host that must

receive notifications about traps generated by the device. The SNMP management host is

also known as the SNMP trap receiver.

Add an SNMP trap receiver

To add an SNMP trap receiver:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

7. In the Recipients IP field, enter the IPv4 address at which the SNMP traps from the switch

must be received.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual108

8. From the Version menu, select the trap version to be used by the SNMP trap receiver.

• SNMPv1: The switch uses SNMPv1 to send traps to the receiver. The default setting

is SNMPv1.

• SNMPv2: The switch uses SNMPv2 to send traps to the receiver.

9. In the Community String field, specify the name of the SNMP community that includes

the SNMP management host and the SNMP agent on the device.

This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

10. From the Status menu, select Enable to send traps to the receiver or select Disable to

prevent the switch from sending traps to the receiver.

11. Click the Add button.

The receiver configuration is added.

Modify information about an existing SNMP trap recipient

To modify information about an existing SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the recipient.

8. Change the fields as necessary.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual109

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP trap recipient

To delete an SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the recipient to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The trap recipient is removed.

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap flags

You can enable or disable traps that the switch can send to an SNMP manager. When the

condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to

any enabled SNMP trap receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual110

To configure the trap flags:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags.

The Trap Flags page displays.

7. Enable or disable the following system traps:

•Authentication: When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when events involving

authentication occur, such as when a user attempts to access the switch device UI

and does not provide a valid user name and password. The default is Enable.

• Link Up/Down: When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when the administrative or

operational state of a physical or logical link changes. The default is Enable.

• Spanning Tree. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when various spanning tree

events occur. The default is Enable.

• PoE. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when various PoE events occur. The

default is Enable.

• Fan Failure: When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when a fan failure occurs. The

default is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual111

View the supported MIBs

You can view a list of all MIBs that are supported on the switch.

To view the supported MIBs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Supported MIBs.

The Supported MIBs page displays.

The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.

Table 20. SNMP supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure SNMPv3 users

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user (admin). Therefore, you can create or modify

only one profile.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual112

To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by

using the web interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

The SNMPv3 Access Mode field is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for

the user account. Access for the admin account is always Read Write. Access for all

other accounts is Read Only.

7. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

You can select the MD5 radio button or the SHA radio button. With either of these

options, the user login password is used as SNMPv3 authentication password. For

information about how to configure the login password, see Device admin password on

page 324.

8. To enable encryption:

a. Select the Encryption Protocol DES radio button to encrypt SNMPv3 packets using

the DES encryption protocol.

b. In the Encryption Key field, enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric

characters.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual113

Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. A network manager

can view this information to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the

LAN.

LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

•Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

•Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

•Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

•Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP global settings

You can specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED settings that are applied to the switch.

To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

3. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual114

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

4. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration.

The LLDP Configuration page displays.

6. To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following

options:

•TLV Advertised Interval: The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP

advertisements. The default is 30 seconds.

• Hold Multiplier: The transmit interval multiplier value, where transmit hold multiplier ×

transmit interval = the time to live (TTL) value that the device advertises to neighbors.

The default is 4seconds.

• Re-initializing Delay: The number of seconds to wait before attempting to re-initialize

LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes. The default is

2 seconds.

• Transmit Delay: The minimum number of seconds to wait between transmissions of

remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured on

the switch. The default is 5 seconds.

7. To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the Fast Start Duration

field.

This value sets the number of times that LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast

start mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the

LLDP-MED network connectivity device. The default is 3 times.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure LLDP port settings

You can specify LLDP settings for a port.

To configure LLDP settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual115

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings.

The LLDP Port Settings page displays.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:

•Admin Status: Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:

- Tx Only: Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Rx Only: Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Tx and Rx: Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected

ports.

- Disabled: Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

The default is Tx and Rx.

• Management IP Address: Choose whether to advertise the management IP address

from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:

-Stop Advertise: Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.

- Auto Advertise: Advertise the current IP address of the device as the

management IP address.

The default is Auto Advertise.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual116

• Notification: When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to

notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.

• Optional TLVs: Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value (TLV)

information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information includes

the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port description.

For information about how to configure the system name, see Switch system

information on page 51. For information about how to configure the port description,

see Port settings and maximum frame size on page 149.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the LLDP-MED network policy

You can display information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the

LLDP frames on the selected local port.

To view the LLDP-MED network policy information for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy.

The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual117

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.

Note: The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no

interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the Interface menu does not display.

The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the

interface.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the

page.

Table 21. LLDP-MED network policy information

Field Description

Network Policy Number The policy number.

Application The media application type associated with the policy, which can be one of the

following:

• unknown

• voicesignaling

• guestvoice

• guestvoicesignaling

• softphonevoice

• videoconferencing

• streamingvideo

• videosignaling

A port can receive multiple application types. The application information is

displayed only if a network policy TLV was transmitted from the port.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Configure the LLDP-MED port settings

You can enable the LLDP-MED mode on a port and configure its properties.

To configure the LLDP-MED settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual118

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings.

The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.

7. From the Port menu, select the port to configure.

8. Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the

selected port:

• LLDP-MED Status. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When

LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively

enabled on the interface.

• Notification: When Notification is enabled, the port sends a topology change

notification if a device is connected or removed.

• MED Capabilities: When MED Capabilities is enabled, the port transmits the

capabilities type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames.

•Network Policy: When Network Policy is enabled, the port transmits the network

policy TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended MDI-PSE: When Extended MDI-PSE is enabled, the port transmits the

extended power sourcing equipment (PSE) TLV in LLDP frames.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual119

View the local information advertised through LLDP

You can view the data that each port advertises through LLDP.

To view the local LLDP information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > Local Information.

The Local Information page displays.

The page includes the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary

information.

Field Description

Device Information

Chassis ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The hardware platform identifier for the switch.

System Name The user-configured system name for the switch.

System Description The switch description, which includes information about the product model

and platform.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual120

7. To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of

the Port Information table.

The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected

port.

System Capabilities The primary functions that the switch supports.

Port Information

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

Port ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.

Port ID The port number.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

Advertisement The TLV advertisement status of the port.

Field Description

Managed Address

Address SubType The type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4

address.

Address The address used to manage the device.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The number that identifies the port.

MAC/PHY Details

Autonegotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The

option is True (enabled) or False (disabled).

Autonegotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The option is True (enabled)

or False (disabled).

Autonegotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T full-duplex

mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The MED capabilities enabled on the port.

Current Capabilities The TLVs advertised by the port.

Device Class Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity

device.

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual121

View the LLDP neighbors information

You can view the data that a specific port received from other LLDP-enabled systems.

To view the LLDP information received from a neighbor device:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > Neighbors Information.

The Neighbors Information page displays.

If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not

LLDP-enabled, no information displays.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual122

The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that

were discovered.

Field Description

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote

device.

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the

name might not be configured on the remote system.

7. To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry

column.

A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.

The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.

Field Description

Port Details

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.

Basic Details

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities The system capabilities of the remote system.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual123

Managed Addresses

Address SubType The type of the management address.

Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The port number on the remote device that sent the information.

MAC/PHY Details

Autonegotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.

The option is True (enabled) or False (disabled).

Autonegotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The option is True (enabled)

or False (disabled).

Autonegotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Current Capabilities The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Device Class The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as

follows:

• Endpoint Class 1 indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP

services.

• Endpoint Class 2 indicates a media endpoint class, offering media

streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.

• Endpoint Class 3 indicates a communications device class, offering all

Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support,

and device information management capabilities.

PoE Device Type The port PoE type. For example, Powered.

PoE Power Source The port’s power source.

PoE Power Priority The port’s power priority.

PoE Power Value The port’s power value.

Hardware Revision The hardware version advertised by the remote device.

Firmware Revision The firmware version advertised by the remote device.

Software Revision The software version advertised by the remote device.

Serial Number The serial number advertised by the remote device.

Model Name The model name advertised by the remote device.

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual124

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays. The page also shows the

VLAN Configuration section.

DHCP Layer 2 relay

If you enable and configure a DHCP relay agent on the switch, some Layer 2 (L2) devices do

not need to connect to a DHCP server on the physical network. A relay agent automatically

populates the gateway IP address (giaddr) field and adds the Relay Agent Information option

to DHCP messages. A DHCP server uses this option for IP addresses and other assignment

policies. A DHCP relay agent is usually an IP routing-aware device, which is also referred to

as a Layer 3 relay agent. In some network configurations, L2 devices must append the Relay

Agent Information option because they are closer to the end hosts.

An L2 device can operate as a bridge only for a network and might not include an IPv4

address on the network. If an L2 device lacks an IPv4 source address, the device cannot

relay packets directly to a DHCP server that is located on another network. In that situation,

Asset ID The asset ID advertised by the remote device.

Location Information

Civic The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device

advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value

length range is 6–160 characters.

Coordinates The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the

location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.

ECS ELIN The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The

field range is 10–25.

Unknown The unknown location information for the remote device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the

remote device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

LLDP Unknown TLVs

Type The unknown TLV type field.

Value The unknown TLV value field.

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual125

the L2 device can append the Relay Agent Information option and broadcast the DHCP

message.

Enable the DHCP L2 relay for the switch

You can globally enable the DHCP L2 relay for the switch.

To globally enable the DHCP L2 relay for the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration.

The DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button to disable or enable the DHCP L2

relay on the switch.

The default is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual126

Enable the DHCP L2 relay for a VLAN

To enable the DHCP L2 relay for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

The table lists the VLANs that are configured on the switch.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN.

8. Configure the following settings:

• Admin Mode: Enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the VLAN.

• Circuit ID Mode: Enable or disable the circuit ID suboption of DHCP Option-82.

• Remote ID String: If the DHCP server that you are using requires a remote ID,

specify the remote ID string of up to 32 characters.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual127

Configure an interface as a DHCP L2 relay

You can configure an interface as a DHCP L2 relay

To configure an interface as a DHCP L2 relay:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration.

The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual128

9. From the Admin mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the

interface.

The default is Disable.

10. From the 82 Option Trust Mode menu, select to enable or disable the interface as a trusted

interface for Relay Agent Information option (Option 82).

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Display the DHCP L2 relay interface statistics

To display the DHCP L2 relay interface statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics.

The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•VLANS: Only VLANs are displayed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual129

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the information on the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 22. DHCP L2 relay interface statistics information

Field Description

Interface The interface from which the DHCP message is received.

Untrusted Server Messages With

Opt82

The number of DHCP messages with Option 82 received from an untrusted

server.

Untrusted Client Messages With

Opt82

The number of DHCP messages with Option 82 received from an untrusted

client.

Trusted Server Messages Without

Opt82

The number of DHCP messages without Option 82 received from a trusted

server.

Trusted Client Messages Without

Opt82

The number of DHCP messages without Option 82 received from a trusted

client.

DHCP snooping

DHCP snooping is a feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP messages

and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted message is a

message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can cause traffic

attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the MAC address, IP

address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information that corresponds

to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an interface that is

configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A trusted interface is an

interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network.

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also

provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and

trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

Enable DHCP snooping for the switch

You can globally enable DHCP snooping for the switch.

To globally enable DHCP snooping for the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual130

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

7. Select the DHCP Snooping Mode Enable radio button.

The default is Disable.

8. To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, leave the MAC

Address Validation Enable radio button selected.

The default is Enable.

When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received on

an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware

address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Enable DHCP snooping for a VLAN

To enable DHCP snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual131

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

The table lists the VLANs.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN.

8. From the DHCP Snooping Mode menu, select Enable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DHCP snooping interface settings

You can view and configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses

received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or

BootP) responses received on that port are discarded.

To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual132

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

The Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Trust Mode menu, select the trust mode:

• Disabled: The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used to

launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings

database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:

-DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.

-DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address

is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface

where the message was received.

-DHCP packets are dropped if the source MAC address does not match the client

hardware address and if MAC address validation is globally enabled.

• Enabled: The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server

messages without validation.

10. From the Invalid Packets menu, select the packet logging mode.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual133

When enabled, the DHCP snooping feature generates a log message when an invalid

packet is received and dropped by the interface.

11. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, specify the rate limit value for DHCP snooping purposes.

If the incoming rate of DHCP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval

per second, the port shuts down. If the rate limit is None (which is the default), the burst

interval is also not applicable, and rate limiting is disabled.

12. In the Burst Interval (secs) field, specify the burst interval in seconds for rate limiting on the

interface.

If the rate limit is N/A, the burst interval is not applicable.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Add a static DHCP binding and display dynamic DHCP

bindings

You can add a static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings database and display or clear

the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.

To add a static DHCP binding and display or clear the dynamic bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual134

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

The Binding Configuration page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

8. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.

This is the key to the binding database.

9. From the VLAN ID menu, select the ID of the VLAN.

10. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address for the binding to be added.

11. Click the Add button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.

The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that

were learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping is enabled. The following table

describes the dynamic bindings information.

Table 23. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information

Field Description

Interface The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the

key to the binding database.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the client interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.

Lease Time The remaining IP address lease time for the client.

Remove a static DHCP binding

You remove a static binding from the DHCP snooping bindings database.

To remove a static DHCP binding:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual135

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

The Binding Configuration page displays.

7. In the Static Binding Configuration table, select the check box for the static binding.

8. Click the Delete button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is removed from the database.

Configure DHCP snooping persistent settings

You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The

bindings database can be stored locally on the switch or on a remote device in the network.

The switch must be able to reach the IP address of the remote device to send bindings to a

remote database.

To configure DHCP snooping persistent settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual136

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration.

The Persistent Configuration page displays.

7. Specify where the DHCP snooping bindings database is located.

• Local: The binding table is stored locally on the switch.

•Remote: The binding table is stored on a remote TFTP server.

If the database is stored on a remote server, specify the following information:

- Remote IP Address: Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.

- Remote File Name: Specify the file name of the DHCP snooping bindings

database in which the bindings are stored.

8. In the Write Delay field, specify the time that the switch must wait after writing binding

information to persistent storage.

The delay allows the switch to collect as many entries as possible (new and removed)

before writing them to the persistent file. You can specify from 15 to 86400 seconds. By

default, the delay is 300 seconds.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View or clear DHCP snooping statistics

You can view and clear per-interface statistics about the DHCP messages filtered by the

DHCP snooping feature on untrusted interfaces.

To view or clear the DHCP snooping statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual137

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Statistics.

The Statistics page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Click the Clear button to clear all interfaces statistics.

The following table describes the DHCP snooping statistics.

Table 24. DHCP Snooping Statistics information

Field Description

MAC Verify Failures The number of DHCP messages that were dropped because the source MAC address

and client hardware address did not match. MAC address verification is performed only if

it is globally enabled.

Client Ifc Mismatch The number of packets that were dropped by DHCP snooping because the interface and

VLAN on which the packet was received do not match the client’s interface and VLAN

information stored in the binding database.

DHCP Server Msgs The number of DHCP server messages (such as DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

and DHCPRELEASEQUERY messages) that were dropped on an untrusted port.

Dynamic ARP inspection

Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and malicious ARP

packets. The feature prevents a class of man-in-the-middle attacks, where an unfriendly

station intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its unsuspecting

neighbors. The unfriendly station sends ARP requests or responses mapping another

station’s IP address to its own MAC address.

DAI relies on DHCP snooping. DHCP snooping listens to DHCP message exchanges and

builds a bindings database of valid MAC addresses, IP addresses, VLAN interfaces, and so

on.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual138

If DAI is enabled and if a sender MAC address and sender IP address do not match an entry

in the DHCP snooping bindings database, the switch drops the ARP packet if. However, you

can also create static mappings in the DHCP snooping bindings database. Static mappings

are useful when hosts configure static IP addresses, the switch cannot run DHCP snooping,

or other switches in the network do not run dynamic ARP inspection. A static mapping

associates an IP address to a MAC address on a VLAN.

You can configure DAI VLANs, interfaces, and access control lists (ACLs) with associated

rules.

Configure the global DAI settings

You can configure the global dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) settings.

To configure the global DAI settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Configuration.

The DAI Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Validate Source MAC Disable or Enable radio button.

This settings specifies the DAI source MAC validation mode for the switch. If you select

Enable, the sender MAC validation for the ARP packets is enabled. The default is

Disable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual139

8. Select the Validate Destination MAC Disable or Enable radio button

This setting specifies the DAI destination MAC validation mode for the switch. If you

select Enable, the destination MAC validation for the ARP response packets is enabled.

The default is Disable.

9. Select the Validate IP Disable or Enable radio button.

This setting specifies the DAI IP validation mode for the switch. If you select Enable, IP

address validation for the ARP packets is enabled. The default is Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DAI VLANs

You can configure one or more dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) VLANs.

To configure one or more DAI VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI VLAN Configuration.

The DAI VLAN Configuration page displays.

The table lists the VLANs.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual140

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if DAI is enabled for the

VLAN.

The default is Disable.

9. From the Invalid Packets menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if DAI logging is

enabled for the VLAN.

The default is Enable.

10. In the ARP ACL Name field, specify a name of an existing ARP ACL (see Create a DAI

access control list on page 142).

The ARP ACL is used for ARP packet validation. To remove an existing ARP ACL name

from the ARP ACL Name field, enter N/A.

11. From the Static Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if the ARP packet must be

validated using the DHCP snooping database if the ARP ACL rule does not match.

If enabled, the ARP packet is validated by the ARP ACL rule only. If disabled, the ARP

packet needs further validation by using the DHCP snooping database. The default is

Disable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DAI interfaces

You can configure one or more dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) interfaces.

To configure one ore more DAI interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual141

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Interface Configuration.

The DAI Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Form the Trust Mode menu, specify if the interface is trusted for DAI.

If enabled, the interface is trusted and ARP packets entering the interface are forwarded

without checking. If disabled, the interface is not trusted and ARP packets entering the

interface are subjected to DAI. The default is Disable.

10. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, specify the rate limit value for DAI.

If the incoming rate of ARP packets exceeds the specified value for consecutive burst

interval seconds, ARP packets are dropped. If you specify N/A, no limit exists. The range

is from 0 to 300. The default is 15 packets per second (pps).

11. In the Burst Interval (secs) field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting on the

interface. If you specify N/A, the burst interval is not effective. The range is from 1 to 15. The

default is 1 second.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual142

Create a DAI access control list

You can create a dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) access control list (ACL) to which you then

can add rules.

To create a DAI ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI ACL Configuration.

The DAI ACL Configuration page displays.

7. In the Name field, specify a name of up to 31 characters.

8. Click the Add button.

The DAI ACL is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual143

Configure a rule for an existing DAI ACL

After you add a DAI ACL (see Create a DAI access control list on page 142), you can

configure a rule for it.

To configure a rule for an existing DAI ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI ACL Rule Configuration.

The DAI ACL Rule Configuration page displays.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the DAI ACL for which you want to configure the rule.

8. From the Action menu, select the action that must occur if a packet matches the rule's

criteria:

• Permit: The packet is permitted and forwarded.

•Deny: The packet is denied and dropped.

9. In the Source IP Address field, enter the source IP address that must be used as a match

for the rule.

10. In the Source MAC Address field, enter the source MAC address that must be used as a

match for the rule.

11. Click the Add button.

The rule is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual144

Delete a rule from an existing DAI ACL

You can delete a rule from an existing DAI ACL.

To delete a rule from an existing DAI ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI ACL Rule Configuration.

The DAI ACL Rule Configuration page displays.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the DAI ACL from which you want to delete a rule.

8. Select the check box for the rule.

9. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual145

Delete a DAI access control list

You can delete a dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) access control list (ACL) that you no longer

need.

To delete a DAI ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI ACL Configuration.

The DAI ACL Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the ACL.

8. Click the Delete button.

The DAI ACL is removed.

Display the DAI statistics

To display the DAI statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual146

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Control > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Statistics.

The DAI Statistic page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Refresh button.

8. To clear the DAI statistics, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 25. DAI Statistics information

Field Description

VLAN The VLAN ID.

DHCP Drops The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because no matching DHCP

snooping binding entry exists.

DHCP Permits The number of ARP packets that were forwarded by DAI because a matching DHCP

snooping binding entry exists.

ACL Drops The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because no matching ARP ACL

rule exists for the VLAN and the static flag is set on the VLAN.

ACL Permits The number of ARP packets that were permitted by DAI because a matching ARP ACL rule

exists for the VLAN.

Bad Source MAC The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because the sender MAC address

in the ARP packets did not match the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

Bad Dest MAC The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because the target MAC address in

the ARP reply packets did not match the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure System Information User Manual147

Invalid IP The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because the sender IP address in

the ARP packets or the target IP address in the ARP reply packets is invalid. Invalid

addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, IP multicast addresses, class E addresses

(240.0.0.0/4), and loopback addresses (127.0.0.0/8).

Forwarded The number of valid ARP packets forwarded by DAI.

Dropped The number of invalid ARP packets dropped by DAI.

Table 25. DAI Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

148

3Configure Switching

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Port settings and maximum frame size

•Link aggregation groups

•VLANs

•Auto-VoIP

•Auto-VLAN

•Spanning Tree Protocol

•Multicast

•IGMP snooping

•MLD snooping

•Multicast VLAN registration

•MAC address table

•Layer 2 loop protection

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual149

Port settings and maximum frame size

You can configure the ports and display port information on the switch. You can also set the

maximum frame size.

To configure the port settings and maximum frame size:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

The Port Configuration page displays.

7. In the Frame Size field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame size that each interface can

support.

The frame size includes the Ethernet header, CRC, and payload. The range is from 1522

to 10000. The default maximum frame size is 1522.

8. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual150

9. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

10. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a port.

The string can be up to 64 characters in length.

11. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for port control. You must select Enable

in order for the port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.

12. From the Speed menu, select the speed for the port:

• Auto: The supported speed is automatically set by the port negotiation process.

•100M Full Duplex.

• 1G Full Duplex.

• 2.5G Full Duplex.

• 5G Full Duplex.

Note: After you change the speed for a port, the switch might be inaccessible

for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. From the Link Trap menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if the port must send a trap

when the link status changes.

By default, the settings is Enable and the switch sends a link trap. If you select Disable,

the switch does not send a link trap.

14. From the Flow Control menu, select the configuration for IEEE 802.3 flow control:

• Disable: If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and

data loss could occur. This is the default setting.

• Symmetric: If the port buffers become full, the switch sends pause frames to stop

traffic.

Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number

of frames being switched. When you enable flow control, the switch can send a pause

frame to stop traffic on the port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the

port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner

devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the time that is specified in the

pause frame. When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a

specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. The

switch also honors incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual151

• Asymmetric: If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames,

and data loss could occur. However, the switch does honor incoming pause frames by

temporarily halting transmission.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 26. Port Configuration information

Field Description

Port Type For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the options are as follows:

• Mirrored: The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to

the probe port.

• Probe: Use the port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member: The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk. Look

at the LAG pages for more information.

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Frame Size (1522 to 10000) The maximum Ethernet frame size that each interface can support. The

frame size depends on your selection from the Frame Size menu above the

table and applies to each interface.

MAC Address The address of the interface.

PortList Bit Offset The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type

PortList is used to manage in SNMP

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the port.

Link aggregation groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. By default, the LAG

becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

The switch supports static LAGs. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, the port

neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

The switch supports eight LAGs.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual152

Configure LAG settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it

were a single link.

To configure LAG settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration.

7. To change the default name of the LAG, in the LAG Name field, enter a name for the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.

By default, the LAGs are named ch1, ch2, ch3, and so on through ch8.

8. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual153

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.

10. From the Hash Mode menu, select the load-balancing mode for a port channel (LAG):

• 1 Src/Dest MAC, incoming port: This mode uses the source MAC address,

destination MAC address, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.

•2 Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port Fields: This mode uses the source and destination

IP addresses and source and destination TCP or UDP port values that are associated

with the packet.

Note: The switch balances traffic on a port channel (LAG) by selecting one

of the links in the channel over which packets must be transmitted. The

switch selects the link by creating a binary pattern from selected fields

in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link.

11. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode

associated with the LAG:

• Disable: Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable: Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

12. From the Link Trap menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether to send a trap when

the link status changes.

The default is Enable, which allows the trap to be sent.

13. From the LAG Type menu, select Static or LACP:

• Static: Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The

LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.

• LACP: Enables LACP on the selected LAG. The LAG is configured automatically.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 27. LAG Configuration information

Field Description

LAG ID The identifier of the LAG.

Active Ports The ports that are members of the LAG.

LAG State Indicates if the link is up or down.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual154

Configure LAG membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the

port channel as a single link.

To configure LAG membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership.

7. From the LAG ID menu, select the LAG ID.

8. In the LAG Name field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. You can also use the

default name.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual155

9. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected

LAG.

A selected port is displayed by a check mark.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP system priority

You can set the LACP system priority that applies to all LAGs on the switch.

To set the LACP system priority:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration.

The LACP Configuration page displays.

7. In the LACP System Priority field, specify the switch’s link aggregation priority relative to

the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.

A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the setting globally by

specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual156

Set the LACP port priority settings

You can configure the LACP priority value and administrative LACP time-out value for a port.

To configure LACP port priority settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration.

The LACP Port Configuration page displays.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the LACP Priority field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interface.

This value specifies the interface’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the

other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a

lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual157

9. In the Timeout field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:

• Long: Specifies a long time-out value.

• Short: Specifies a short time-out value.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the

packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A port can handle traffic

for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. The switch supports up

to 256 VLANs.

The following VLANs are preconfigured on the switch and you cannot delete them:

• VLAN 1: The default VLAN of which all ports are members.

•VLAN 4086: The default Auto-WIFi VLAN.

• VLAN 4087: The Auto-Camera VLAN.

• VLAN 4088: The default Auto-VoIP VLAN.

• VLAN 4089: The Auto-Video VLAN.

By default, VLANs 4086, 4087, 4088, and 4089 do not include any members but you can

manually add members.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual158

Configure VLAN settings

You can configure the various VLAN settings.

Add a VLAN

To add a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 2 to 4093, excluding 4086, 4087, 4088, and 4089.

(The default VLANs are 1, 4086, 4087, 4088, and 4089).

8. In the VLAN Name field, specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. You

cannot change the names of the default VLANs.

9. The VLAN Type field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring.

You cannot change the type of the default VLANs. When you manually create a VLAN, its

type is static. A VLAN that is created by the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)

initially uses a type of dynamic. You can change the type of a dynamic VLAN to static.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual159

10. Click the Add button.

The VLAN is added to the switch.

Delete a VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier.

Note: You cannot delete VLANs 1, 4086, 4087, 4088, and 4089, all of which

are predefined.

8. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed.

Reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings

If you reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings, all VLANs that you

added are deleted. (The predefined VLANS are not deleted).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual160

The VLAN default values are as follows:

•All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

•All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

•All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

•All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

•All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

•GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

To reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. Except for the predefined default VLANs, all VLANs are deleted.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual161

Configure VLAN membership

To configure VLAN membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

7. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual162

You can select a VLAN that is predefined or that you added (see Add a VLAN on

page 158).

8. In the Group Operation menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports

in the VLAN:

• Untag All: For all ports and LAGs that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed

from all egress packets.

• Tag All: For all ports and LAGs that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are

tagged.

• Remove All: All ports and LAGs are removed from the VLAN, including the ports and

LAGs that were dynamically registered through GVRP.

9. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default mode:

• T (Tagged): Selects the port as a tagged port in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the port are tagged for this VLAN.

•U (Untagged): Selects the port as an untagged port in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the port are untagged for this VLAN.

•Blank: The port is excluded from the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank and none of the ports are a member of the VLAN.

(VLAN 1 is an exception. By default, all ports are untagged members of VLAN 1.)

However, ports can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

10. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default mode:

• T (Tagged): Selects the LAG as a tagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the LAG are tagged for this VLAN.

• U (Untagged): Selects the LAG as an untagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the LAG are untagged for this VLAN.

•Blank. The LAG is excluded from the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank and none of the LAGs are a member of the VLAN.

(VLAN 1 is an exception. By default, all LAGs are untagged members of VLAN 1.)

However, LAGs can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through

GVRP.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual163

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 28. Advanced VLAN membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long,

including blanks. The names for the following VLANs are predefined:

• VLAN 1: Default.

• VLAN 4085: Auto-WiFi.

• VLAN 4087: Auto-Camera.

• VLAN 4088: Auto-VoIP

• VLAN 4089. Auto-Video.

VLAN Type The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1): Always present.

• Static: A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic: A VLAN that is created through GVRP registration, that you did not convert to

a static VLAN, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

View the VLAN status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

To view the VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual164

6. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

The VLAN Status page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 29. VLAN status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1): Always present.

• Auto-WiFi (VLAN ID = 4086): Always present.

• Auto-Camera (VLAN ID = 4087): Always present.

• Auto-VoIP (VLAN ID = 4088): Always present.

• Auto-VIdeo (VLAN ID = 4089): Always present.

• Static: A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic: A VLAN that is created through GVRP registration, that you did not convert

to a static VLAN, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

Routing Interface If VLAN routing is configured for the VLAN, the interface that is associated with the VLAN.

Member Ports The ports, LAGs, or both that are included in the VLAN.

Configure the PVID settings for an interface

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a

PVID:

•By default, the PVID for each port is 1.

•If you do not specify another value, the default VLAN PVID is used.

•To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member (see Configure VLAN membership on page 161).

To configure PVID settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual165

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

The Port PVID Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on the port.

The default is 1.

10. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a

comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

11. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. You can specify port

tagging for the VLAN only if the port that you want to add as a tagged port is also member

of the VLAN. To reset the VLAN tag configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword.

12. From the Acceptable Frame menu, specify one if the following types of frames that can be

received on the port:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual166

• Admit All: Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames that are received on the port

are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for the port. This is the

default selection.

• VLAN Only: Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames that are received on the port

are discarded.

• Admit Untagged Only: Untagged frames that are received on the port are accepted.

With the Admit All and VLAN Only selections, VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in

accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

13. From the Ingress Filtering menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable: The frame is discarded if the port is not a member of the VLAN with which

this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in

the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that

received this frame.

• Disable: All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification. The default is Disable.

14. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 30. PVID Configuration information

Field Description

Current Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled for the interface.

Untagged VLANs The number of untagged VLANs for the interface.

Tagged VLANs The number of tagged VLANs for the interface.

Forbidden VLANs The number of forbidden VLANs for the interface.

Dynamic VLANs The number of dynamically added VLANs for the interface.

Configure a MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and a VLAN ID. The MAC-to-VLAN

configurations are shared across all ports of the switch (that is, a system-wide table exists

with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual167

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the

MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found,

the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority-tagged,

it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.

Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that you can configure a MAC address

mapping to a VLAN that you did not yet create on the switch.

Add a MAC-based VLAN

To add a MAC-based VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the MAC Address field, enter a MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range from 1 to 4093.

9. Click the Add button.

The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual168

Delete a MAC address from the VLAN mapping

To delete a MAC address from the VLAN mapping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN page displays.

7. Select the check box for the MAC-to-VLAN mapping.

8. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed from the MAC-to-VLAN mapping table.

Configure protocol-based VLAN groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames that

arrive on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames that arrive on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual169

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port (see Configure the PVID

settings for an interface on page 164).

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned

automatically.

To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays.

7. In the Group ID field, enter a number to identify the group.

The number must be in the range from 1 to 128.

8. In the Group Name field, enter a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

9. In the Protocol field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.

You can enter keywords such as arp, ip, and ipx. Separate keywords with a comma. You

can also enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the range from 0x0600 (1536) to

0xFFFF (65535).

10. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual170

The ID can be any number in the range from 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assign

this VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this

group.

11. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

The Ports field displays all the member ports that belong to the group.

Configure protocol-based VLAN group membership

To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual171

7. From the Group ID menu, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

The Group Name field shows the name that is associated with the group.

8. In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to include in the

protocol-based VLAN group.

A protocol-based VLAN group can include both port and LAGs. A selected port or LAG is

displayed by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button

Your settings are saved.

10. To display the current numbers in the selected protocol-based VLAN group, click the

Current Members button.

Configure a voice VLAN

You can configure the settings for a voice VLAN.

To configure a voice VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual172

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration.

The Voice VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for the voice VLAN for the switch. The

default is Disable.

8. Select the interface by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Interface Mode menu, select the voice VLAN mode for selected interfaces:

• Disable: The interface is not configured as a voice VLAN. This is the default setting.

• None: Allows the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

•VLAN ID: Configures the phone to send tagged voice traffic. You must enter the

VLAN ID in the Value field (see the next step).

• Dot1p: Configures voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. You must enter

the dot1p value in the Value field (see the next step).

• Untagged: Configures the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

10. In the Value field, enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This field is enabled only if you select VLAN ID or Dot1p from the Interface Mode menu.

11. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

The default is Disable.

12. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed

on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices

are authorized through dot1x.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual173

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

13. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.

The range is from 0 to 64. The default value is 0.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on an

interface.

Configure the GARP switch settings

The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is used to exchange information

between GARP participants to register and deregister attribute values within a bridged LAN.

When a GARP participant declares or withdraws a given attribute, the attribute value is

recorded with the applicant state machine for that attribute, for the port from which the

declaration or withdrawal was made.

•Registration occurs only on ports that receive the GARP PDU containing a declaration or

withdrawal.

•Deregistration occurs only if all GARP participants connected to the same LAN segment

as the port withdraw the declaration.

GARP is part of the IEEE 802.1p extension to its 802.1D (spanning tree) specification. It

includes the following:

• GARP Information Declaration (GID): The part of GARP that generates data.

•GARP Information Propagation (GIP): The part of GARP that distributes data.

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

To configure the GARP switch settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual174

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration.

The GARP Switch Configuration page displays.

7. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selection specifies the global administrative mode for GARP on the switch. The

default is Disable, which causes the protocol to be inactive.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure GARP ports

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

To configure GARP ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual175

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration.

The GARP Port Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the GVRP Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for GARP on the port. The default is

Disable, which causes the protocol to be inactive and the port settings to be without any

effect.

10. In the Join Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds between the transmission of GARP

PDUs registering (or reregistering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group.

Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The default is 20 centiseconds

(0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.

11. In the Leave Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds to wait after receiving an

unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry.

This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to

maintain uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds).

The default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each

GARP participant for each port.

12. In the Leave All Timer field, specify how frequently (in centiseconds) LeaveAll PDUs are

generated.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual176

A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain

registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in

the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5 * LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The default is 1000

centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for

each port.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Auto-VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because

voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traffic, the Auto-VoIP feature provides a

classification for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above data packets, allowing

the switch to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature, voice

prioritization is provided based on the SIP call-control protocol or OUI bits.

Configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings

To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for

packets carrying the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) VoIP protocol.

VoIP frames that are received on ports that for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are

marked with the specified CoS traffic class value.

To configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual177

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings.

The Port Settings page displays.

7. In the Protocol Based Global Settings section, specify the following global settings:

a. From the Prioritization Type menu, select Traffic Class or Remark.

This specifies the type of prioritization.

b. From the Class Value menu, specify the CoS class value to be reassigned for packets

that the voice VLAN receives.

8. In the Protocol Based Global Settings section, specify the Auto VoIP Mode settings:

a. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the

following links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the

default setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

b. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or

type the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the

heading row.

c. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select to enable or disable the Auto VoIP mode

for the interface or interfaces.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational State field displays the operational VoIP status on an interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual178

Configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties

With Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI)–based Auto-VoIP, voice prioritization is

provided based on OUI bits.

To configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties.

The Properties page displays.

7. In the Auto-VoIP VLAN ID field, enter the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.

The default Auto-VoIP VLAN ID is 4088. You can use that VLAN ID or create another

VLAN ID for Auto-VoIP.

8. From the OUI-based priority menu, select the OUI-based priority of the switch, from 0 to 7.

The default value is 7.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual179

Configure the VoIP OUI-based port settings

You can configure the VoIP OUI port settings.

To configure VoIP OUI-based port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings.

The Port Settings page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual180

9. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational State field displays the operational VoIP status on an interface.

Manage the VoIP OUI table

Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a

hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration

authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone

manufacturer:

•00:01:E3: SIEMENS

•00:03:6B: CISCO1

•00:12:43: CISCO2

•00:60:B9: NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E: PINTEL

•00:E0:75: VERILINK

•00:E0:BB: 3COM

•00:04:0D: AVAYA1

•00:1B:4F: AVAYA2

You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on

the network.

Add OUIs to the OUI table for the Auto-VoIP VLAN

To add an OUI to the OUI table for the Auto-VoIP VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual181

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

7. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

You can configure up to 32 OUIs.

8. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters.

9. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

Delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table for the Auto-VoIP VLAN

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table for the AUto-VoIP VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual182

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

7. Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.

8. Click the Delete button.

The telephony OUI entries are removed.

Display the Auto-VoIP status

You can display the Auto-VoIP status.

To view the Auto-VoIP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status.

The Auto-VoIP Status page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual183

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

Table 31. Auto-VoIP status

Field Description

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID The Auto-VoIP VLAN ID. (The default VLAN ID is 4088.)

Maximum Number of Voice Channels Supported The maximum number of voice channels supported (32).

Number of Voice Channels Detected The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.

Auto-VLAN

The Auto-VLAN feature consists of Auto-WiFi and Auto-camera features, which provide a

classification for respectively WiFi and digital camera packets so that they can be

automatically placed in a VLAN and then be prioritized above other packets, allowing the

switch to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VLAN feature, traffic

prioritization is based on the organizationally unique identifier (OUI) bits of a WiFi device or

camera.

Configure the Auto-VLAN properties

By default, the Auto-WiFi VLAN is VLAN ID 4086 and the Auto-Camera VLAN is VLAN ID

4087. You can change these VLAN IDs. By default, an OUI-based priority value of 7 is

assigned to the traffic in these VLANs. For each VLAN independently, you can change the

priority to another value.

To configure the Auto-VLAN properties:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual184

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VLAN > Properties.

The Properties page displays.

7. In the Auto-WiFi VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID for the Auto-WiFi VLAN.

The default Auto-WiFi VLAN ID is 4086. You can use that VLAN ID or specify another

VLAN ID.

8. From the Auto-WiFi priority menu, select the OUI-based priority for the Auto-WiFi VLAN

from 0 to 7.

The default value is 7.

9. In the Auto-Camera VLAN ID field, specify the ID for the Auto-Camera VLAN.

The default Auto-Camera VLAN ID is 4087. You can use that VLAN ID or specify another

VLAN ID.

10. From the Auto-Camera priority menu, select the OUI-based priority for the Auto-Camera

VLAN from 0 to 7.

The default value is 7.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Auto-VLAN port settings

For each interface, you can enable the Auto-WiFi VLAN, the Auto-Camera VLAN, or both

VLANs. Depending on the OUI of the WiFi device or camera, traffic on the interface can then

automatically be added to the Auto-WiFi VLAN or Auto-Camera VLAN and prioritized

accordingly.

To configure the Auto-VLAN port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual185

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VLAN > Port Settings.

The Port Settings page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Auto WiFi Mode menu, select to enable or disable the Auto-WiFi VLAN mode for

the interface or interfaces.

10. From the Auto Camera Mode menu, select to enable or disable the Auto-Camera VLAN

mode for the interface or interfaces.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational State fields display the operational status of the Auto-WiFi and

Auto-Camera VLANs on an interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual186

Manage the OUI table for Auto-WiFi and Auto-Camera

VLANs

Device hardware manufacturers can include an organizationally unique identifier (OUI) in a

network adapter to help identify a hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number

assigned by the IEEE registration authority.

For the WiFI devices and cameras in your network, you can add an OUI and description to

identify the devices on the network and enable them to be automatically added to a VLAN for

traffic prioritization

Add OUIs to the OUI table for the Auto-WiFi and Auto-Camera VLANs

To add an OUI to the OUI table for Auto-WiFi and Auto-Camera VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VLAN > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

7. In the OUIs field, specify the WiFi device or camera OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

You can configure up to 32 OUIs.

8. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual187

The maximum length of description is 32 characters.

9. From the Auto-VLAN Type menu, select Auto-WiFi or Auto-Camera, depending on the

type of device for which you are adding an OUI.

10. Click the Add button.

The OUI entry is added.

Delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table for Auto-WiFi and

Auto-Camera VLANs

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table for Auto-WiFi and Auto-Camera

VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VLAN > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

7. Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.

8. Click the Delete button.

The OUI entries are removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual188

Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of network

devices. STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops.

STP (also referred to as “classic” STP) provides a single path between end stations, avoiding

and eliminating loops. For information about configuring the global STP settings for the

switch, see Configure the STP settings and view the STP status on page 188.

The switch support the following spanning tree versions:

• CST: Common STP. For information on configuring CST, see Configure the CST settings

on page 190 and Configure the CST port settings on page 192.

• MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, also referred to as MST) supports

multiple instances of spanning tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different

interfaces. For information on configuring MSTP, see Manage the MST settings on

page 197 and Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance on page 200.

• RSTP: Rapid STP. Each instance of the spanning tree behaves in the manner specified in

IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but

not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the

forwarding state). For information on viewing the RSTP state, see View the Rapid STP

information on page 196.

The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to

configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end

stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the forwarding state and the

suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the

parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both RSTP and STP. It

behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP bridge can be

configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configure the STP settings and view the STP status

You can configure the STP settings and view the STP status on the switch.

To configure the STP settings and view the STP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual189

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

The STP Configuration page displays.

7. Configure the following global settings for the switch:

a. Spanning Tree State: Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.

By default, spanning tree operation is disabled.

b. STP Operation Mode: Specify the STP version for the switch.

The options are STP, RSTP, and MSTP: The default is RSTP

c. Configuration Name: Specify a name to identify the STP, RSTP, or MSTP

configuration.

The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

d. Configuration Revision Level: Specify an identifier to identify the STP, RSTP, or

MSTP configuration.

The values can be from 0 to 65535. The default value is 0.

e. Forward BPDU while STP Disabled: Enable or disable the bridge protocol data

unit (BPDU) flood.

This setting specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning

tree is disabled on the switch.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual190

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 32. STP Configuration status

Field Description

Global Settings

Configuration Digest Key The identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

STP Status

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST

last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.

Topology Change The value of the topology change setting for the switch that indicates if a

topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. The option

is True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It consists of the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost The path cost to the designated root for the CST.

Root Port The port to access the designated root for the CST.

Max Age (secs) The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds

that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.

Forward Delay (secs) The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay setting.

Hold Time (secs) The minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration

BPDUs.

CST Regional Root The priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.

CST Path Cost The path cost to the CST tree regional root.

Configure the CST settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on the switch.

To configure the CST settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual191

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

The CST Configuration page displays.

7. Specify the CST options:

• Bridge Priority: When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The range is from 0 to 61440. The bridge priority is a multiple

of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is

automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if

you set the priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets

the value to 0. The default value is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs): The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before

implementing a topological change. The range is from 6 to 40, and the value must be

less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *

(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs): The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait

between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be

less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1.

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs): The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops: The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The

range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 hops.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual192

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.

Table 33. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status

Field Description

MST ID The MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each

of them.

VID ID The VLAN IDs (VIDs) and the corresponding filtering IDs (FIDs) associated with each of them.

FID ID The FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

Configure the CST port settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on a specific

port on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) if a severe DOT1S error condition

occurs. The most common cause is that BPDU flooding occurs for DOT1S, for example, if

DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs during 3 seconds. Other causes for DOT1S D-Disable

are rare.

To configure the CST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual193

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

The CST Port Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the STP Status menu, select the option to enable or disable the spanning tree

administrative mode associated with the port or LAG.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Enable.

10. From the Fast Link menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

11. From the BPDU Forwarding menu, configure BPDU forwarding.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable. When BPDU forwarding is

enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on the port when STP is disabled

on the port.

12. From the Auto Edge menu, specify if the port is allowed to become an edge port if it does

not detect BPDUs for some time.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Enable.

13. In the Path Cost field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common

and internal spanning tree.

Specify a value in the range from 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is

set to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from an incoming STP packet.

14. In the Priority field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if you attempt to set the priority to

any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If you try to set it to any value between 16 and

(2*16 – 1), it is set to 16, and so on. The range is 0 to 240. The default value is 128.

15. In the External Port Path Cost field, set the external path cost to a new value for the

specified port in the spanning tree.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual194

The value range is 0 to 200000000. The default is 0.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

17. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 34. CST port configuration

Field Description

Port State The forwarding state of the port. The default is Disabled.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up from the port

priority and the interface number of the port.

Hello Timer The value of the setting for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.

View the CST port status

You can display the common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree for a specific

port on the switch.

To view the CST port status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual195

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

The CST Port Status page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 35. CST port status information

Field Description

Interface The physical port or LAG that is associated with the CST.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each

spanning tree. The port role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup,

Master, or Disabled.

Designated Root The root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.

Designated Bridge The identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the

next BPDU to be transmitted for the port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled or

Disabled.

Point-to-Point MAC The derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root The bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

CST Path Cost The path cost to the CST regional root.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual196

View the Rapid STP information

You can view information about the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.

To view information about RSTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP.

The RSTP page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual197

The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the page.

Table 36. Rapid STP status information

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port

role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup Master, or Disabled.

Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP, RSTP, and MSTP

Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.

Status The forwarding state of the port.

Manage the MST settings

You can configure a multiple spanning tree (MST) on the switch.

Configure an MST instance

To configure an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual198

The MST Configuration page displays.

7. Configure the MST values:

• MST ID: Specify the ID of the MST. The range is from 1 to 15.

•Priority: The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest

priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you

specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the

next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any

value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0. The default

value is 32768. The range is from 0 to 61440.

• VLAN ID: The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can

select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are

already associated with the MST instance.

8. Click the Add button.

The MST is added.

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

Table 37. MST configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Last TCN The time in the format “day:hour:minute:second” since the topology of the selected

MST instance last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change settings for the switch, indicating if a topology

change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance. It is either

True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost The path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.

Root Port The port to access the designated root for this MST instance.

Modify an MST instance

To modify an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual199

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the instance.

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

8. Update the settings as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an MST instance

To delete an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual200

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the instance.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MST instance is removed.

Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance

You can configure and display the port setting for a Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) on the

switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) if a severe DOT1S error condition

occurs. The most common cause is that BPDU flooding occurs for DOT1S, for example, if

DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs during 3 seconds. Other causes for DOT1S D-Disable

are rare.

To configure and view the port settings for an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual201

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration.

The MST Port Configuration page displays.

Note: If no MST instances are configured on the switch, the page displays a

“No MSTs Available” message.

7. From the Select MST menu, select the MST instance.

You can select only instances that you added to the switch (see Configure an MST

instance on page 197).

8. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

9. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

10. Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:

• Port Priority: The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The

port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16,

the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a

multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set

to 0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. Specify a

value in the range from 0 to 240.

• Port Path Cost: Set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance. Specify a value in the range from 0 to 200000000.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual202

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 38. MST port status information

Field Description

Auto Calculated Port Path

Cost

Indicates whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not

(Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the

configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Up Time Since Counters

Last Cleared

The time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in days, hours,

minutes, and seconds.

Port Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port

or port channel. The option is Enable or Disable.

Port Forwarding State The current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines what

forwarding action is taken on traffic. The options are as follows:

• Disabled: STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic

while learning MAC addresses.

• Discarding: The port is currently blocked. The port cannot forward traffic

nor can it learn MAC addresses.

• Manual Forwarding: STP is currently disabled on the port. The port

forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.

• Learning: The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot

forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.

• Forwarding: The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can

forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup, Master, or

Disabled.

Designated Root The root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are

less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.

Designated Bridge The bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual203

Display the STP statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

To display the spanning tree statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

The STP Statistics page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual204

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 39. STP Statistics information

Field Description

Interface The physical port or LAG on the switch.

STP BPDUs Received The number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Received The number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Received The number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are

identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

View, search, or clear the MFDB table

The Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) holds the port membership information for all

active multicast forwarding address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and

MAC address pair. Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

To view, search, or clear the MFDB table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual205

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

The MFDB Table page displays.

7. In the Search by MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

8. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

10. To clear all multicast forwarding address entries, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 40. MFDB table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.

The options are IGMP snooping, GMRP

, Static Filtering, and MLD snooping.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user.

Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. The options are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interfaces The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and

removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual206

Display the MFDB statistics

To display the MFDB statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The MFDP Statistics page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 41. MFDB Statistics information

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database

table can hold (512 entries).

Most MFDB Entries Since Last

Reset

The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast Forwarding

Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB

high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual207

Configure the auto-video multicast settings

You can configure the auto-video multicast settings.

To configure auto-video multicast settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > Auto-Video > Auto-Video Configuration.

The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.

7. Select one of the following radio buttons:

•Select the Disable radio button to globally disable Auto-Video administrative mode

for the switch. This is the default setting.

•Select the Enable radio button to globally enable Auto-Video administrative mode for

the switch.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Auto-Video VLAN field displays the Auto-Video VLAN ID that is configured on the

switch. By default, this VLAN ID is 4089.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual208

IGMP snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward IPv4 multicast traffic intelligently. Multicast IPv4 traffic is traffic that is destined to a

host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0

to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards

traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from

broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be detected or

processed by all connected nodes. For multicast packets, this approach could lead to a less

efficient use of the network bandwidth, particularly when the packets are intended for a small

number of nodes only. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. Although nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, the nodes cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media while the multicast packets are being flooded. Such as waste of bandwidth is

even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets can solve this problem. While the IGMP packets

are being forwarded throughout the network, the switch uses the information in the packets to

determine which segments must receive packets that are directed to the group address.

Configure IGMP snooping

You can configure the settings for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for

multicast traffic.

To configure IGMP snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual209

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Configuration page displays.

7. Select the IGMP Snooping Status Enable or Disable radio button.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The

default is Disable.

8. Select the Validate IGMP IP header Enable or Disable radio button.

When IGMP IP header validation is enabled, any IGMP IP header must include the

Router Alert, ToS, and TTL information. Otherwise, the IGMP packet is discarded. The

default value is Enable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 42. IGMP Snooping Configuration information

Field Description

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the switch.

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping

The interfaces that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping

The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier

The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual210

Configure IGMP snooping for interfaces

To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Interface

Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual211

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

This selection specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping

for the switch. The default is Disable.

10. In the Host Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

11. In the Max Response Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a

query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that

interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

12. In the MRouter Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query

on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

13. From the Fast Leave Mode menu, select whether fast leave mode is enabled.

The option are Enable and Disable. The default is Disable. If Fast Leave is enabled, the

interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2 forwarding table when the switch

receives an IGMP leave message for a multicast group without first sending MAC-based

general queries.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table

You can view and clear all entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database that were created for

IGMP snooping.

To view, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual212

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table.

The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.

7. In the Search By MAC Address field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry

you want to view.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

8. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

10. To clear all multicast forwarding address entries that were created for IGMP snooping,

click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 43. IGMP Snooping Table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated

by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end

user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or

protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. The options are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the

associated address.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual213

Configure IGMP snooping for VLANs

To configure IGMP snooping for VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check boxes for one or more VLANs.

If you select the check box for a single VLAN, the VLAN ID displays in the VLAN ID field.

8. Configure the IGMP snooping values for the selected VLAN or VLANs:

• Admin Mode: Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The

default is Disable.

• Fast Leave Mode: Enable or disable the IGMP snooping Fast Leave mode for the

specified VLAN ID. If Fast Leave is enabled, the VLAN can be immediately removed

from the Layer 2 forwarding table when the switch receives an IGMP leave message

for a multicast group without first sending MAC-based general queries. The default is

Disable.

• Host Timeout: Set the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for the

specified VLAN ID. The range is from the value for the Maximum Response Time plus

1 to 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

• Maximum Response Time: Set the value for the maximum response time of IGMP

snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to the Host Timeout value

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual214

minus 1. This value must be greater than group membership interval value. The

default is 10 seconds.

• MRouter Timeout: Set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for

the specified VLAN ID. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. The default is

0 seconds.

• Report Suppression Mode: Enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression

mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the

suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3

membership table. The results is that only the most essential reports are sent to the

IGMP routers so that the routers can continue to receive the multicast traffic.The

default is Disable.

• Querier Mode: Enable or disable the IGMP querier mode. The default is Disable.

• Query Interval: Set the IGMP query interval for the specified VLAN ID. The range is

from 1 to 1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN

To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual215

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces

You can configure an interface as the designated interface to which a multicast router is

connected. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router

reachable from the interface. Configuring a multicast router interface is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets

accordingly. This configuration is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast

router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

To configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual216

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP multicast router VLAN

You can configure an interface to forward only snooped IGMP packets from a specific VLAN

to the multicast router connected to the interface. This configuration is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP packets

accordingly. This configuration is required only in a complex network if you want to make sure

that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch.

To configure an IGMP multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual217

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration.

The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

8. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

IGMP snooping querier overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically queries all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network

and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure an IGMP snooping querier

You can configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier.

To configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual218

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration.

The Querier Configuration page displays.

7. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode: Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Snooping Querier IP Address: Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as

the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address

is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.

• IGMP Version: Specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

The range is 1 to 2. The default is 2.

•Query Interval (secs): Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent

by the snooping querier. The query interval must be in the range from 1 to 1800. The

default is 60 seconds.

• Querier Expiry Interval (secs): Specify the interval in seconds after which the last

querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be in the range from

60 to 300. The default is 125 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP snooping querier for a VLAN

You can configure an IGMP snooping querier for use with a VLAN on the network.

To configure am IGMP snooping querier for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual219

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Either specify a new VLAN or change an existing VLAN:

•Specify a new VLAN: Do the following:

a. From the VLAN ID menu, select New Entry.

b. In the VLAN ID field, enter the ID for a VLAN for which the IGMP snooping

querier is not yet enabled.

• Change an existing VLAN. From the VLAN ID menu, select the check box for a

VLAN for which the IGMP snooping querier is already enabled.

8. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Election Participate Mode: Enable or disable the querier mode:

- Disable: Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

- Enable: The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address: Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries that are sent to the VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual220

Remove the IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN

You can remove the IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN.

To remove the IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the VLAN for which you want to remove the IGMP snooping querier.

8. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. (The VLAN itself is not deleted.)

Display the status of the IGMP snooping querier VLANs

To display the status of the IGMP snooping querier VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual221

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status.

The Querier VLAN Status page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 44. Querier VLAN Status information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is administratively enabled and the

VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of

the following states:

• Querier: The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch

sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier

query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it

moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier: The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the

querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves into querier

mode.

• Disabled: The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping

querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not operational on

the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network

management address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual222

MLD snooping

In IPv6 networks, Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping performs a similar function as

IGMP does in IPv4 networks. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively

forwarded to ports that are configured to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports

in a VLAN. The ports are determined by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.

A multicast listener is a device that is configured to receive IPv6 multicast packets. MLD is

used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover the presence of multicast listeners on its

directly-attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest to neighboring

devices.

The MLD protocol is derived from IGMP. MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is equivalent to IGMPv2,

and MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD is a subprotocol of Internet

Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6

messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.

Enable MLD snooping

You can enable MLD snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.

To enable MLD snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on

the VLAN.

Operational Max Response

Time

The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the

snooping querier.

Table 44. Querier VLAN Status information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual223

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration.

The Configuration page displays.

7. Select the MLD Snooping Admin Mode Enable radio button.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.

Table 45. MLD Snooping Configuration information

Field Definition

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that were processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for MLD

Snooping

The interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled. MLD

snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface for the interface to

be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which segments must receive

multicast packets directed to the group address.

VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD

Snooping

The VLANs on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled.

Configure MLD snooping for interfaces

To configure MLD snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual224

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration.

The Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the interface mode for the

selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch.

The default is Disable.

10. In the Membership Interval field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than the

maximum response time. The default is 260 seconds.

11. In the Max Response Time in seconds field, specify the time that the switch must wait

after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular

group on that interface.

Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual225

12. In the Expiration Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query on

an interface before removing the interface from the list of interfaces with multicast routers

attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

13. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable Fast Leave on the interface.

If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2

forwarding table when the switch receives an MLD leave message for a multicast group

without first sending MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the MLD VLAN settings

To configure the MLD VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, enter the ID for a VLAN that must be configured for MLD snooping.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual226

8. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave mode

for the specified VLAN ID.

If Fast Leave is enabled, the VLAN can be immediately removed from the Layer 2

forwarding table when the switch receives an MLD leave message for a multicast group

without first sending MAC-based general queries.

9. In the Membership Interval field, set the value for the group membership interval of MLD

snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600.

10. In the Maximum Response Time field, set the value for the maximum response time of

MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval –1. This value must be less than the

group membership interval value.

11. In the Multicast Router Expiry Time field, set the value for the multicast router expiry time

of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 0 to 3600.

12. Click the Add button.

Your settings are saved. MLD snooping is enabled on the specified VLAN.

Modify the MLD snooping settings for a VLAN

To the modify MLD snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual227

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Change the settings.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove MLD snooping from a VLAN

To remove MLD snooping from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Click the Delete button.

MLD snooping is removed from the VLAN.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual228

Configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces

To configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual229

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

selected interfaces.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an MLD multicast router VLAN

To configure an MLD multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration.

The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want the multicast router to be

enabled.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID.

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

VLAN ID.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual230

Configure an MLD snooping querier

You can configure the settings for an MLD snooping querier.

To configure an MLD snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

3. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

4. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration.

The Querier Configuration page displays.

6. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode: Enable or disable MLD snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Querier Address: Specify the snooping querier IP address that must be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries. This address is used when no address is

configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent. The supported IPv6 formats

are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

• MLD Version: The MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries is version 1.

This field is fixed.

•Query Interval (secs): Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent

by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800.

The default value is 60.

• Querier Expiry Interval (secs): Specify the interval in seconds after which the last

querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be a value in the

range of 60 to 300. The default value is 60.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual231

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The page displays VLAN IDs enabled for the MLD snooping querier.

Configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings

To configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is

administratively enabled and for which a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

8. From the Querier Election Participate Mode menu, select to enable or disable the querier

participation election mode for MLD snooping.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN,

the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the

snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the

querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual232

9. In the Querier VLAN Address field, specify the snooping querier address to be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 46. MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the

following states:

• Querier: The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch

sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query

interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to

non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier: The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the

querier expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier

mode.

• Disabled: The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping

querier moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the

VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management

address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Operational Max

Response Time (sec)

The maximum response time in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.

Multicast VLAN registration

IGMP and MLD snooping help to limit multicast traffic when member ports are in the same

VLAN. However, when ports belong to different VLANs, a copy of the multicast stream is sent

to each VLAN with member ports in the multicast group. Multicast VLAN registration (MVR)

eliminates the need to duplicate the multicast traffic when multicast group member ports

belong to different VLANs.

MVR uses a dedicated multicast VLAN to forward multicast traffic over the L2 network. You

can configure one multicast source VLAN (MVLAN) only on the switch. Such an MVLAN is

used only for certain multicast traffic, such as traffic from an IPTV application, to prevent

duplication of multicast streams for clients in different VLANs. Clients can dynamically join or

leave the MVLAN without interfering with their membership in other VLANs.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual233

MVR, like IGMP and MLD snooping, allows a Layer 2 switch to listen to IGMP and MLD

messages to learn about multicast group membership.

You can configure global, group, interface, and group membership settings.

Configure the global MVR settings

You can configure the global MVR settings that apply to the switch.

To configure the global MVR settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Basic > MVR Configuration.

The MVR Configuration page displays.

7. From the MVR Running menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if MVR is globally

enabled or disabled on the switch

The default is Disable.

8. In the MVR Multicast VLAN field, specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is

received.

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4093. The default 1.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual234

9. In the MVR Global Query Response Time field, set the period that the switch must wait for

an IGMP group membership report from an interface before removing the interface as a

member from the multicast group.

This period applies only to the removal of the interface from the receiver port on the

switch. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default

or configured MVR query time for an IGMP group membership report before removing the

interface as a member from the multicast group. The period is equal to a tenths of a

second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The default is 5 tenths or one-half.

10. From the MVR Mode menu, select Compatible or Dynamic as the MVR mode of

operation:

• Compatible: The switch cannot learn existing multicast groups by snooping the

queries from source ports. The default is Compatible.

• Dynamic: The switch can learn existing multicast groups by snooping the queries

from source ports and forward the reports from the hosts on the multicast VLAN.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 47. MVR configuration information

Field Definition

MVR Max Multicast Groups The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

MVR Current Multicast Groups The number of the MVR groups allocated.

Configure an MVR group

You can configure an MVR group. After you configure interfaces for MVR, you can add them

as members to the MVR group.

To configure an MVR group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual235

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration.

The MVR Group Configuration page displays.

7. In the MVR Group IP field, specify the IP address for the new MVR group.

8. In the Count field, specify the number of contiguous MVR groups.

This number helps you to create multiple MVR groups through a single click of the Add

button. If the field is empty, then clicking the button creates only one new group. The field

is displayed as empty for each particular group. The range is from 1 to 256.

9. Click the Add button.

The MVR group is added.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 48. MVR group configuration information

Field Definition

Status The status of the specific MVR group.

Members The list of interfaces that participate in the MVR group.

Remove an MVR group

You can remove an MVR group that you no longer need.

To remove an MVR group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual236

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration.

The MVR Group Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the MVR group.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MVR group is removed.

Configure an MVR interface

We recommend that you first configure and MVR interface before you add it as a member to

an MVR group.

To configure an MVR interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual237

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Interface Configuration.

The MVR Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1: Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default setting.

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, specify whether MVR is enabled on the interface by selecting

Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable.

10. From the Type menu, specify whether the interface is an MVR receiver or an MVR source

by selecting receiver or source.

The default port type is none.

11. From the Immediate Leave menu, specify whether the Immediate Leave feature is enabled

by selecting Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

13. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The Status field shows the status for each interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual238

Configure the interface members of an MVR group

You can add or remove interfaces as members of an MVR group.

To configure the interface members of an MVR group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Membership.

The MVR Group Membership page display.

7. From the MVR Group IP menu, select the IP address of the MVR group.

8. In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to make a member

of the MVR group.

A selected port or LAG is shown by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual239

Display the MVR statistics

You can display MVR statistics for the switch. These statistics are associated with IGMP.

To display the MVR statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Statistics.

The MVR Statistics page displays.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 49. MVR statistics information

Field Definition

IGMP Query Received The number of received IGMP queries.

IGMP Report V1 Received The number of received IGMP V1 reports.

IGMP Report V2 Received The number of received IGMP V2 reports.

IGMP Leave Received The number of received IGMP leaves.

IGMP Query Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP queries.

IGMP Report V1 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP V1 reports.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual240

MAC address table

You can view or configure the MAC address table. This table contains information about

unicast entries for which the switch holds forwarding or filtering information. This information

lets the transparent bridging function determine how an incoming frame must be propagated.

If you clear the MAC address entries in the MAC address table, only the dynamic entries are

removed.

View, search, or clear the MAC address table

To view, search, or clear the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

IGMP Report V2 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP V2 reports.

IGMP Leave Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP leaves.

IGMP Packet Receive Failures The number of IGMP packet receive failures.

IGMP Packet Transmit Failures The number of IGMP packet transmit failures.

Table 49. MVR statistics information (continued)

Field Definition

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual241

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Basic > Address Table.

The Address Table page displays.

7. Use the Search menu and field to search for a VLAN ID, MAC address, or interface

number:

• VLAN ID: From the Search menu, select VLAN ID, and enter the VLAN ID, for

example, 100. Then click the Go button.

•MAC Address: From the Search menu, select MAC Address, and enter the 6-byte

hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for example,

01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the

remaining (higher) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.

• Interface: From the Search menu, select Interface, and enter the interface ID using

the respective interface naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the Go

button.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

9. To clear all dynamic MAC address entries in the table, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 50. MAC address table information

Field Description

Total MAC Address The number of MAC addresses learned or configured.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is a 6-byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for

example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

Interface The interface upon which this address was learned.

Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:

• Static: The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user

and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned, and is being used.

• Management: The value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an

existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual242

Set the dynamic address aging interval

You can set the address aging interval for the forwarding database. This is the time-out

period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

To set the address aging interval:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Addresses.

The Dynamic Addresses page displays.

7. In the Address Aging Timeout (seconds) field, specify the time-out period in seconds for

aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

The value can be any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The default is 300

seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual243

Add a static MAC address to the MAC address table

To add a static MAC address to the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The Static MAC Address page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface or LAG to which you are adding a static MAC

address.

8. In the Static MAC Address field, enter the static MAC address.

9. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID that must be associated with the MAC

address.

10. Click the Add button.

The static MAC address is added to the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual244

Remove a static MAC address from the MAC address table

You can remove a static MAC address that you no longer need.

To remove a static MAC address from the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The Static MAC Address page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface or LAG on which the static MAC address is

configured.

8. Select the check box for the MAC address.

9. Click the Delete button.

The static MAC address is removed from the MAC address table.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual245

Layer 2 loop protection

Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the

performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.

The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection

per port or globally.

If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined PDU packets to a Layer 2

broadcast destination address (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF) on all ports for which the feature is

enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific

ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the

previously mentioned broadcast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet

is compared with the MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the

packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other

broadcast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.

If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform

one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:

•The port is shut down.

•A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be

sent to the syslog server.)

•The port is shut down and a log message is generated.

Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware

switches. It is intended for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree BPDUs. Loop

protection detects physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device. You must

enable loop protection globally before you can enable and configure it at the interface level.

Loop protection is supported on physical interfaces and static LAG interfaces, but not on

dynamic LAG interfaces.

Configure global Layer 2 loop protection

Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports, you must globally enable and

configure loop protection.

To configure L2 loop protection globally:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual246

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

The L2 Loop Protection Configuration page displays.

7. To enable or disable loop protection feature, select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable

radio button.

The default is Enable.

8. From the Transmit Interval menu, select the time in seconds between transmission of loop

packets.

The default transmit interval is 5 seconds. The selected interval applies to all ports and

LAGs for which you enable loop protection

9. From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets that a port or

LAG can receive before an action is taken.

The default setting is 1 packet. The selected number of packets applies to all ports and

LAGs for which you enable loop protection.

The default is 1.

10. In the Disable Timer field, enter the time in seconds after which a port or LAG is disabled

when a loop is detected.

The range is from 0 to 604800 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. The selected time

applies to all ports and LAGs for which you enable loop protection.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual247

Configure the loop protection settings for ports and

display the loop protection state

Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports, you must globally enable loop

protection.

To view and configure L2 loop protection on a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

The L2 Loop Protection Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Switching User Manual248

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Keep Alive menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether keep-alives are

enabled on an interface.

The default is Enable.

10. From the RX Action menu, select the action that occurs when the switch detects a loop on

an interface:

• Log: The switch logs a message.

• Disable: The switch disables the interface. This is the default action.

• Both: The switch both logs a message and disables the interface.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. To clear all the statistics in the table, click the Clear button.

13. Click the Refresh button to update the page to show the latest information.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 51. L2 Loop Protection Interface information

Field Description

Loop Detected Shows whether a loop is detected on the interface. If the interface is disabled and then

reenabled, the status changes to No again.

Loop Count The number of packets that were received after the loop was detected.

Time Since Last Loop The time that elapsed since the loop was detected.

Port Status The status of the interface (Enabled, Disabled, or D-Disabled, which stands for

diagnostically disabled).

249

4Configure Routing

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Routing concepts

•IPv4 routing

•IPv6 routing

•VLAN routing

•Router discovery for a VLAN routing interface

•Routes and the routing table

•Address Resolution Protocol

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual250

Routing concepts

The switch supports IP routing. When a packet enters the switch, the switch checks the

destination MAC address to determine if it matches any of the configured routing interfaces. If

it does, the switch searches the host table for a matching destination IP address. If a

matching entry is found, the packet is routed to the host. If no matching entry is found, the

switch performs a longest prefix match on the destination IP address. If a matching entry is

found, the packet is routed to the next hop. If no matching entry is found, the packet is routed

to the next hop that is specified in the default route. If no default route exists, the packet is are

dropped.

The routing table can include static entries that you added manually. The host table can

include static entries that were manually added and entries that were dynamically added

through ARP.

IPv4 routing

You can enable or disable the routing mode and display IP routing data.

Manage the IPv4 routing mode

You can enable or disable the global IPv4 routing mode for the switch.

The switch allows routing through any of its interfaces only after you enable routing on the

switch. Separately, you can enable routing on VLANs (see VLAN routing on page 272).

To manage the global IPv4 routing mode on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual251

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing > IP > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

7. Do one of the following:

• Enable the IPv4 routing mode: Select the Routing Mode Enable radio button.

• Disable the IPv4 routing mode: Select the Routing Mode Disable radio button. This

is the default is selection.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the IP configuration information displayed on the page.

Table 52. Global IP status information

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams

originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

The default value is 64.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time

constant. The default value is 1.

View the IPv4 routing statistics

You can view the IP routing statistics as specified in RFC 1213.

To view the IPv4 routing statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual252

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IP > Statistics.

The Statistics page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 53. IP Statistics information

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers,

including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors,

time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and

so on.

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their

IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and

addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For entities that are not IP

gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes

datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local

address.

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP

destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to

forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP

gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed

through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered

to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded (for lack of

buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while

awaiting re-assembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user

protocols (including ICMP).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual253

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not

include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered

to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for

reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include

datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this

(discretionary) discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to

transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets

counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion. This includes

any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways

are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held

while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this entity.

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the

number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to

be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as their Don't

Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of

fragmentation at this entity.

IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter

includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as

having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

Table 53. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual254

IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages received.

IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send. This

counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does

not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of

IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be

no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always

zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

Table 53. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual255

IPv6 routing

After you enable IPv6 routing, it is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.

Manage the IPv6 routing mode

You can enable or disable the global IPv6 routing mode for the switch.

To manage the global IPv6 routing mode on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

7. Do one of the following:

•Enable the IPv6 routing mode: Select the IPv6 Unicast Routing Enable radio button.

• Disable the IPv6 routing mode: Select the IPv6 Unicast Routing Disable radio

button. This is the default is selection.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual256

Display the IPv6 route table

To display the IPv6 route table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

The Route Table displays.

7. From the Routes Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

• All Routes: Displays all active IPv6 routes.

• Best Routes Only: Displays the best active routes only.

• Configured Routes Only: Displays the manually configured routes only.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 54. IPv6 Route Table information

Field Description

Number of Routes The total number of active routes in the route table.

IPv6 Prefix The network prefix for the active route.

Prefix Length The prefix length for the active route.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual257

Configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings

Before you can configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings, you must configure at least one

routing VLAN (see VLAN routing on page 272).

To configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select one or more VLANs by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single VLAN, select the check box associated with the VLAN, or type

the VLAN number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

Protocol The type of protocol for the active route.

Next Hop Interface The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next

hop would be a Null0 interface.

Next Hop IP Address The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

Preference The route preference of the configured route.

Table 54. IPv6 Route Table information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual258

•To configure multiple VLANs with the same settings, select the check box associated

with each VLAN.

•To configure all VLANs with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the IPv6 Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When IPv6 mode is enabled, the VLAN is capable of IPv6 operation without a global

address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is used. The default value is

Disable.

9. From the DHCPv6 Client Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client mode

on the VLAN.

Only one VLAN can function as a client. The default value is Disable.

10. From the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode menu, select to enable or disable the

stateless address autoconfiguration mode on the VLAN.

The default value is Disable.

11. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the IPv6 mode on the VLAN.

The default is Disable. When the IPv6 mode is enabled, the VLAN is capable of IPv6

operation without a global address. In that situation, an EUI-64-based link-local address

is used.

12. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate

address detection (DAD) transmits on the VLAN.

The DAD transmits value must be in the range 0 to 600.

13. In the Life Time Interval field, specify the router advertisement life time interval that is sent

from the VLAN.

This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval.

0 means do not use the switch as the default router. The range of the router life time is

from 0 to 9000.

14. In the Adv NS Interval field, specify the retransmission time of the router advertisements

sent from the VLAN.

A value of 0 means the interval is not specified for the switch. The range of the neighbor

solicit interval is from 1000 to 4294967295.

15. In the Adv Reachable Interval field, specify the interval during which a remote IPv6 device

is considered reachable after receipt of a neighbor discovery confirmation message.

The range of reachable time is from 0 to 3600000.

16. In the Adv Interval field, specify the maximum time allowed between sending router

advertisements from the VLAN.

The range of the maximum advertisement interval is from 4 to 1800. The default value is

600.

17. From the Adv Managed Config Flag menu, specify the setting for the router advertisement

“managed address configuration flag.”

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual259

When the selection is Enable, end nodes use DHCPv6. When the selection is Disable,

end nodes autoconfigure addresses. The default value is Disable.

18. From the Adv Other Config Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router

advertisement “other stateful configuration flag.”

The default value is Disable.

19. From the Router Preference menu, specify the router preference advertisement on the

VLAN.

The default value is Medium.

20. From the Adv Suppress Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement

suppression on the VLAN.

The default value is Disable.

21. From the Destination Unreachables menu, select to enable or disable the transmission of

ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages on the VLAN.

If this option is disabled, the VLAN does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachable

messages. By default, the IPv6 destination unreachables option is enabled.

22. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 55. IPv6 VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Routing Mode The routing mode of the VLAN routing interface.

Operational Mode The operational state of the VLAN. The default value is Disable.

Link State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configure prefix settings for an IPv6 routing VLAN

You can add or change one or more prefixes and associated settings for an IPv6 routing

VLAN.

To add or change prefix settings for an IPv6 routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual260

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The Prefix Configuration page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the routing VLAN.

8. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix.

9. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length.

10. From the EUI64 menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if the specified 64-bit unicast

prefix is enabled.

11. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

This is the time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link

determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.

12. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time

must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.

13. From the OnLink Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify if the selected prefix can

be used for on-link determination.

The default is Enable.

14. From the Autonomous Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration.

The default value is Enable.

The Current State field displays the state of the IPv6 address. The state is TENT if routing

is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is

successful.

15. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual261

Delete a prefix setting from an IPv6 routing VLAN

You can delete a prefix and associated settings that you no longer need for an IPv6 routing

VLAN.

To a delete prefix settings from an IPv6 routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The Prefix Configuration page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the routing VLAN.

8. Select the check box for the prefix.

9. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The prefix is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual262

Display the IPv6 and ICMPv6 statistics for an IPv6 routing

VLAN

You can display the IPv6 and ICMPv6 statics for an IPv6 routing VLAN.

To display the IPv6 and ICMPv6 statistics for an IPv6 routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics.

The Statistics page display.

7. From the Interface menu, select the routing VLAN.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable IPv6 data that is displayed.

Table 56. IPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Ip6InReceives The total number of input datagrams received, including those received in

error.

Ip6InHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6

headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop count

exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and so on.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual263

Ip6InTooBigErrors The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their

size exceeded the link MTU of the outgoing interface.

Ip6InNoRoutes The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found

to transmit them to their destination.

Ip6InAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their

IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and

unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes). For

entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams,

this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address

was not a local address.

Ip6InUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Ip6InTruncatedPkts The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame did not

carry enough data.

Ip6InDiscards The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded

for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any

datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.

Ip6InDelivers The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-protocols

(including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which

these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for

some of the datagrams.

Ip6OutForwDatagrams The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to

their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this

counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this

entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully

forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.

Ip6OutRequests The number of IPv6 datagrams that local IPv6 user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission. This counter does not

include any datagrams that are also included in

ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.

Ip6OutDiscards The number of output IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded

for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter can include

datagrams that are also counted in ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.

Ip6OutNoRoutes The number of output datagrams that were discarded because no route

could be found to transmit them to their destination.

Ip6ReasmTimeout The number of output datagrams for which a reassembly time-out occurred.

Table 56. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual264

Ip6ReasmReqds The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled.

This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were

addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.

Ip6ReasmOKs The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the

fragments.

Ip6ReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the

algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by

combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the

input interface for some of the fragments.

Ip6FragOKs The number of IPv6 datagrams that were successfully fragmented.

Ip6FragFails The number of output datagrams that were discarded because they could

not be fragmented.

Ip6FragCreates The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result

of fragmentation.

Ip6InMcastPkts The number of multicast packets received.

Ip6OutMcastPkts The number of multicast packets transmitted.

Ip6InOctets The total number of bytes for the received input datagrams.

Ip6OutOctets The total number of bytes for the transmitted output datagrams.

Ip6InMcastOctets The number of multicast bytes received.

Ip6OutMcastOctets The number of multicast bytes transmitted.

Ip6InBcastOctets The number of broadcast bytes received.

Ip6OutBcastOctets The number of broadcast bytes transmitted.

Ip6InNoECTPkts The number of non-ECT packets received.

Ip6InECT1Pkts The number of ECT1 packets received.

Ip6InECT0Pkts The number of ECT0 packets received.

Ip6InCEPkts The number of CE packets received.

Table 56. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual265

The following table describes the nonconfigurable ICMPv6 data that is displayed.

Table 57. ICMPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Icmp6InMsgs The number of ICMP messages received, which includes all those counted

by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This counter is incremented at the interface to which

these ICMP messages were addressed, which might not be the input

interface for the messages.

Icmp6InError The number of ICMP messages received that included ICMP-specific errors

(bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

Icmp6OutMsgs The number of ICMP messages sent. This counter includes all those

counted by icmpOutErrors.

Icmp6OutErrors The number of ICMP messages not sent because of problems discovered

within ICMP

, such as a lack of buffers. This number does not include errors

discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the

resulting datagram.

Icmp6InCsumErrors The number of ICMP messages received that included checksum errors.

Icmp6InDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

Icmp6InPktTooBigs The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received.

Icmp6InTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

Icmp6InParmProblems The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

Icmp6InEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

Icmp6InEchoReplies The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembQueries The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembResponses The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembReductions The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received.

Icmp6InRouterSolicits The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received.

Icmp6InRouterAdvertisements The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received.

Icmp6InNeighborSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received.

Icmp6InNeighborAdvertisements The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received.

Icmp6InRedirects The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received.

Icmp6InMLDv2Reports The number of ICMPv6 MLDv2 Report messages received.

Icmp6OutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

Icmp6OutPktTooBigs The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent.

Icmp6OutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

Icmp6OutParmProblems The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual266

Display the IPv6 neighbor table or clear IPv6 neighbor

entries

You can display the IPv6 neighbor devices that the switch detects or clear IPv6 neighbor

entries from the neighbor table.

To display the IPv6 neighbor table or clear IPv6 neighbor entries:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Icmp6OutEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

Icmp6OutEchoReplies The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembQueries The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembResponses The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembReductions The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.

Icmp6OutRouterSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent.

Icmp6OutRouterAdvertisements The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent.

Icmp6OutNeighborSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent.

Icmp6OutRedirects The number of Redirect messages sent. For a host, this number is always

zero because hosts do not send Redirect messages.

Icmp6OutMLDv2Reports The number of ICMPv6 MLDv2 Report messages sent.

Icmp6InType134 The number of ICMPv6 Type 134 messages received.

Icmp6InType135 The number of ICMPv6 Type 135 messages received.

Icmp6InType136 The number of ICMPv6 Type 136 messages received.

Icmp6OutType1 The number of ICMPv6 Type 1 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType133 The number of ICMPv6 Type 133 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType135 The number of ICMPv6 Type 135 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType136 The number of ICMPv6 Type 136 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType143 The number of ICMPv6 Type 143 messages sent.

Table 57. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual267

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table.

The Neighbor Table page displays.

• IPv6 Address: Enter the 128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups

separated by colons, for example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button. If the

address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

• Interface: Enter the VLAN ID. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that

entry is displayed.

7. To clear the IPv6 neighbors that display, click the Clear button.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 58. IPv6 Neighbor Table information

Field Description

Interface The interface for which settings are displayed.

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with an interface.

isRtr Displays if the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the value is

True. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is False.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual268

Configure an IPv6 static route

You can add or change a static IPv6 route.

To add or change a static IPv6 route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

Neighbor State The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for

dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:

• Incmp: Address resolution is being performed on the entry. A

neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast

address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement

message is not yet received.

• Reach: Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable

Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was

functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no

special action as packets are sent.

• Stale: More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action

until a packet is sent.

• Delay: More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last

DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability

confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME

seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation

message and change the state to PROBE.

• Probe: Seeks a reachability confirmation by resending neighbor

solicitation messages every Retrans Timer milliseconds until a

reachability confirmation is received.

Last Updated The time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.

Table 58. IPv6 Neighbor Table information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual269

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

The Static Route Configuration page displays.

7. If you are changing en existing route, select the check box for the route.

The only field you can change is the preference for the route.

8. If you are adding a new route, in the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for the route.

9. If you are adding a new route, in the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for

the route.

10. If you are adding a new route, from the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu, select one of

the following options:

• Global: Create a global IPv6 route by specifying the VLAN routing interface for the

route.

• Link-Local: Create a link-local IPv6 address by specifying the VLAN routing interface

and the next hop address for the route.

• Static-Reject: Create a static-reject route for a destination prefix. You cannot specify

a VLAN routing interface or a next hop address for the route.

11. If you are adding a new route and selected Global or Link-Local from the Next Hop IPv6

Address Type menu, specify the IPv6 address for the next hop in the Next Hop IPv6

Address field.

12. If you are adding a new route and selected Link-Local from the Next Hop IPv6 Address

Type menu, select the VLAN routing interface from the Interface menu.

This is the VLAN routing interface this must be used for the route.

13. In the Preference field, specify the preference for the route.

The range is from 1 to 255. You can add the preference for a new route or change the

preference for an existing route.

14. Do one of the following:

•If you are adding a new route, click the Add button.

Your settings are saved. The route is added.

•If you are changing an existing route, click the Apply button.

15. Your settings are saved.

The route is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual270

Note: For information about viewing routes in the IPv6 route table, see

Display the IPv6 route table on page 256.

Delete an IPv6 static route

You can delete an IPv6 static route that you no longer need.

To delete an IPv6 static route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

The Static Route Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the route.

8. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The route is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual271

Configure the IPv6 route preference for the switch

You can configure the default preference for the switch, which is a value in the range from 1

to 255 and is independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to

determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol. The

best route to a destination is automatically selected by determining the route with the lowest

preference value. If multiple routes to a destination exist, the preference value is used to

determine the preferred route. If a tie occurs, the route with the best route metric is selected.

Configure the IPv6 route preference for the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference.

The Route Preference page displays.

7. In the Static field, specify the static route preference value for the router.

The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 1.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The Local field displays the local preference.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual272

VLAN routing

You can configure the switch to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a

router port. In such a situation, we call the VLAN a VLAN routing interface or a routed VLAN.

When a port is enabled for bridging (the default setting) rather than routing, all normal bridge

processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its

MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address

table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is

that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet

is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN. If a routed VLAN receives the multicast packet, the

packet is also forwarded on the internal bridge-router interface.

Because you can configure a port to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be

enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. You can use VLAN routing to allow

more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. You can also use VLAN routing if

a VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or if you require additional segmentation or

security. A port can either be a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN

port can be part of a VLAN that is itself a router port.

Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing

Wizard

The VLAN Static Routing Wizard lets you create a VLAN routing interface, configure the IP

address and subnet mask for the interface, and add ports, LAGs, or both to the VLAN. With

this wizard, you can do the following:

•Create a VLAN.

•Add ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default VLAN.

•Add ports to a LAG and add the LAG to the newly created VLAN.

•Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if a

selected port does not exist in another VLAN.

•Exclude ports from the VLAN.

•Enable routing on the VLAN and specify an IP address and subnet mask for routing.

To create a routing VLAN with the VLAN static routing wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual273

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Wizard.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID that is associated with the VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

8. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the VLAN interface.

9. In the Network Mask field, specify the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.

10. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

• T (Tagged): Selects the port as a tagged port in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the port are tagged for this VLAN.

• U (Untagged): Selects the port as an untagged port in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the port are untagged for this VLAN.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual274

• Excluded member: By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is

excluded from the VLAN. A port that is excluded can still be dynamically added to the

VLAN through GVRP.

11. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

• T (Tagged): Selects the LAG as a tagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the LAG are tagged for this VLAN.

• U (Untagged): Selects the LAG as an untagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the LAG are untagged for this VLAN.

•Excluded member: By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is

excluded from the VLAN. A LAG that is excluded can still be dynamically added to the

VLAN through GVRP.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage a VLAN routing interface

You can add and manage an existing VLAN (see Configure VLAN settings on page 158) as

a new VLAN routing interface. You can also manage an existing VLAN routing interface that

you added with the wizard (see Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing

Wizard on page 272),

To add or change a VLAN routing interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual275

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

7. If you are changing an existing routing VLAN, select the check box for the VLAN.

8. If you are adding a new routing VLAN, from the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

This menu displays the IDs of all VLANs that are configured on the switch, that is, regular

VLANs and routing VLANs.

9. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address that to be assigned to the VLAN routing

interface.

10. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask to be assigned to the VLAN routing

interface.

11. Do one of the following:

• New routing VLAN interface: If you configure a regular VLAN as a new VLAN

routing interface, click the Add button.

The VLAN routing interface is added for the selected VLAN ID. The entry in the MAC

Address field is automatically entered.

• Changed routing VLAN interface: If you change an existing routing VLAN interface,

click the Apply button.

You changes are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 59. VLAN Routing Configuration information

Field Description

Port The VLAN that is the VLAN routing interface.

MAC Address The MAC address that is assigned to the VLAN routing interface.

Routing Mode Indicates whether routing is enabled for the VLAN routing Interface.

Remove the routing function from a VLAN

You can remove the routing function from a VLAN. That is, you can remove the routing IP

address and subnet mask from the VLAN. The VLAN itself is not removed.

To a remove the routing function from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual276

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN routing interface.

8. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The routing function is removed but the VLAN itself is not

removed. For information about removing the VLAN, see Delete a VLAN on page 159.

Router discovery for a VLAN routing

interface

By default, a VLAN routing interface does not send router advertisements. You can enable

the router advertisements for a VLAN routing interface and configure the setting for the router

advertisements.

To configure router discovery for a VLAN routing interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual277

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Router Discovery > Router Discovery Configuration.

The Router Discovery Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN routing interface.

8. From the Advertise Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This selection enables or disables the transmission of router advertisements on the

interface. The default is Disable.

9. In the Advertise Address field, specify the IPv4 address that the interface must use for

router advertisements

10. In the Maximum Advertise Interval field, specify the maximum period in seconds that is

allowed between router advertisements that are sent from the interface.

The period must be in the range from 4 to 1800. Default value is 600.

11. In the Minimum Advertise Interval field, specify the minimum period in seconds that is

allowed between router advertisements that are sent from the interface.

The period must be in the range from 3 to 1800. The default is 450.

12. In the Advertise Lifetime field, specify the period in seconds that the address that is

advertised by the interface is considered a valid router address by hosts.

The period must be in the range from 4 to 9000. Default is 1800.

13. In the Preference Level field, specify the preference level of the router interface as a default

router relative to other routers on the same subnet.

A higher number means that the advertized address receives a higher preference. The

default is 0.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual278

Routes and the routing table

The routing table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The

routing table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The

routing table lists all routes.

Manually add a route and display the routing table

To manually add a default route or static route and display the routing table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Route Configuration page displays.

7. From the Route Type menu, select one of the following route types.

• DefaultRoute: Creates a default route. You must specify the next hop address and

preference. The Network Address and Subnet Mask fields are masked out.

• Static: Creates a static route. You must specify the network address, subnet mask,

next hop address, and preference.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual279

Depending on the type of route that you are creating, specify the following information:

-In the Network Address field, specify the IP interface address that identifies the

attached network.

-In the Subnet Mask field, specify the subnet mask that identifies the attached

network.

-In the Next Hop IP Address field, specify the outgoing router IP address to use when

forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

-In the Preference field, specify the preference, which is an integer value from 1

to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of

an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the

lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By

specifying the preference of a static route, you control whether a static route is more

or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also

controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the

same destination.

8. In the Description field, enter a description for the route.

The description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen, or underscore characters and can

be up to 31 characters in length.

9. Click the Add button.

The static route is added to the switch.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 60. Learned Routes information

Field Description

Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination.

Subnet Mask The portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network (also referred

to as the subnet or network mask).

Protocol The protocol that created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:

• Local

• Static

Route Type The route type can be Connected, Static, or Dynamic, depending on the protocol.

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.

Next Hop Address The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in

the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors

or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual280

Modify a route

You can modify an existing route.

To modify an existing route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

7. Select the check box for the route that you want to modify.

Preference The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255. You can specify the preference value

(sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to

the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into

the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, you control

whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing

protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred

than other static routes to the same destination.

Metric The administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, the default

is 1. The range is 0–255.

Table 60. Learned Routes information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual281

8. Modify the settings.

For more information, see Manually add a route and display the routing table on

page 278.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a route

You can delete a route that you no longer need.

To delete a route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

7. Select the check box for the route that you want to delete.

8. Click the Delete button.

The route is deleted.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual282

Address Resolution Protocol

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a Layer 2 MAC address with a Layer 3

IPv4 address. ARP is a part of the Internet Protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP

address to a media (MAC) address, defined by a LAN such as an Ethernet LAN.

The switch supports both dynamic and manual ARP configurations. With a manual ARP

configuration, you can statically add entries to the ARP table.

A device that sends an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or, if the

destination is not on the same subnet, of the next hop router. The device broadcasts an ARP

request packet, to which the intended recipient responds with a unicast ARP reply that

contains its MAC address. The device then uses the MAC address in the destination address

field of the Layer 2 header that is prepended to the IP packet and sent to the recipient. Each

device in a network maintains its ARP cache locally.

The switch learns ARP cache entries by examining the source information in the ARP packet

payload fields, regardless of whether it is an ARP request or a response. In that way, when

an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or VLAN, each recipient can

store the sender’s IP and MAC address in its ARP cache. Normally, only the requestor

receives an ARP response (a unicast message) and stores the sender’s information in its

ARP cache. The most recent information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.

A device can be moved in a network, which means that the device’s IP address that was

associated with one MAC address is now associated with another MAC address. A device

can also disappear from the network altogether (for example, it was reconfigured,

disconnected, or powered off). These situations cause stale information in the ARP cache.

Therefore, entries are updated or periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists.

If an entry was identified as a sender of an ARP packet, the entry can be removed from the

ARP cache. You can configure an age-out interval that determines how long an entry that is

not updated remains in the ARP cache.

Display the ARP cache

You can display ARP entries in the ARP cache. The ARP cache is a table that lists the

remote connections that were recently detected by the switch.

To display entries in the ARP cache:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual283

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Basic > ARP Cache.

The ARP Cache page display.

7. Navigate through the table by doing the following:

•From the Rows per page menu, select how many table entries are displayed per

page.

Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be

slow to display the information.

•Click the < button to display the previous page of the table data entries.

•Click the > button to display the next page of the table data entries.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 61. ARP cache information

Field Description

Management VLAN ARP Cache

IP Address The IP address associated with the device’s MAC address. This must be the IP

address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch’s existing routing

interfaces.

Port The associated interface of the connection.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal

numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Routing VLANs ARP Cache

IP Address The IP address. This must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to

one of the switch’s existing routing interfaces.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual284

Add or change a static entry in the ARP table

You can add a new static entry to the ARP table or change an existing entry that you

manually added.

To add a new static entry or change an existing entry in the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Create.

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal

numbers separated by colons, for example 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Type The type of ARP entry:

• Local: An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s

MAC addresses.

• Gateway: A dynamic ARP entry for which the IP address is that of a router.

• Static: An ARP entry that was configured manually.

• Dynamic: An ARP entry that was learned by the switch.

Age The time in seconds since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP cache.

Table 61. ARP cache information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual285

The ARP Create page displays.

7. If you are changing an existing ARP entry, select the check box for the entry.

8. In the IP Address field, specify an IP address.

This must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's

existing routing interfaces.

9. In the MAC Address field, specify the unicast MAC address of the device.

Enter the address as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for

example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

10. Do one of the following:

•If you are adding a new ARP entry, click the Add button.

Your settings are saved. The ARP entry is added.

•If you are changing an existing ARP entry, click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

For information about viewing the new entry and other entries in the ARP cache, see

Display the ARP cache on page 282.

Delete a static ARP entry

You can delete a static ARP entry that you no longer need.

To delete a static ARP entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual286

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Create.

The ARP Create page displays.

7. Select the check box for the entry.

8. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The entry is removed.

Configure the ARP table settings

You can change the configuration settings for the ARP table.

To configure the ARP table settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > Global ARP Configuration.

The Global ARP Configuration page displays.

7. In the Age Time field, enter the time, in seconds, that a dynamic ARP entry remains in the

ARP table before aging out.

The range is from 15 to 21600 seconds. The default is 1200 seconds.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual287

8. In the Response Time field, enter the time, in seconds, that the device waits for an ARP

response to an ARP request that it sends. The range is from 1 to 10 seconds. The default is

1 second.

9. In the Retries field, enter the maximum number of times an ARP request is retried after an

ARP response is not received.

The number includes the initial ARP request. The range is from 0 to 10. The default is 4.

10. In the Cache Size field, specify the maximum number of entries allowed in the ARP table.

This number includes all static and dynamic ARP entries.The range for this field is from

79 to 512. The default is 512.

11. Select the Dynamic Renew Enable or Disable radio button.

When enabled, the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP

entries when they age out. The default setting is Enable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove ARP entries from the ARP cache

You can remove entries from the ARP cache.

To remove entries from the ARP cache:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Routing User Manual288

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Entry Management.

The ARP Entry Management page displays.

7. From the Remove From Table menu, select the type of ARP entry to be deleted:

• All Dynamic Entries

• All Dynamic and Gateway Entries

• Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry: Lets you specify the IP address to be removed.

• Specific Static Entry: Lets you specify the IP address to be removed.

8. If you select Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry, in the Remove IP

Address field, enter the IP address to be removed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

289

5Configure Quality of Service

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Quality of Service concepts

•Class of Service

•Differentiated Services

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual290

Quality of Service concepts

In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the

attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain

packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for

transmission in a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is

configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a

delay is necessary, packets are held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for

transmission. As queues become full, packets can no longer be held for transmission and are

dropped by the switch.

Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by

distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of

delay. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable

network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence

of at least one node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the

performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.

Class of Service

The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of

switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic

when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an

interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a

mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum

guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or

port) level.

Eight queues per port are supported.

CoS configuration concepts

You can set the Class of Service trust mode for an interface. Each port on the switch can be

configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s

priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping

table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS

queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate egress port. Of course, the

trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use. If this is not the

case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific

CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default

priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.

Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet

priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual291

ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress

ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is

also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP

packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.

Configure the global CoS settings

A global configuration setting is automatically applied to all interfaces on the switch.

To configure the CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration.

The CoS Configuration page displays.

7. Either configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS-configurable interfaces or

configure CoS settings per interface.

By default, the Global radio button is selected.

•To configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS configurable interfaces, do

the following:

a. Select the Global radio button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual292

b. From the Global Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options for ingress traffic on the switch:

- Untrusted: Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p: The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of eight

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

- DSCP: The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

•To configure CoS settings per interface, do the following:

a. Select the Interface radio button.

b. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options:

- Untrusted: Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p: The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

- DSCP: The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the CoS settings for an interface

You can configure the trust mode for one or more interfaces and apply an interface shaping

rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

To configure the CoS settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual293

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.

The CoS Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode options for

ingress traffic on the selected interfaces:

• Untrusted: Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

• 802.1p: The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The

QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal

hardware priority queues. The default value is 802.1p.

• DSCP: The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

10. In the Interface Shaping Rate field, specify the maximum outbound transmission rate

bandwidth in kbps.

This setting is used to shape the outbound transmission rate in increments of 1 percent in

a range of 0–100. This value is controlled independently of any per-queue maximum

bandwidth configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping mechanism. The default

value is 0. The value 0 means that the maximum is unlimited.

The expected shaping at egress interface is calculated as follows:

frameSize × shaping/(frameSize + IFG), where IFG (Inter frame gap) is 20 bytes,

frameSize is configured frame size, and shaping is configured traffic shaping.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual294

For example, if 64 bytes frame size and 64 kbps shaping are configured, the expected

shaping is approximately 48 kbps.

11. In the Interface Ingress Rate Limit field, specify the maximum inbound transmission rate

bandwidth in kbps.

This setting is used to shape the inbound transmission rate in increments of 1 percent in

a range of 0–100. The interface discards traffic that arrives at a bandwidth in excess of

the specified limit.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the CoS queue settings for an interface

You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues. You can

control how much bandwidth is used by the queue, the queue depth during times of

congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from all queues on a port. Each port

contains its own CoS queue-related configuration.

For information about configuring CoS queue settings globally, see Configure the global

CoS settings on page 291.

To configure the CoS queue settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual295

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration.

The Interface Queue Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Queue ID menu, select the queue to be configured.

You can select a queue from 0 to 7.

10. From the Scheduler Type menu, select one of the following options:

• Strict: The interface services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.

•Weighted: The interface uses weighted round robin to associate a weight to each

queue. This is the default setting.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique

that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective

of your selection from the Scheduler Type menu.

Map 802.1p priorities to queues

You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class

values in Ethernet frames that the device receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can

be applied globally or per interface. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic

types (for example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to

time-sensitive traffic.

To map 802.1p priorities to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual296

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping.

The 802.1p to Queue Mapping page displays.

7. In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue

(internal traffic class) from 0 to 7.

The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p

priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traffic with

a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher

priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.

Table 62. Default values for 802.1p to queue mapping

802.1p priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Default queue 1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3

The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is

the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue

position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to

be sent.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual297

Map DSCP values to queues

You can map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.

To map DSCP values to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping.

The DSCP to Queue Mapping page displays.

7. For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding Queue menu which internal traffic

class must be mapped to the DSCP value.

The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a

higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in

higher queues to be sent.

The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, besides other DSCP experimental values,

are as follows:

•Class Selector (CS) PHB: These values are based on IP precedence.

• Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB: These values define four main levels to sort and

manipulate some flows within the network.

•Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB: These values are used to prioritize traffic for

real-time applications. In many situations, if the network exceeded traffic and you

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual298

need some bandwidth guaranteed for an application, the EF traffic must receive this

rate independently of the intensity of any other traffic attempting to transit the node.

The Other DSCP Values (Local/Experimental Use) section allows you to set non-default

values for advanced settings.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Differentiated Services

The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be

classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop

behaviors.

Standard IP-based networks provide best-effort data delivery service. Best-effort service

implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee.

If congestion occurs, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical

Internet applications, such as email and file transfers, a slight degradation in service is

acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. However, any degradation of service can

negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice and multimedia.

Defining DiffServ

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class: Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy: Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service: Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

Note the following about the DiffServ process:

•Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can

be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a

match occurs.

•The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class.

Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.

•Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The All class type

option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet

to match that class. The Any class type option specifies that at least one match criteria

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual299

must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in

which they were added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match

within that policy is found.

Configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the

DiffServ private MIB tables

You can enable or disable DiffServ and display the current and maximum number of rows in

each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables.

To configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the DiffServ private MIB

tables:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > DiffServ Configuration.

The DiffServ Configuration page displays.

7. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:

•Enable: Differentiated services are active. This is the default setting.

• Disable: Differentiated services is inactive. An existing DiffServ configuration is

retained and can be changed but is not active.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual300

The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ

Configuration page.

Table 63. DiffServ Status information

Field Description

Class Table The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.

Class Rule table The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy table The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy Instance Table The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy Attributes Table The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances) out

of the total allowed on the switch.

Service Table The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Configure a DiffServ class

You can add a new DiffServ class name, or rename or delete an existing class. You can also

define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ

classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up multiple match criteria in a class. The

logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the

Class page.

Add and configure a DiffServ class

To add and configure a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual301

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all existing DiffServ class names, from which you can

select one for modification or deletion. The class name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric

characters in length.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. For any class that you add, the class type is All.

8. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

9. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class configuration

(see the following figure).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual302

10. Define the criteria that must be associated with the DiffServ class by selecting one of the

following radio buttons:

• Match Every: Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

• Reference Class: Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After you select the radio

button, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to

reference. A class can reference only one other class of the same type.

• Class of Service: Select this radio button to require the Class of Service (CoS) value

in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the

values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which you can

select one.

• VLAN: Select this radio button to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID.

The VLAN value is in the range from 1 to 4093.

• Ethernet Type: Select this radio button to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet

frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the radio

button, select the EtherType keyword from the menu of common protocols that are

mapped to their Ethertype value. You can also select User Value from the menu and

enter a value in the hexadecimal range from 600 to ffff.

• Source MAC: Select this radio button to require a packet’s source MAC address to

match the specified MAC address. After you select this radio button, use the following

fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:

- Address: The source MAC address to match. The source MAC address is

specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask: The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to

compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Destination MAC: Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination MAC

address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:

- Address: The destination MAC address to match. The destination MAC address

is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask: The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to

compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual303

• Protocol Type: Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. You can also select

Other from the menu and enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source IP: Select this radio button to require a packet’s source IP address to match

the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to

configure the source IP address match criteria:

- Address: The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask: The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

source IP address to use for matching against packet content.

•Source L4 Port: Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. You can also

select Other from the menu and enter a port number from 0 to 65535.

• Destination IP: Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination IP address to

match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following

fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:

- Address: The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask: The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.

• Destination L4 Port: Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol. You can also select Other from the

menu and enter a port number from 0 to 65535.

• IP DSCP: Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. You can also select Other from the menu and enter an IP DSCP

value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service

Type octet in the IP header.

• Precedence Value: Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence

value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the

menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

• IP ToS: Select this radio button to require the packet’s Type of Service (ToS) bits in

the IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as

all 8 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. After you select the radio button,

use the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:

- Bits Value: Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range from 00

to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.

- Bit Mask: Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP

ToS field in a packet.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual304

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class

Summary section at the bottom of the DiffServ Class Configuration page.

Table 64. DiffServ Class Configuration, Class Summary information

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Rename an existing DiffServ class

To rename an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual305

Change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class

To change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

8. Change the class configuration as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a DiffServ class

To delete a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual306

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure IPv6 DiffServ class settings

The switch supports QoS ACL and DiffServ functionality for IPv6 by providing support for

IPv6 packet classification. An IPv6 ACL serves the same purpose as an IPv4 ACL.

An Ethernet IPv6 packet is distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value,

so all IPv6 classifiers include the Ethertype field, even though you cannot configure its value

on the switch.

The destination and source IPv6 addresses use a prefix length value instead of an individual

mask to qualify them as a subnet addresses or a host addresses. Packets that match an IPv6

classifier can be marked with the IP DSCP field in the traffic class octet.

You can also assign an IPv6 ACL with a DiffServ assignment to LAG interfaces.

Create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class

To create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual307

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The IPv6 Class Configuration page displays.

7. Enter a class name in the Class Name field.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing IPv6 class names, from which one can be

selected for modification or deletion.

8. From the Class Type menu, select the class type.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are

creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes

nonconfigurable.

9. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

10. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class configuration

(see the following figure).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual308

11. Define the criteria that must be associated the IPv6 DiffServ class:

• Match Every: Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

• Reference Class: Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After selecting this option, the

classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class

can reference one other class of the same type.

• Protocol Type: Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source Prefix/Length: Select this radio button to require a packet’s source prefix and

prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length. Prefix must

always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the hexadecimal range

from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can

be in the range from 0 to 128.

• Source L4 Port: Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to

65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

• Destination Prefix/Length: Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination

prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length.

Prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the

hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and

the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.

• Destination L4 Port: Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu.

The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual309

• IP DSCP: Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the Class

Summary section.

Table 65. IPv6 DiffServ class configuration class summary

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class

To rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual310

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class

To change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

8. Change the class configuration as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual311

Delete an IPv6 DiffServ class

To delete an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure a DiffServ policy

You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policies.

Create and configure a DiffServ policy

To create and configure a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual312

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Enter a policy name in the Policy Name field.

You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the

policy applies to ingress packets.

8. From the Member Class menu, select an existing class that you want to associate with the

new policy.

9. Click the Add button.

The new policy is added.

10. After creating the policy, click the policy name.

The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes

(see the following figure).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual313

11. Configure the policy attributes by selecting one of the following radio buttons:

• Assign Queue: Select this radio button to specify that traffic must be assigned to a

queue, which you must select from the menu. The queue is expressed as a value in

the range from 0 to 7.

• Drop: Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.

• Mark VLAN CoS: Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must

select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as a value in the range from 0

to 7.

• Mark IP Precedence: Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an

IP precedence value before being forwarded. You must select an IP precedence

value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mirror: Select this radio button to require packets to be mirrored to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

• Redirect: Select this radio button to require packets to be redirected to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP: Select this radio button to require packet to be marked with an IP

DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The DSCP value is

defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

• Simple Policy: Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.

By default, this simple policy is color blind, and color classes do not apply. A simple

policy supports a single data rate and results in one of two outcomes: conform or

violate. Packets that violate the policy are always dropped, that is, the Violate Action

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual314

radio button is selected. (You cannot specify any other action for packets that violate

the policy.)

You must specify a policy action for packets that conform to the policy.

- Committed Rate: Enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming packets

by specifying a value in the range from 16 to 1000000 Kbps.

-In the Conform Action section, select one of the following radio buttons:

• Send: Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default confirming action.

•Drop: Packets are dropped.

• Mark CoS: Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value

before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set.

You must select a CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mark IP Precedence: These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified

IP Precedence value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the

Mark IP Precedence field is set. You must select an IP precedence value from

0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP: Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value

before being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You

must either select a DSCP code from the menu or enter an IP DSCP value

from 0 to 63 in the field next to the menu. A value that you enter in the field

overrides any selection from the menu.

The DSCP value is defined as the high-order six bits of the Service Type octet

in the IP header.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Rename an existing DiffServ policy

To rename an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual315

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. In the Policy Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy

To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual316

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.

8. Change the policy attributes as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change or remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy

To change or remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. Do one of the following:

•To change the class, select another class rom the Member Class menu.

•To remove the class, select None, from the Member Class menu.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual317

Delete a DiffServ policy

To delete a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The policy is removed.

Configure the DiffServ service interface

You can assign (attach) a policy to an interface.

Attach a DiffServ policy to an interface

To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual318

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Policy In Name menu, select a policy name.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual319

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 66. Service Interface Configuration information

Field Description

Direction The traffic direction of the policy on the service interface. The direction is always

inbound (In).

Operational Status The operational status of this service interface (either Up or Down).

The operational status is shown as Up if all of the following conditions are true:

• The attached class is valid and includes at least one matching rule.

• The attached policy is valid and includes at least one attribute.

• The port is enabled, that is, the physical link of the port is in the up state.

Change the DiffServ policy for an interface

To change the DiffServ policy for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual320

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select the check box for the interface.

9. From the Policy In Name menu, select another policy name.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a DiffServ policy from an interface

To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select the check box for the interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual321

9. From the Policy In Name menu, select None.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Display DiffServ service statistics

You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ

policies are attached.

To display DiffServ service statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics.

The Service Statistics page displays.

7. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configure Quality of Service User Manual322

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 67. DiffServ Service Statistics information

Field Description

Interface All valid port numbers on the switch with a DiffServ policy that is attached in the inbound

direction.

Direction The traffic direction of interface is inbound (In). This field shows only the direction for

which a DiffServ policy is attached.

Policy Name The name of the policy that is currently attached to the specified interface and direction.

Operational Status The operational status of the policy that is attached to the specified interface and

direction. The value is either Up or Down.

Member Classes All DiffServ classes that are defined as members of the selected policy name. Select a

member class name to display its statistics. If no class is associated with the selected

policy, then the list is empty.

323

6Manage Device Security

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Device admin password

•RADIUS servers

•TACACS+ servers

•Authentication lists

•Smart Control Center

•HTTP and HTPPS management access

•Management access profiles and rules

•Port authentication

•MAC filters for traffic control

•Storm control

•Port security

•Protected ports

•Private VLANs

•Access control lists

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual324

Device admin password

You can change the device admin password for the default user with the user name admin.

This password applies to device UI access.

To change the device admin password for the device UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

7. In the Current Password field, enter the current password.

The default password is password. The password is displayed in dots.

8. In the New Password field, specify the new password.

The password must be between 8 and 20 characters in length and must include at least

one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, and one number. The password is

case-sensitive.

The password is displayed in dots.

9. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it

correctly.

The password is displayed in dots.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual325

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

RADIUS servers

RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a

user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes

information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and

password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized

authentication method for the following:

•Web access

•Port access control (802.1X)

Configure the global RADIUS server settings

You can add information about one or more RADIUS servers on the network.

If you configure multiple RADIUS servers, consider the maximum delay time when you

specify the maximum number of retransmissions (that is, the value that you enter in the Max

Number of Retransmits field in the following procedure) and the time-out period (that is, the

value that you enter in the Timeout Duration field in the following procedure) for RADIUS:

For one RADIUS server, a retransmission does not occur until the configured time-out

period expires without a response from the RADIUS server. In addition. the maximum

number of retransmissions for one RADIUS server must pass before the switch attempts

the next RADIUS server.

Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals the

maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period multiplied by the

number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user

response.

To configure the global RADIUS server settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual326

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see Configure

a RADIUS authentication server on the switch on page 327). The switch supports up to

three RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server

is the server configured as the primary server. If no server is configured as the primary

server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.

CAUTION:

The maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals

the maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period

multiplied by the number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS

request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are

blocked until the switch receives a RADIUS response.

7. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the maximum number of times a request

packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.

The range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 4.

8. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request

retransmissions.

The range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

9. From the Accounting Mode menu, select Enable or Disable to specify RADIUS

accounting on the server.

The default is Disable, which means that accounting is disabled on the RADIUS server.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual327

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.

Table 68. RADIUS Configuration information

Field Description

Current Server IP Address The IP address of the current server. This field is blank if no servers are

configured.

Number of Configured

Servers

The number of configured authentication RADIUS servers. The value can range

from 0 to 3.

Configure a RADIUS authentication server on the switch

You can display and configure various settings for a RADIUS server configured on the

switch.

Add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch

To add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch and display or reset the

RADIUS authentication server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual328

7. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.

8. In the Authentication Port field, specify the UDP port number that the server uses to verify

the RADIUS server authentication.

The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.

9. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was

configured.

10. In the Secret field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and encrypting

all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.

This secret must match the one that is configured on the RADIUS server.

11. From the Active menu, select Primary.

12. From the Message Authenticator menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

message authenticator attribute for the selected server is enabled.

The message authenticator adds protection to RADIUS messages by using an MD5 hash

to encrypt each message. The shared secret is used as the key, and if the message fails

to be verified by the RADIUS server, it is discarded.

13. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

14. To reset the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the

Clear Counters button.

The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.

Table 69. RADIUS authentication server statistics information

Field Description

Server Address The address of the RADIUS server or the name of the RADIUS server for

which the statistics are displayed.

Round Trip Time The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent

access-reply/access-challenge and the access-request that matched it from

this RADIUS authentication server.

Access Requests The number of RADIUS access-request packets sent to this server. This

number does not include retransmissions.

Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS access-request packets retransmitted to this server.

Access Accepts The number of RADIUS access-accept packets, including both valid and

invalid packets, that were received from this server.

Access Rejects The number of RADIUS access-reject packets, including both valid and invalid

packets, that were received from this server.

Access Challenges The number of RADIUS access-challenge packets, including both valid and

invalid packets, that were received from this server.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual329

Modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS access-response packets received from

this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad

authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included in

malformed access-responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS access-response packets containing invalid

authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS access-request packets destined for this server that

did not yet time out or receive a response.

Timeouts The number of authentication time-outs to this server.

Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this

server on the authentication port.

Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the

authentication port and dropped for some other reason.

Table 69. RADIUS authentication server statistics information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual330

The Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Modify the configuration for the selected server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch

To remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS server is removed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual331

Configure a RADIUS accounting server

You can display and configure various settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the

network.

Add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch

To add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch and display or clear the RADIUS

accounting server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

7. In the Accounting Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting

server to add.

8. In the Port field, specify the UDP port number that the server uses to verify the RADIUS

accounting server authentication.

The default UDP port number is 1813.

9. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server

was configured.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual332

10. In the Secret field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.

11. From the Accounting Mode menu, select Enable to enable the RADIUS accounting mode.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

13. To reset the accounting server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the Clear

Counters button.

The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.

Table 70. RADIUS accounting server statistics information

Field Description

Accounting Server Address The accounting server associated with the statistics.

Round Trip Time (secs) The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent

accounting-response and the accounting-request that matched it from this

RADIUS accounting server.

Accounting Requests The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent not including

retransmissions.

Accounting Retransmissions The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets retransmitted to this

RADIUS accounting server.

Accounting Responses The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this

server.

Malformed Accounting Responses The number of malformed RADIUS accounting-response packets received

from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length.

Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed

accounting responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS accounting-response packets that contained invalid

authenticators received from this accounting server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent to this server that

did not yet time out or receive a response.

Timeouts The number of accounting time-outs to this server.

Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from

this server on the accounting port.

Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were received from this server on the

accounting port and dropped for some other reason.

Modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual333

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

7. Modify the configuration for the accounting server.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch

To remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual334

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

7. Remove the server IP address from the Accounting Server Address field.

Leave the field blank.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The RADIUS accounting server is removed.

TACACS+ servers

TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency

with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:

• Authentication. Provides authentication during login and through user names and

user-defined passwords.

• Authorization. Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an

authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server

checks the user privileges.

The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges

between the device and TACACS+ server.

Configure the global TACACS+ settings

You can configure the global TACACS+ settings for communication between the switch and

a TACACS+ server.

To configure the global TACACS+ settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual335

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Configuration.

The TACACS+ Configuration page displays.

7. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The range is from 0 to 128. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+

server.

8. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to

establish a TCP connection between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The range is from 1 to 30 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Add a TACACS+ server to the switch

You can add up to three TACACS+ servers with which the switch can communicate.

To add a TACACS+ server to the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual336

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

7. In the TACACS+ Server field, enter the TACACS+ server IP address.

8. In the Priority field, specify the priority for the TACACS+ server.

The priority determines the order in which the TACACS+ servers are contacted when

attempting to authenticate a user. A value of 0 is the highest priority. The range is from

0 to 65535.

9. In the Port field, specify the authentication port number for TACAS+ server sessions.

The value must be in the range from 0 to 65535. If you do not specify a value, the switch

uses the standard TCP port 49 for sessions with the server.

10. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the device and the TACACS+ server.

The key can be from 0 to 128 characters. The key must match the key used on the

TACACS+ server.

11. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the time that passes before the connection

between the device and the TACACS+ server times out.

The range is from 1 to 30. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value

of 5 seconds.

12. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual337

Modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch

To modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Modify the configuration for the selected TACACS+ server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a TACACS+ server from the switch

To remove a TACACS+ server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual338

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Click the Delete button.

The TACACS+ server is removed.

Authentication lists

An authentication login list specifies one or more authentication methods to validate switch or

port access for the admin user. You can configure a default login list.

Note: The admin user is assigned to a preconfigured list that is named

defaultList and that you cannot delete.

Configure an HTTP authentication list

You can configure the default HTTP login list.

To change the HTTP authentication method for the default list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual339

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTP Authentication

List.

The HTTP Authentication List page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the httpList name.

8. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. User authentication occurs

in the order the methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since

the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no

other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This is the default

method. This is the default selection for Method 1.

• RADIUS. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If

you select RADIUS or Tacacs+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.

• Tacacs+. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+ server.

If you select RADIUS or Tacacs+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.

• None. The authentication method is unspecified, that is, no authentication is required.

9. From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

second in the selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that

does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual340

10. From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

third in the selected authentication login list.

11. From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the

selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an HTTPS authentication list

You can configure the default login list for secure HTTP (HTTPS).

To configure an HTTPS authentication list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTPS Authentication

List.

The HTTPS Authentication List page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the httpsList name.

8. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual341

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This setting does not

display when you first create a new login list. User authentication occurs in the order the

methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:

• Local: The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since

the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no

other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This is the default

selection for Method 1.

• RADIUS: The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If

you select RADIUS or Tacacs+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.

• Tacacs+: The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+ server.

If you select RADIUS or Tacacs+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.

• None: The authentication method is unspecified, that is, no authentication is required.

9. From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

second in the selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that

does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.

10. From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

third in the selected authentication login list.

11. From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the

selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the dot1x authentication list

The dot1x authentication list defines the IEEE 802.1X authentication method used for the

default list. The default list is dot1xList.

To configure the dot1x authentication list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual342

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > Dot1x Authentication

List.

The Dot1x Authentication List page displays.

7. Select the check box next to dot1xList.

8. From the menu in the 1 column, select the method that must be used first in the selected

authentication login list.

The options are as follows:

• Radius: The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server

instead of locally.

• None: The user is not authenticated.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Control Center

By default, the configuration option of the Smart Control Center (SCC) is disabled. You still

can use the SCC to discover the IP address of the switch, but you cannot use the SCC to

perform any actions on the switch. If you enable the configuration option of the SCC, you can

use it to configure the switch.

For more information about the SCC, visit netgear.com/support/product/SCC.

Note: The device admin password is contained in many NETGEAR Switch

Discovery Protocol (NSDP) packet. Therefore, to increase the switch

security, the configuration option of the SCC is disabled by default.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual343

To enable or disable the configuration option of the SCC:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > SCC Control.

The SCC Control page displays.

7. Select the one of the following SCC Admin Mode radio buttons:

•Enable: The SCC can discover the switch and perform actions on the switch.

• Disable: The SCC can discover the switch but cannot perform any actions on the

switch. This is the default setting.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual344

HTTP and HTPPS management access

You can configure the global settings for HTTP and secure HTTP (HTTPS) access to the

switch’s device UI. You can also configure access control profiles and access rules.

Configure HTTP access settings

You can configure the HTTP access settings on the switch. If you access the switch device

UI, HTTP is the default access method.

To configure the HTTP access settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTP > HTTP Configuration.

The HTTP Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This selection enables or disables HTTP. The default value is Enable.

8. In the HTTP Session Soft Timeout field, specify the number of minutes an HTTP session

can be idle before a time-out occurs.

The value must be in the range from 0 to 60 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual345

After the session is inactive for the configured time, you are automatically logged out and

must reenter the password to access the device UI. A value of zero means that the

session does not time out.

9. In the HTTP Session Hard Timeout field, specify the hard time-out for HTTP sessions.

This time-out is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The value must be in the

range from 0 to 168 hours. A value of zero means that the session does not time out. The

default value is 24 hours.

10. In the Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions field, specify the maximum number of HTTP

sessions that can exist at the same time.

The range is from 1 to 4 sessions. The default is 4 sessions.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure HTTPS access settings

Secure HTTP (HTTPS) enables the transmission of HTTP over an encrypted Secure Sockets

Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) connection. When you manage the switch

over the device UI, HTTPS can help ensure that communication between the management

system and the switch is protected from eavesdroppers and man-in-the-middle attacks. The

hash algorithms that SSL uses are MD5 and SHA-1.

To configure HTTPS access settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual346

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTPS > HTTPS Configuration.

The HTTPS Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This selection enables or disables HTTPS. The default value is Disable.

Note: You can download SSL certificates only when HTTPS is disabled.

8. In the HTTPS Port field, type the HTTPS port number.

The range is from 1025 to 65535. The default is port 443.

9. In the HTTPS Session Soft Timeout (Minutes) field, enter the inactivity time-out for HTTPS

sessions.

The range is from 1 to 60 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes.

10. In the HTTPS Session Hard Timeout (Hours) field, set the hard time-out for HTTPS

sessions.

This time-out is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The range is from 1 to 168

hours. The default is 24 hours.

11. In the Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions field, enter the maximum allowable number

of HTTPS sessions.

The range is from 1 to 4 sessions. The default is 4 sessions.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Browser security warning with HTTPS access

After you enable HTTPS access (see Configure HTTP access settings on page 344) and you

attempt to access the device UI, your browser might display a security warning that your

connection is not private or not secure, or that a problem with the security certificate

occurred.

If such as security warning displays, you cannot proceed but must take one of the following

actions, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome: If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private warning,

click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link, in which

x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari: If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private warning, click the

Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up window

displays, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window displays to let you

confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual347

• Mozilla Firefox: If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure warning, click

the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up window

that displays, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer: If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a problem

with this website’s security certificate warning, click the Continue to this website (not

recommended).

• Microsoft Edge: If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate warning or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the webpage.

Note: For information about installing a specific security certificate on the

switch, see Manage certificates for HTTPS access on page 347 and

Use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL security

certificate file on the switch on page 476.

Manage certificates for HTTPS access

You can manage certificates for HTTPS access.

Generate an SSL certificate

Note: Before you can generate a certificate, you must disable HTTPS (see

Configure HTTPS access settings on page 345) and log back in to

the device UI over an HTTP session. After you generate the

certificate, you can reenable HTTPS and log back in to the device UI

over an HTTPS session.

To generate an SSL certificate:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual348

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTPS > Certificate Management.

The Certificate Management page displays.

The Certificate Present field displays whether a certificate is present on the switch.

7. In the Certificate Management section, select the Generate Certificates radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

The switch generates an SSL certificate.

The Certificate Generation Status field shows progress information.

Delete an SSL certificate

Note: Before you can delete a certificate, you must disable HTTPS (see

Configure HTTPS access settings on page 345) and log back in to the

device UI over an HTTP session. After you delete the certificate, you

can reenable HTTPS and log back in to the device UI over an HTTPS

session.

To delete an SSL certificate:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual349

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTPS > Certificate Management.

The Certificate Present field displays Yes.

7. In the Certificate Management section, select Delete Certificates radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

The certificate is removed.

Transfer an existing HTTPS certificate from a TFTP server to the switch

You can transfer a certificate file to the switch.

Note: For information about downloading and installing an SSL certificate

over an HTTP session, see Use an HTTP session to download and

install an SSL security certificate file on the switch on page 476.

For the switch to accept HTTPS connections from a device, the switch requires a public key

certificate. You can generate a certificate externally (for example, offline) and transfer it to the

switch.

Before you transfer a file from a TFTP server to the switch, the following conditions must be

true:

•The file that you transfer from a TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.

•The file is in the correct format.

•The switch contains a path to the TFTP server.

Note: Before you can transfer a certificate, you must disable HTTPS (see

Configure HTTPS access settings on page 345) and log back in to

the device UI over an HTTP session. After you transfer the certificate,

you can reenable HTTPS and log back in to the device UI over an

HTTPS session.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual350

To transfer an HTTPS certificate to the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTPS > Certificate Update.

The Certificate Update page displays.

7. From the File Type menu, select the type of SSL certificate to download, which can be one

of the following:

• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File: SSL Trusted Root Certificate file (PEM

Encoded)

• SSL Server Certificate PEM File: SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded)

• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak Encryption

Parameter file (PEM Encoded)

• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong

Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded)

8. From the Server Address Type menu, select IPv4 or DNS to indicate the format for the

TFTP Server IP field.

The default is IPv4.

9. In the TFTP Server IP field, specify the address or host name of the TFTP server.

The address can be an IP address in standard x.x.x.x format or a host name. The host

name must start with a letter of the alphabet.

10. In the Remote File Path field, enter the path of the file to download.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual351

You can enter up to 96 characters. The default is blank.

11. In the Remote File Name field, enter the name of the file on the TFTP server to download.

You can enter up to 32 characters. The default is blank.

12. Select the Start File Transfer check box.

13. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer starts. A status message displays during the transfer and upon

successful completion of the transfer.

Management access profiles and rules

Access control allows you to configure an access control profile and set rules for access to

the device UI, access by SNMP stations, and client access to a TFTP server. We refer to an

access control profile as an access profile. You can add a single access profile, which you

can configure, activate, or deactivate.

CAUTION:

If you configure a security access profile incorrectly and you activate the

access profile, you might no longer be able to access the switch’s device

UI. If that situation occurs, you must reset the switch to factory default

settings (see Reset to factory default settings on page 466).

Add an access profile

You can set up a single security access profile with which you can associate an access rule

configuration.

To add an access profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual352

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration.

The Access Profile Configuration page displays.

7. In the Access Profile Name field, enter the name of the access profile to be added.

The maximum length is 32 characters.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. By default, the access profile is deactivated. After you add rules,

you can activate the access profile.

Add a rule to the access profile

After you add the access profile, you can add one or more security access rules to the access

profile.

If you access the switch from a computer, make sure that you add a permit rule for the type of

service that you use (for example, HTTPS), your computer’s IP address, and your computer’s

subnet mask.

CAUTION:

You must add a permit rule for your device and access method, otherwise

you are locked out from the switch after you activate the access profile. If

that situation occurs, you must reset the switch to factory default settings

(see Reset to factory default settings on page 466).

To add a rule to the access profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual353

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Rule Configuration.

The Access Rule Configuration page displays.

7. From the Rule Type menu, select Permit or Deny to permit or deny access when the

selected rules are matched.

A Permit rule allows access from a device that matches the rule criteria. A Deny rule

blocks a device that matches the rule criteria.

8. From the Service Type menu, select the access method to which the rule is applied.

The policy is restricted by the selected access method. Possible access methods are

TFTP, HTTP, Secure HTTP (SSL), and SNMP.

9. In the Source IP Address field, enter the source IP address from which the management

traffic originates.

10. In the Mask field, specify the subnet mask from which the management traffic originates.

11. In the Priority field, assign a priority to the rule.

The rules are validated against the incoming management request in ascending order of

their priorities. If a rule matches, the action is performed and subsequent rules below that

rule are ignored. For example, if a source IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured with

priority 1 to permit, and the same source IP address 10.10.10.10 is also configured with

priority 2 to deny, then access is permitted if the profile is active, and the second rule is

ignored.

12. Click the Add button.

The access rule is added.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual354

Activate the access profile

After you add rules to the access profile, you can activate the access profile.

CAUTION:

If you configure a security access profile incorrectly and you activate the

access profile, you might no longer be able to access the switch’s device

UI. If that situation occurs, you must reset the switch to factory default

settings (see Reset to factory default settings on page 466).

To activate the access profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration.

The Access Profile Configuration page displays. The Deactivate Profile check box is

selected.

7. Select the Activate Profile check box.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved and the access profile is now active.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual355

Display the access profile summary and the number of

filtered packets

After you added rules to the active profile, you can display the entries in the summary. If the

access profile is active, you can also display the number of filtered packets.

To display the access profile summary and the number of filtered packets:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration.

The Access Profile Configuration page displays.

The Packets Filtered field displays the number of packets filtered.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 71. Access profile configuration profile summary

Field Description

Rule Type The action performed when the rules match.

Service Type The service type selected. The policy is restricted by the selected service type.

Source IP Address The source IP address of the client originating the management traffic.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual356

Deactivate an access profile

You can deactivate an access profile.

To deactivate an access profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration.

The Access Profile Configuration page displays. The Activate Profile check box is

selected.

7. Select the Deactivate Profile check box.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved and the access profile is now deactivated.

Mask The subnet mask of the IP Address.

Priority The priority of the rule.

Table 71. Access profile configuration profile summary (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual357

Remove an access profile

You can remove an access profile that you no longer need. Before you can remove the

access profile, you must deactivate it (see Deactivate an access profile on page 356).

To remove an access profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration.

The Access Profile Configuration page displays. The Deactivate Profile check box is

selected.

7. Select the Remove Profile check box.

8. Click the Apply button.

The access profile is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual358

Port authentication

With port-based authentication, when 802.1X is enabled globally and on the port, successful

authentication of any one supplicant attached to the port results in all users being able to use

the port without restrictions. At any time, only one supplicant is allowed to attempt

authentication on a port in this mode. Ports in this mode are under bidirectional control. This

is the default authentication mode. 802.1X is also referred to as dot1x.

An 802.1X network includes three components:

• Authenticator: The port that is authenticated before access to system services is

permitted.

• Supplicant: The host that is connected to the authenticated port requesting access to the

system services.

• Authentication Server: The external server, for example, the RADIUS server that

performs the authentication on behalf of the authenticator, and indicates whether the

supplicant is authorized to access system services.

Configure the global 802.1X settings

You can configure global port access control settings on the switch.

To globally enable the 802.1X features:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual359

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Port Authentication > Basic > 802.1X Configuration.

The 802.1X Configuration page displays.

7. Configure the following port authentication settings:

• Port Based Authentication State: This selection specifies the 802.1X administrative

mode on the switch. The default value is Disable.

- Enabled: If 802.1X is enabled, authentication is performed by a RADIUS server.

This means that the primary authentication method must be RADIUS. To set the

method, select Security > Management Security > Authentication List and

select RADIUS as method 1 for defaultList. For more information, see

Authentication lists on page 338.

- Disabled: When port-based authentication is globally disabled, the switch does

not check for 802.1X authentication before allowing traffic on any ports, even if the

ports are configured to allow only authenticated users.

• VLAN Assignment Mode: This selection specifies whether a port can be placed in a

particular VLAN. The default value is Disable.

When enabled, this feature allows a port to be placed into a particular VLAN based on

the result of the authentication or type of 802.1X authentication a client uses when it

accesses the device. The authentication server can provide information to the device

about which VLAN to assign the supplicant.

• Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode: This selection specifies whether a VLAN can be

dynamically created. The default value is Disable.

If RADIUS-assigned VLANs are enabled, the RADIUS server includes the VLAN ID in

the 802.1X tunnel attributes of its response message to the device. If dynamic VLAN

creation is enabled on the device and the RADIUS-assigned VLAN does not exist, the

assigned VLAN is dynamically created. This means that the client can connect from

any port and is assigned to the appropriate VLAN. This feature gives flexibility for

clients to move around the network without much additional configuration required.

• EAPOL Flood Mode: This selection specifies whether Extensible Authentication

Protocol (EAP) over LAN (EAPoL) flood support is enabled on the switch. The default

value is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual360

Manage port authentication on individual ports

You can enable and configure port access control on one or more physical ports.

Configure 802.1X settings for a port

To configure 802.1X settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication.

The Port Authentication page displays.

7. Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the page to view all the fields.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual361

9. Specify the following settings:

• Port Control: Defines the port authorization state. The control mode is set only if the

link status of the port is link up. Select one of the following options:

- Auto: The switch automatically detects the mode of the interface. This is the

default setting.

-Authorized: The switch places the interface into an authorized state without

being authenticated. The interface sends and receives normal traffic without client

port-based authentication.

- Unauthorized: The switch denies the selected interface system access by

moving the interface into unauthorized state. The switch cannot provide

authentication services to the client through the interface.

- MAC Based: This mode allows multiple supplicants connected to the same port

to each authenticate individually. Each host connected to the port must

authenticate separately in order to gain access to the network. The hosts are

distinguished by their MAC addresses.

• MAB: Specify whether to enable or disable MAC-based Authentication Bypass (MAB)

for 802.1x-unaware clients at the specified port. MAB only functions if the selection

from the Port Control menu is MAC Based. By default, MAB is disabled.

• Guest VLAN ID: Specify the VLAN ID for the guest VLAN. The range is from 0 to

4093. The default value is 0. Enter 0 to reset the guest VLAN ID on the interface. The

guest VLAN allows the port to provide a distinguished service to unauthenticated

users, after three authentication failures. This feature provides a mechanism to allow

users access to hosts on the guest VLAN.

• Guest VLAN Period: Specify the time in seconds that the selected port remains in

the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange. The guest VLAN time-out

must be a value in the range from 1 to 300. The default value is 90 seconds.

• Unauthenticated VLAN ID: Specify the VLAN ID of the unauthenticated VLAN for the

selected port. The range is from 0 to 4093. The default value is 0. Hosts that fail the

authentication might be denied access to the network or placed on a VLAN created

for unauthenticated clients. This VLAN might be configured with limited network

access.

• Periodic Reauthentication: Select Enable to allow periodic reauthentication of the

supplicant for the specified port. If you select Disable, connected clients are not

forced to reauthenticate periodically. The default is Disable.

• Reauthentication Period: Specify the time in seconds after which reauthentication of

the supplicant occurs. The reauthentication period must be a value in the range from

1 to 65535. The default value is 3600 seconds.

• Quiet Period: Specify the time in seconds that the port remains in the quiet state

following a failed authentication exchange. While in the quite state, the port does not

attempt to acquire a supplicant. The quite state period must be a value in the range

from 0 to 65535. A value of 0 means that the port remains in the quiet state and never

attempts to acquire a supplicant. The default value is 60 seconds.

• Resending EAP: Specify the EAP retransmit period for the selected port. The

transmit period is the time in seconds, after which an EAPoL EAP Request/Identify

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual362

frame is resent to the supplicant. The retransmit period must be a value in the range

from 1 to 65535. The default value is 30 seconds.

• MAX EAP Requests: Specify the maximum number of EAP requests for the selected

port. The value is the maximum number of times an EAPoL EAP Request/Identity

message is retransmitted before the supplicant times out. The maximum number of

EAP requests must be a value in the range from 1 to 10. The default value is 2.

• Supplicant Timeout: Specify the supplicant time-out for the selected port. The

supplicant time-out is the time in seconds after which the supplicant times out. The

supplicant time-out period must be a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default

value is 30 seconds.

• Server Timeout: Specify the time in seconds that elapses before the switch resends

a request to the authentication server. The server time-out period must be a value in

the range from 1 to 65535. The default value is 30 seconds.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the port authentication status information available on the

page.

Table 72. Port authentication status information

Field Description

Control Direction The control direction for the specified port, which is always Both. The control direction

dictates the degree to which protocol exchanges take place between supplicant and

authenticator.The unauthorized controlled port exerts control over communication in both

directions (disabling both incoming and outgoing frames).

Protocol Version The protocol version associated with the selected port. The only possible value is 1,

corresponding to the first version of the 802.1X specification.

PAE Capabilities The port access entity (PAE) functionality of the selected port. The option is Authenticator or

Supplicant.

Authenticator

PAE State

The current state of the authenticator PAE state machine. The options are as follows:

• Initialize

• Disconnected

• Connecting

• Authenticating

• Authenticated

• Aborting

• Held

• ForceAuthorized

• ForceUnauthorized

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual363

Initialize 802.1X on a port

To initialize 802.1X on a port:

Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

11. Launch a web browser.

12. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

13. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

14. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

15. Select Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication.

The Port Authentication page displays.

16. Select the check box for the port.

17. Click the Initialize button.

802.1X on the selected interface is reset to the initialization state. Traffic sent to and from

the port is blocked during the authentication process. This button is available only if the

Backend State The current state of the backend authentication state machine. The options are as follows:

• Request

• Response

• Success

• Fail

• Timeout

• Initialize

• Idle

Table 72. Port authentication status information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual364

control mode is auto. When you click this button, the action is immediate. You do not

need to click the Apply button for the action to occur.

Restart the 802.1X authentication process on a port

To restart the 802.1X authentication process on a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication.

The Port Authentication page displays.

7. Select the check box for the port.

8. Click the Reauthenticate button.

The selected port is forced to restart the authentication process.This button is available only

if the control mode is auto. If the button is not selectable, it is grayed out. When you click

this button, the action is immediate. You do not need to click the Apply button for the

action to occur.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual365

Display the port summary

You can display summary information about the port-based authentication settings for each

port.

To display the port summary:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Summary.

The Port Summary page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual366

The following table describes the fields on the Port Summary page.

Table 73. Port summary

Field Description

Port The port whose settings are displayed in the current table row.

Control Mode This field indicates the configured control mode for the port. The options are as

follows:

• Force Unauthorized: The authenticator port access entity (PAE)

unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized.

• Force Authorized: The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled

port to authorized.

• Auto: The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the

outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant,

authenticator, and the authentication server.

• MAC Based: The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the

outcome of authentication exchanges between a supplicant, an authenticator,

and an authentication server on a per supplicant basis.

Operating Control Mode The control mode under which the port is actually operating. The options are as

follows:

• ForceUnauthorized

• ForceAuthorized

• Auto

• MAC Based

• N/A: If the port is in detached state, the value is N/A because the port cannot

participate in port access control.

Reauthentication Enabled Indicates if reauthentication of the supplicant is allowed. If the value is True,

reauthentication is allowed. Otherwise, reauthentication is not allowed.

Port Status The authorization status of the specified port. The options are Authorized,

Unauthorized, and N/A. If the port is in detached state, the value is N/A because the

port cannot participate in port access control.

Display the client summary

You can display information about supplicant devices that are connected to the local

authenticator ports. If no active 802.1X sessions exist, the table is empty.

To display the client summary:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual367

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Client Summary.

The Client Summary page displays.

The following table describes the fields on the Client Summary page.

Table 74. Client Summary information

Field Description

Port The port to be displayed.

User Name The user name representing the identity of the supplicant device.

Supplicant Mac Address The supplicant’s device MAC address.

Session Time The time since the supplicant logged in seconds.

Filter ID The policy filter ID assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device.

VLAN Assigned The reason for the VLAN ID assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device.

Session Timeout The session time-out imposed by the RADIUS server on the supplicant device.

Termination Action The termination action imposed by the RADIUS server on the supplicant device.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual368

MAC filters for traffic control

You can create MAC filters that limit the traffic allowed into and out of specified ports on the

switch. The traffic limitations are based on MAC addresses.

Create a MAC filter

If a packet with a MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify for a filter is received on a port

that is not part of the inbound filter, the packet is dropped.

A packet with a MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify for a filter can be transmitted

only from a port that is part of the outbound filter.

To create a MAC filter:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual369

7. From the MAC Filter menu, select Create Filter.

If you did not configure any filters, this is the only option available.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN that must be used with the MAC address.

9. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address of the filter in the format

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.

You cannot define filters for the following MAC addresses:

•00:00:00:00:00:00

•01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F

•01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21

•FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

10. In the Port and LAG tables in the Source Port Members section, select the ports and LAGs

that must be included in the inbound filter.

If a packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify is received on a port that

is not part of the inbound filter, the packet is dropped.

11. In the Port and LAG tables in the Destination Port Members section, select the ports and

LAGs that must be included in the outbound filter.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual370

A packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify can be transmitted only

from a port that is part of the outbound filter.

Note: Destination ports can be included only in a multicast filter. A multicast

filter is determined by the MAC address that you enter in the MAC

Address field.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a MAC filter

You can remote an existing MAC filter that you no longer need.

To delete a MAC filter:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Configuration.

The MAC Filter Configuration page displays.

7. From the MAC Filter menu, select the MAC filter.

8. Click the Delete button.

The filter is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual371

Display the MAC filter summary

You can display the MAC filters that are configured on the switch.

To display the MAC filter summary:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Summary.

7. The MAC Filter Summary page displays.

The following table describes the information displayed on the page.

Table 75. MAC Filter Summary information

Field Description

MAC Address The MAC address of the filter in the format XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID used with the MAC address to fully identify packets you want filtered.

Source Port Members The ports to be used for filtering inbound packets.

Destination Port Members The ports to be used for filtering outbound packets.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual372

Storm control

A broadcast storm is the result of an excessive number of broadcast messages

simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port. Forwarded message

responses can overload network resources, cause the network to time out, or do both.

The switch measures the incoming packet rate per port for broadcast, multicast, unknown,

and unicast packets and discards packets if the rate exceeds the defined value. You enable

storm control per interface, by defining the packet type and the rate at which the packets are

transmitted.

Configure global storm control settings

The global storm control settings apply to all ports. After you configure the global settings,

you can specify storm control settings for one or more ports.

To configure global storm control settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Storm Control.

The Storm Control page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual373

7. In the Storm Control section, from the Ingress Control Mode menu, select one of the

following modes for storm control:

• Disabled: Storm control is disabled. This is the default setting.

•Unknown Unicast: If the rate of incoming unknown Layer 2 unicast traffic (that is,

traffic for which a destination lookup failure occurs) increases beyond the configured

threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.

• Multicast: If the rate of incoming Layer 2 multicast traffic increases beyond the

configured threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.

• Broadcast: If the rate of incoming Layer 2 broadcast traffic increases beyond the

configured threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.

8. If the selection from the Ingress Control Mode menu is not Disabled, specify whether the

ingress control mode is enabled by selecting Enable or Disable from the Status menu.

9. In the Threshold field, specify the maximum rate at which unknown packets are forwarded.

The range is a percent of the total threshold between 0 and 100%. The default is 5%.

10. From the Control Action mode menu, select one of the following options:

• None: No action is taken. This is the default setting.

•Trap: If the configured threshold of the broadcast storm is exceeded, a trap is sent.

• Shutdown: If the configured threshold of the broadcast storm is exceeded, the port is

shut down.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure storm control settings for one or more ports

After you configure the global settings, you can specify storm control settings for one or more

ports.

To configure storm control settings for one or more ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual374

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Storm Control.

The Storm Control page displays.

The default settings in the Port Settings section depends on the global storm control

settings (see Configure global storm control settings on page 372), which apply to all

ports.

7. In the Port Settings section, select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following

actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Status menu, specify whether the ingress control mode is enabled for the port by

selecting Enable or Disable.

9. In the Threshold field, specify the maximum rate at which unknown packets are forwarded

for the port.

The range is a percent of the total threshold between 0 and 100%. The default is 5%.

10. From the Control Action mode menu, select one of the following options for the port:

• None: No action is taken. This is the default setting.

•Trap: If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, a trap is sent.

• Shutdown: If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, the port is

shut down.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual375

Port security

Port security lets you lock one or more ports on the switch. When a port is locked, the port

can only forward packets with a source MAC addresses that you specifically allowed. The

port discards all other packets.

Configure the global port security mode

To configure the global port security mode:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Port Security Configuration.

The Port Security Configuration page displays.

The page also shows the Port Security Violations table.

7. To enable port security on the switch, select the Port Security Mode Enable radio button.

The default is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

By default, port security is disabled for individual ports.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual376

Note: After you enable port security for individual ports (see Configure a port

security interface on page 376), you can return to this page and click

the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about

the ports.

The Port Security Violations table shows information about violations that occurred on ports

that are enabled for port security.

The following table describes the fields in the Port Security Violations table.

Table 76. Port Security Violations information

Field Description

Port The physical interface.

Last Violation MAC The source MAC address of the last packet that was discarded at a locked port.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID corresponding to the last MAC address violation.

Configure a port security interface

A MAC address can be defined as allowed on a port by one of two methods: dynamically or

statically. Both methods can occur concurrently when a port is locked.

Dynamic locking implements a first arrival mechanism for port security. You specify how

many addresses can be learned on the locked port. If the limit is not reached, a packet with

an unknown source MAC address is learned and forwarded normally. If the limit is reached,

no more addresses are learned on the port. Any packets with source MAC addresses that

were not already learned are dropped.

Static locking allows you to specify a list of MAC addresses that are allowed on a port. The

behavior of packets is the same as for dynamic locking: only packets with an allowable

source MAC address can be forwarded.

To configure a port security interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual377

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Interface Configuration.

The Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Specify the following settings:

• Port Security: Enable or disable the port security feature for the selected interfaces

The default is Disable.

• Max Learned MAC Address: Specify the maximum number of dynamically learned

MAC addresses on the selected interfaces. The default is 4096. If you specify 0, the

interface does not learn any MAC addresses.

• Max Static MAC Address: Specify the maximum number of statically locked MAC

addresses on the selected interfaces. The default is 48.

•Enable Violation Shutdown: Enable or disable shutdown of the selected interfaces if

a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received. The default value is No, which

means that the option is disabled.

• Enable Violation Traps: Enable or disable the sending of new violation traps if a

packet with a disallowed MAC address is received. The default value is No, which

means that the option is disabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual378

Display learned security MAC addresses and convert them

to static MAC addresses

After you enable port security globally (see Configure the global port security mode on

page 375) and enable port security for specific interfaces (see Configure a port security

interface on page 376), you can convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically

locked address.

To display learned MAC addresses for an individual interface or LAG and convert

these MAC addresses to static MAC addresses:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Security MAC Address.

The Security MAC Address page displays.

7. From the Port List menu, select the interface.

Port security must be enabled on the selected interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual379

The Dynamic MAC Address table displays the MAC addresses and their associated

VLANs that were learned on the selected interface.

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address.

MAC Address The MAC addresses learned on a specific interface.

8. To convert the dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked addresses, select the

Convert Dynamic Address to Static check box.

9. Click the Apply button.

The dynamic MAC address entries are converted to static MAC address entries in a

numerically ascending order until the static limit is reached.

The Number of Dynamic MAC Addresses Learned field displays the number of

dynamically learned MAC addresses on a specific port.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

Protected ports

If you configure a port as protected, it does not forward traffic to any other protected port on

the switch, but it does forward traffic to unprotected ports. You can configure the ports as

protected or unprotected. By default, all ports are unprotected.

To configure protected ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual380

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Protected Port.

The Protected Port page displays.

7. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to configure as a protected port.

Protected ports are marked with a check mark. No traffic forwarding is possible between

two protected ports.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Private VLANs

A private VLAN separates a regular VLAN domain into two or more subdomains. Each

subdomain is defined (represented) by a primary VLAN and a secondary VLAN:

• Primary VLAN: The primary VLAN ID is the same for all subdomains that belong to a

private VLAN.

• Secondary VLAN: The secondary VLAN ID differentiates subdomains from each other

and provides Layer 2 isolation between ports of the same private VLAN.

A private VLAN contains switch ports that cannot communicate with each other, but can

access another network. These ports are called private ports. Each private VLAN contains

one or more private ports and a single uplink port or uplink aggregation group. Note that all

traffic between private ports is blocked at all layers, not just Layer 2 traffic, but also traffic

such as FTP, HTTP, and Telnet.

Within a private VLAN, three types of VLANs can exist:

• Primary VLAN: The VLAN forwards traffic from promiscuous ports to isolated ports,

community ports, and other promiscuous ports in the same private VLAN. In a private

VLAN, you can configure one primary VLAN only. All ports in a private VLAN share the

same primary VLAN.

• Isolated VLAN: The VLAN is a secondary VLAN that carries traffic from isolated ports to

promiscuous ports. In a private VLAN, you can configure one isolated VLAN only.

• Community VLAN: The VLAN is a secondary VLAN that forwards traffic between ports

that belong to the same community and to the promiscuous ports. IN a private VLAN, you

can configure multiple community VLANs.

Within a private VLAN, the switch supports three types of port designations:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual381

• Promiscuous port: The port is a member of a primary VLAN (within the private VLAN)

and can communicate with all types of ports in the private VLAN, including other

promiscuous ports, community ports, and isolated ports.

• Community port: The port is a host port that is a member of a community VLAN (a

secondary VLAN within the private VLAN) and that can communicate with other

community ports and promiscuous ports.

• Isolated port: The port is a host port that is a member of an isolated VLAN (a secondary

VLAN within the private VLAN) and that can communicate with promiscuous ports only.

Configure a private VLAN type

To configure a private VLAN type:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Type Configuration.

The Private VLAN Type Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN.

8. From the Private VLAN Type menu, select the type of private VLAN:

• Unconfigured: The VLAN is not a private VLAN. This the default setting.

• Primary: The VLAN forwards traffic from promiscuous ports to isolated ports,

community ports, and other promiscuous ports in the same private VLAN. In a private

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual382

VLAN, you can configure one primary VLAN only. All ports in a private VLAN share

the same primary VLAN.

• Isolated: The VLAN is a secondary VLAN that carries traffic from isolated ports to

promiscuous ports. In a private VLAN, you can configure one isolated VLAN only.

• Community: The VLAN is a secondary VLAN that forwards traffic between ports that

belong to the same community and to the promiscuous ports. In a private VLAN, you

can configure multiple community VLANs.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a private VLAN association with a primary and

secondary VLAN

To configure a private VLAN association with a primary and secondary VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Association

Configuration.

The Private VLAN Association Configuration page displays.

7. If you are changing an existing private VLAN association, select the check box for the

private VLAN association.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual383

8. Form the Primary VLAN menu, select the primary VLAN ID for the private VLAN.

This selection specifies the primary VLAN within the private VLAN. You can associate

secondary VLANs in the private VLAN with this primary VLAN.

For information about configuring a primary VLAN for the private VLAN, see Configure a

private VLAN type on page 381.

9. In the Secondary VLANs field, specify one or more secondary VLANs for the private VLAN.

This selection specifies secondary VLANs (isolated VLANs, community VLANs, or a

combination of both) within the private VLAN. The secondary VLANs are associated with

the primary VLAN in the private VLAN.

You can specify a single VLAN ID, a range of VLAN IDs, or a combination of both in

sequence separated by a comma (,):

•You can specify individual VLAN ID, such as 10.

•You can specify the VLAN range values separated by a hyphen, for example, 10-13.

•You can specify the combination of both separated by commas, for example:

12,15,40–43,1000–1005, 2000.

For information about configuring an isolated or community VLAN for the private VLAN,

see Configure a private VLAN type on page 381.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 77. Private VLAN Association

Field Description

Isolated VLAN The isolated VLAN associated with the selected primary VLAN.

Community VLAN(s) The list of community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.

Remove an existing private VLAN association

You can remove a private VLAN association that you no longer need.

To remove a private VLAN association:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual384

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Association

Configuration.

The Private VLAN Association Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the private VLAN association.

8. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The private VLAN association is removed.

Configure the private VLAN port mode

The private plan port mode determines if a port (or LAG) can function in Host mode for a

primary or secondary VLAN (within a private VLAN) or in Promiscuous mode for a

promiscuous VLAN (within a private VLAN).

To configure the private VLAN port mode:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual385

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Port Mode

Configuration.

The Private VLAN Port Mode Configuration page displays.

7. From the Port VLAN Mode menu, select the private VLAN port mode:

• General: The port functions in general mode and not as a port in a private VLAN. This

is the default setting.

• Host: The port functions in host mode in a private VLAN. In this mode, the port can be

member of a community VLAN or isolated VLAN:

-Community VLAN: The port is a member of a secondary VLAN (within the

private VLAN) and can communicate with other community ports and

promiscuous ports.

- Isolated VLAN: The port is a member of a secondary VLAN (within the private

VLAN) and can communicate only with promiscuous ports.

To configure a host port to be a member of specific VLANs, see Configure primary

and secondary VLANs on a private VLAN host interface on page 385.

• Promiscuous: The port functions in promiscuous mode in a private VLAN. In this

mode, the port can communicate with all types of ports in the private VLAN, including

other promiscuous ports, community ports, and isolated ports.

To configure a promiscuous port to be a member of specific VLANs, see Configure

primary and secondary VLANs on a private VLAN promiscuous interface on

page 388.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure primary and secondary VLANs on a private

VLAN host interface

If you configure the private VLAN port mode of an interface as Host (see Configure the

private VLAN port mode on page 384), you can configure a specific primary and secondary

VLAN on the interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual386

To configure a primary and secondary VLANs on a private VLAN host interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Host Interface

Configuration.

The Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. In the Host Primary VLAN field, specify a primary VLAN ID.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual387

You can select a VLAN for which you configured the type as Primary (see Configure a

private VLAN type on page 381).

10. In the Host Secondary VLAN field, specify a secondary VLAN ID.

You can select a VLAN for which you configured the type as Isolated or Community, both

of which are secondary VLAN types within a private VLAN (see Configure a private

VLAN type on page 381).

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational VLAN fields shows the primary and secondary VLANs that operate on

the host interface. In this context, an operational VLAN means a fully and correctly

configured VLAN that can process traffic.

Remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private

VLAN host interface

You can remove primary and secondary VLANs that you no longer need on a private VLAN

host interface.

To remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private VLAN host interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual388

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Host Interface

Configuration.

The Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The primary and secondary VLANs are removed. The VLANs

themselves are not deleted.

Configure primary and secondary VLANs on a private

VLAN promiscuous interface

If you configure the private VLAN port mode of an interface as Promiscuous (see Configure

the private VLAN port mode on page 384), you can configure a specific primary VLAN and

one or more secondary VLANs on the interface.

To configure primary and secondary VLANs on a private VLAN promiscuous interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual389

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Promiscuous

Interface Configuration.

The Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration page displays.

7. In the Promiscuous Primary VLAN field, specify a primary VLAN ID.

You can select a VLAN for which you configured the type as Primary (see Configure a

private VLAN type on page 381).

8. In the Promiscuous Secondary VLAN IDs field, specify one or more secondary VLAN IDs.

You can select VLANs for which you configured the type as Isolated or Community, both

of which are secondary VLAN types within a private VLAN (see Configure a private

VLAN type on page 381).

You can specify a single VLAN ID, a range of VLAN IDs, or a combination of both in

sequence separated by a comma (,):

•You can specify individual VLAN ID, such as 10.

•You can specify the VLAN range values separated by a hyphen, for example, 10-13.

•You can specify the combination of both separated by commas, for example:

12,15,40–43,1000–1005, 2000.

Note: The VLAN IDs that you specify overwrites the secondary VLANs that

you configured on the Private VLAN Association Configuration page

(see Configure a private VLAN association with a primary and

secondary VLAN on page 382).

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational VLAN fields shows the primary and secondary VLANs that operate on

the promiscuous interface. In this context, an operational VLAN means a fully and

correctly configured VLAN.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual390

Remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private

VLAN promiscuous interface

You can remove primary and secondary VLANs that you no longer need on a private VLAN

promiscuous interface.

To remove primary and secondary VLANs from a private VLAN promiscuous interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private VLAN Promiscuous

Interface Configuration.

The Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual391

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The primary and secondary VLANs are removed. The VLANs

themselves are not deleted.

Access control lists

Access control lists (ACLs) ensure that only authorized users can access specific resources

while blocking any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources. ACLs are used to

provide traffic flow control, restrict contents, decide which types of traffic are forwarded or

blocked, and provide security for the network. The switch supports a total of 100 ACLs, which

can be a combination of MAC ACLs, basic IPv4 ACL, extended IPv4 ACLs, and IPv6 ACLs.

To configure an ACL:

1. Create an IPv4-based, IPv6-based, or MAC-based ACL ID.

2. Create a rule and assign it to a unique ACL ID.

3. Define the rules, which can identify protocols, source, and destination IP and MAC

addresses, and other packet-matching criteria.

4. Use the ID number to assign the ACL to a port or to a LAG.

To view ACL configuration examples, see Access control lists (ACLs) on page 493.

Use the ACL Wizard to create a simple ACL

The ACL Wizard helps you create a simple ACL and apply it to the selected ports easily and

quickly. First, select an ACL type to use when you create an ACL. Then add an ACL rule to

this ACL and apply this ACL on the selected ports.

Note: The steps in the following procedure describe how you can create an

ACL based on the destination MAC address. If you select a different

type of ACL (or example, an ACL based on a source IPv4), the page

displays different information.

Use the ACL Wizard to create an ACL

To use the ACL Wizard to create an ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual392

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > ACL Wizard.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual393

7. From the ACL Type menu, select the type of ACL.

You can select from the following ACL types:

• ACL Based on Destination MAC: Creates an ACL based on the destination MAC

address, destination MAC mask, and VLAN.

•ACL Based on Source MAC: Creates an ACL based on the source MAC address,

source MAC mask, and VLAN.

•ACL Based on Destination IPv4: Creates an ACL based on the destination IPv4

address and IPv4 address mask.

•ACL Based on Source IPv4: Creates an ACL based on the source IPv4 address and

IPv4 address mask.

• ACL Based on Destination IPv6: Creates an ACL based on the destination IPv6

prefix and IPv6 prefix length.

•ACL Based on Source IPv6: Creates an ACL based on the source IPv6 prefix and

IPv6 prefix length.

•ACL Based on Destination IPv4 L4 Port: Creates an ACL based on the destination

IPv4 Layer 4 port number.

• ACL Based on Source IPv4 L4 Port: Creates an ACL based on the source IPv4

Layer 4 port number.

• ACL Based on Destination IPv6 L4 Port: Creates an ACL based on the destination

IPv6 Layer 4 port number.

• ACL Based on Source IPv6 L4 Port: Creates an ACL based on the source IPv6

Layer 4 port number.

Note: For L4 port options, two rules are created (one for TCP and one for

UDP).

8. In the Sequence Number field, enter a whole number in the range from 1 to 2147483647

that is used to identify the rule.

9. From the Action menu, select Permit or Deny to specify the action that must be taken if a

packet matches the rule’s criteria.

10. From the Match Every menu, select one of the following options:

• False: Packets do not need to match the selected ACL and rule. With this selection,

you can add a destination MAC address, destination MAC mask, and VLAN.

• True: All packets must match the selected ACL and rule and are either permitted or

denied. In this case, since all packets match the rule, the option of configuring other

match criteria is not offered.

11. Specify the additional match criteria for the selected ACL type.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual394

The rest of the rule match criteria fields available for configuration depend on the selected

ACL type. For information about the possible match criteria fields, see the following table.

ACL Based On Fields

• Destination MAC: Specify the destination MAC address to compare against

an Ethernet frame. The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword

might be specified using a destination MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.

• Destination MAC Mask: Specify the destination MAC address mask, which

represents the bits in the destination MAC address to compare against an

Ethernet frame. The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword might

be specified using a destination MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.

• VLAN: Specify the VLAN ID to match within the Ethernet frame.

• Source MAC: Specify the source MAC address to compare against an

Ethernet frame. The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

• Source MAC Mask: Specify the source MAC address mask, which

represents the bits in the source MAC address to compare against an

Ethernet frame. The format is (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx).

• VLAN: Specify the VLAN ID to match within the Ethernet frame.

• Destination IP Address: Specify the destination IP address.

• Destination IP Mask: Specify the destination IP address mask.

• Source IP Address: Specify the source IP address.

• Source IP Mask: Specify the source IP address mask.

• Destination Prefix: Specify the destination prefix.

• Destination Prefix Length: Specify the destination prefix length.

• Source Prefix: Specify the source destination prefix.

• Source Prefix Length: Specify the source prefix length.

• Destination L4 port (protocol): Specify the destination IPv4 L4 port

protocol.

• Destination L4 port (value): Specify the destination IPv4 L4 port value.

• Source L4 port (protocol): Specify the source IPv4 L4 port protocol.

• Source L4 port (value): Specify the source IPv4 L4 port value.

• Destination L4 port (protocol): Specify the destination IPv6 L4 port

protocol.

• Destination L4 port (value): Specify the destination IPv6 L4 port value.

• Source L4 port (protocol): Specify the source IPv6 L4 port protocol.

• Source L4 port (value): Specify the source IPv6 L4 port value.

12. As a sample, the following steps describe how you can create an ACL based on the

destination MAC address:

a. In the Destination MAC field, specify the destination MAC address that must be

compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a

destination MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.

Destination MAC

Source MAC

Destination IPv4

Source IPv4

Destination IPv6

Source IPv6

Destination IPv4 L4 Port

Source IPv4 L4 Port

Destination IPv6 L4 Port

Source IPv6 L4 Port

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual395

b. In the Destination MAC Mask field, specify the destination MAC address mask that

must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a

destination MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.

c. In the VLAN ID field, specify which VLAN must be compared against the information

in an Ethernet frame.

The range is from 1 to 4093. Either a VLAN range or VLAN can be configured.

13. In the Binding Configuration section, from the Direction menu, select the packet filtering

direction for the ACL.

Only the inbound direction is valid.

14. In the Ports and LAG tables in the Binding Configuration section, select the ports and LAGs

to which the ACL must be applied.

15. Click the Add button.

The rule is added to the ACL.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify an ACL rule that you created with the ACL Wizard

To modify an ACL rule that you created with the ACL Wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual396

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > ACL Wizard.

The ACL Wizard page displays.

7. Select check box that is associated with the rule.

8. Update the match criteria as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an ACL rule that you created with the ACL Wizard

To delete an ACL rule that you created with the ACL Wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > ACL Wizard.

The ACL Wizard page displays.

7. Select check box that is associated with the rule.

8. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual397

ACL Wizard example

In the following figure, the ACL rule is configured to check for packet matches on ports 3, 6,

and 7 and on LAG 3. Only the Inbound option is valid. Packets that include a source address

in the 192.168.5.0/24 network are permitted to be forwarded by the interfaces. All other

packets are dropped because every ACL includes an implicit deny all rule as the last rule.

For information about the ACL Wizard, see Use the ACL Wizard to create a simple ACL on

page 391.

Configure a MAC ACL

A MAC ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet. When a

packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken,

and the additional rules are not checked for a match.

Multiple steps are involved in defining a MAC ACL and applying it to the switch:

1. Create a MAC ACL ID (see Add a MAC ACL on page 398).

2. Create a MAC rule (see Configure MAC ACL rules on page 400).

3. Associate the MAC ACL with one or more interfaces (see Configure MAC bindings on

page 404).

You can display or delete MAC ACL configurations in the MAC binding table (see Display or

delete MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding table on page 406.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual398

Add a MAC ACL

To add a MAC ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL.

The MAC ACL page displays.

The MAC ACL Table displays the number of ACLs currently configured on the switch and

the maximum number of ACLs that can be configured. The current size is equal to the

number of configured IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs.

7. In the Name field, specify a name for the MAC ACL.

The name string can include alphabetic, numeric, hyphen, underscore, or space

characters only. The name must start with an alphabetic character.

8. Click the Add button.

The MAC ACL is added.

Each configured ACL displays the following information:

• Rules: The number of rules currently configured for the MAC ACL.

•Direction: The direction of packet traffic affected by the MAC ACL, which can be

Inbound or blank. (If the ACL is not bound to an interface, the direction is blank.)

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual399

Change the name of a MAC ACL

To change the name of a MAC ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL.

The MAC ACL page displays.

7. Select check box that is associated with the MAC ACL.

8. In the Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a MAC ACL

To delete a MAC ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual400

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL.

The MAC ACL page displays.

7. Select check box that is associated with the MAC ACL.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MAC ACL is removed.

Configure MAC ACL rules

You can define rules for MAC-based ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that

specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded. A default

deny all rule is the last rule of every list.

Add a rule to a MAC ACL

To add a rule to a MAC ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual401

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules.

The MAC Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the MAC ACL.

8. In the Sequence Number field, enter a whole number in the range from 1 to 2147483647 to

identify the rule.

9. From the Action menu, select the action that must be taken if a packet matches the rule’s

criteria:

• Permit: Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria.

•Deny: Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.

10. In the Assign Queue field, specify the hardware egress queue identifier that must be used

to handle all packets matching this ACL rule.

The range for the queue ID is from 0 to 7.

11. From the Mirror Interface menu, select the specific egress interface to which the matching

traffic stream must be copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the switch.

This field cannot be set if a redirect interface is already configured for the ACL rule. This

field is visible for a Permit action.

12. From the Redirect Interface menu, select the egress interface to which the matching traffic

stream must be redirected, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the

switch.

This field cannot be set if a mirror interface is already configured for the ACL rule.

13. From the Match Every menu, select whether each Layer 2 MAC packet must be matched

against the rule:

• True: Each packet must match the selected ACL rule.

•False: Not all packets need to match the selected ACL rule.

14. In the CoS field, specify the 802.1p priority that must be compared against the information in

an Ethernet frame.

The range for the priority is from 0 to 7.

15. In the Destination MAC field, specify the destination MAC address that must be compared

against the information in an Ethernet frame.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual402

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination

MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.

16. In the Destination MAC Mask field, specify the destination MAC address mask that must

be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination

MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.

17. From the EtherType Key menu, select the EtherType value that must be compared against

the information in an Ethernet frame.

The values are as follows:

• Apple Talk

• IBM SNA

• IPv4

• IPv6

• IPX

• MPLS Multicast

• MPLS Unicast

• NetBios

• Novell

• PPPOE

• RARP

• User Value

18. If you select User Value from the EtherType Key menu, in the EtherType User Value field,

specify the customized EtherType value that must be used.

This value must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame. The range is

from 0x0600 to 0xFFFF.

19. In the Source MAC field, specify the source MAC address that must be compared against

the information in an Ethernet frame.

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

20. In the Source MAC Mask field, specify the source MAC address mask that must be

compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.

The format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

21. In the VLAN field, specify the VLAN ID that must be compared against the information in an

Ethernet frame.

The range is from 1 to 4093. You can configure either a single VLAN or a VLAN range.

22. From the Logging menu, select whether to enable or disable logging.

If you select Enable, logging is enabled for this ACL rule (subject to resource availability

on the switch):

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual403

23. Click the Add button.

The rule is added.

Change the match criteria for a MAC rule

To change the match criteria for a MAC rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules.

The MAC Rules page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the rule.

8. Modify the fields as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a rule for a MAC ACL

To delete a rule for a MAC:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual404

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules.

The MAC Rules page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the rule.

8. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

Configure MAC bindings

When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that are defined are applied to the

selected interface. You can assign MAC ACLs to interfaces and LAGs.

To configure MAC bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual405

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Binding Configuration.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select an ACL.

The fixed selection from the Direction menu is Inbound, which means that MAC ACL

rules are applied to traffic entering the interface.

8. In the Sequence Number field, optionally specify a number to indicate the order of the

access list relative to other access lists already assigned to the interface and direction.

A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use

for the interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached

access list using that sequence number. If you do not specify the sequence number, a

sequence number that is one number greater than the highest sequence number

currently in use for the interface and direction is used. The range is from 1 to

4294967295.

9. To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, in the Ports table or LAG table, click the port or

LAG so that a check mark displays.

You can add the ACL to several ports and LAGs.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual406

The Ports and LAG tables display the available interfaces for ACL bindings.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the information displayed in the Interface Binding Status table.

Table 78. Interface Binding Status table

Field Description

Interface The interface of the ACL assigned.

Direction The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.

ACL Type The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

ACL ID The ACL name identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Sequence Number The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs

assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Display or delete MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding

table

You can display or delete the MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding table.

To display or delete MAC ACL bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual407

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Basic > Binding Table.

The Binding Table page displays. This table displays the MAC ACL-to-interface bindings.

7. To delete a MAC ACL-to-interface binding, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the interface.

b. Click the Delete button.

The binding is removed.

The following table describes the information that is displayed in the MAC binding table.

Table 79. MAC Binding Table

Field Description

Interface The interface of the ACL assigned.

Direction The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.

ACL Type The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

ACL ID The ACL name identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Sequence Number The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs

assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Configure a basic or extended IPv4 ACL

An IPv4 ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet. When

a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken,

and the additional rules are not checked for a match. You must specify the interfaces to

which an IPv4 ACL applies, as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic.

Multiple steps are involved in defining an IPv4 ACL and applying it to the switch:

1. Add an IPv4 ACL ID (see Add an IPv4 ACL on page 408).

The differences between a basic IPv4 ACL and an extended IPv4 ACL are as follows:

• Numbered ACL from 1 to 99: Creates a basic IPv4 ACL, which allows you to permit

or deny traffic from a source IP address.

• Numbered ACL from 100 to 199: Creates an extended IPv4 ACL, which allows you

to permit or deny specific types of Layer 3 or Layer 4 traffic from a source IP address

to a destination IP address. This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering

capabilities than the basic IP ACL.

• Named IP ACL: Create an extended IPv4 ACL with a name string that is up to 31

alphanumeric characters in length. The name must start with an alphabetic character.

2. Create an IPv4 rule (see Configure rules for a basic IPv4 ACL on page 411 or

Configure rules for an extended IPv4 ACL on page 415).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual408

3. Associate the IPv4 ACL with one or more interfaces (see Configure IP ACL interface

bindings on page 432).

You can display or delete IPv4 ACL configurations in the IP ACL Binding table (see Display

or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding table on page 434.

Add an IPv4 ACL

To add an IPv4 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP ACL.

The IP ACL page displays.

The IP ACL page shows the current size of the ACL table compared to the maximum size

of the ACL table. The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 ACLs plus

the number of configured MAC ACLs and IPv6 ACLs. The maximum number of ACLs on

the switch is 100.

The Current Number of ACL field displays the current number of all ACLs configured on

the switch.

The Maximum ACL field displays the maximum number of ACLs that you can configure

on the switch.

7. In the IP ACL ID field, specify the ACL ID or IP ACL name, which depends on the IP ACL

type. The IP ACL ID is an integer in the following range:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual409

• 1–99: Creates a basic IP ACL, which allows you to permit or deny traffic from a

source IP address.

• 100–199: Creates an extended IP ACL, which allows you to permit or deny specific

types of Layer 3 or Layer 4 traffic from a source IP address to a destination IP

address. This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering capabilities than the

standard IP ACL.

• IP ACL Name: Create an extended IP ACL with a name string that is up to

31 alphanumeric characters in length. The name must start with an alphabetic

character.

Each configured ACL displays the following information:

• Rules: The number of rules currently configured for the IPv4 ACL.

•Type: Identifies the ACL as a basic IP ACL (with ID from 1 to 99), extended IP ACL

(with ID from 100 to 199 or a name).

8. Click the Add button.

The IP ACL is added.

Change the number or name of an IPv4 ACL

To change the number or name of an IPv4 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP ACL.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual410

The IP ACL Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the IP ACL.

8. In the IP ACL field, specify the new number or name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv4 ACL

To delete an IPv4 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP ACL.

The IP ACL Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the IP ACL.

8. Click the Delete button.

The IP ACL is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual411

Configure rules for a basic IPv4 ACL

You can define rules for IP-based standard ACLs (basic ACLs). The access list definition

includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or

discarded.

Note: An implicit deny all rule is included at the end of an ACL list. This means

that if an ACL is applied to a packet, and if none of the explicit rules match,

then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped.

Add a rule for a basic IPv4 ACL

To add a rule for a basic IPv4 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules.

The IP Rules page displays.

If no rules exist, the Basic ACL Rule Table might show the message No rules were

configured for this ACL. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the

Basic ACL Rule Table.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the IP ACL for which you want to add a rule.

For basic IP ACLs, this must be an ID in the range from 1 to 99.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual412

8. Click the Add button.

9. Specify the following match criteria for the rule:

• Sequence Number: Enter an ACL sequence number in the range from 1 to

2147483647 that is used to identify the rule. An IP ACL can contain up to 50 rules.

• Action: Select the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:

-Permit: Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.

Egress Queue: If the selection form the Action menu is Permit, you can specify

the hardware egress queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching

this IP ACL rule. The range of queue IDs is from 0 to 7.

-Deny: Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.

Logging: If the selection from the Action menu is Deny, you can enable logging

for the ACL by selecting the Enable radio button. (Logging is subject to resource

availability on the switch.)

• Match Every: Select one of the radio buttons to specify whether all packets must

match the selected IP ACL rule:

- Enable: All packets must match the selected IP ACL rule and are either permitted

or denied.

- Disable: Not all packets need to match the selected IP ACL rule.

• Interface: Select one of the radio buttons to specify whether all packets must be

mirrored or redirected:

- Mirror: From the menu, select the specific egress interface to which the matching

traffic stream must be copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the

switch.

- Redirect: From the menu, select the egress interface to which the matching traffic

stream must be redirected, bypassing any forwarding decision normally

performed by the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual413

• Source IP Address: Enter an IP address using dotted-decimal notation to be

compared to a packet’s source IP address as a match criterion for the selected IP

ACL rule.

• Source IP Mask: Specify the IP mask in dotted-decimal notation to be used with the

source IP address.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the match criteria for a basic IPv4 ACL rule

To modify the match criteria for a basic IPv4 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules.

The IP Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.

8. In the Basic ACL Rule Table, click the rule.

The rule is a hyperlink. The Standard ACL Rule Configuration page displays.

9. Modify the basic IP ACL rule criteria.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual414

Delete a basic IPv4 ACL rule

To delete a basic IPv4 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules.

The IP Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.

8. In the Basic ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.

9. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual415

Configure rules for an extended IPv4 ACL

You can define rules for extended IPv4 ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that

specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded.

Note: An implicit deny all rule is included at the end of an ACL list. This means

that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match,

then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped.

Add a rule for an extended IPv4 ACL

To add a rule for an extended IPv4 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules.

The IP Extended Rules page displays.

If no rules exists, the Extended ACL Rule Table might show the message No rules were

configured for this ACL. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the

Extended ACL Rule Table.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the IP ACL for which you want to add a rule.

For extended IP ACLs, this must be an ID in the range from 101 to 199 or a name.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual416

8. Click the Add button.

9. Configure the following match criteria for the rule:

• Sequence Number: Enter a number in the range from 1 to 2147483647 that is used to

identify the rule. An extended IP ACL can contain up to 50 rules.

• Action: Select the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:

-Permit: Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.

Egress Queue: If the selection from the Action menu is Permit, select the

hardware egress queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching this

IP ACL rule. The range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.

-Deny: Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.

Logging: If the selection form the Action menu is Deny, you can enable logging

for the ACL by selecting the Enable radio button. (Logging is subject to resource

availability in the device.)

• Interface: For a Permit action, use either a mirror interface or a redirect interface:

-Select the Mirror radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to

which the matching traffic stream is copied, in addition to being forwarded

normally by the device.

-Select the Redirect radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface

to which the matching traffic stream is forced, bypassing any forwarding decision

normally performed by the device.

• Match Every: Select one of the radio buttons to specify whether all packets must

match the selected IP ACL rule:

- False: Not all packets need to match the selected IP ACL rule. You can configure

other match criteria on the page.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual417

- True: All packets must match the selected IP ACL rule and are either permitted or

denied. In this case, you cannot configure other match criteria on the page.

• Protocol Type: From the menu, select a protocol that a packet’s IP protocol must be

matched against: IP, ICMP, IGMP, TCP, UDP, EIGRP, GRE, IPINIP, OSPF, PIM, or

Other. If you select Other, enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Src: In the Src field, enter a source IP address, using dotted-decimal notation, to be

compared to a packet’s source IP address as a match criterion for the selected IP

ACL rule:

-If you select the IP Address radio button, enter an IP address or an IP address

range. You can enter a relevant wildcard mask to apply this criteria. If this field is

left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Host radio button, the wildcard mask is configured as 0.0.0.0. If

this field is left empty, it means any.

The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A

wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that none of the bits are important. A wildcard of

255.255.255.255 indicates that all of the bits are important.

• Src L4: The options are available only if the selection from the Protocol Type menu is

TCP or UDP. Use the source L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for

L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.

You can select either the Port radio button or the Range radio button:

- Port: If you select the Port radio button, you can either enter the port number

yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:

•The source IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, www-http,

smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The source IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip, time,

who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter a port number. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the field blank, it means any.

The only relevant matching condition for L4 port numbers is Equal. This means

that an IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is equal to the

specified port number or port protocol.

- Range: If you select the Range radio button, the IP ACL rule matches only if the

Layer 4 source port number is within the specified port range. The starting port,

ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.

The Start Port and End Port fields identify the first and last ports that are part of

the port range. The values can range from 0 to 65535.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual418

You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following

protocols from the menu:

•The source IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, www-http,

smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The source IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip, time,

who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range. Select Other from the menu to enter a

port number. If you select Other from the menu but leave the field blank, it means

any.

The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A

wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that none of the bits are important. A wildcard

of 255.255.255.255 indicates that all of the bits are important.

• Dst: In the Dst field, enter a destination IP address, using dotted-decimal notation, to

be compared to a packet’s destination IP address as a match criterion for the selected

IP ACL rule:

-If you select the IP Address radio button, enter an IP address with a relevant

wildcard mask to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Host radio button, the wildcard mask is configured as 0.0.0.0. If

this field is left empty, it means any.

The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A

wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that none of the bits are important. A wildcard of

255.255.255.255 indicates that all of the bits are important.

• Dst L4: The options are available only if the selection from the Protocol Type menu is

TCP or UDP. Use the destination L4 port option to specify relevant matching

conditions for L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.

You can select either the Port radio button or the Range radio button:

- Port. If you select the Port radio button, you can either enter the port number

yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu.

•The destination IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata,

www-http, smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The destination IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip,

time, who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter a port number. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the field blank, it means any.

The only relevant matching condition for L4 port numbers is Equal. This means

that an IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is equal to the

specified port number or port protocol.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual419

- Range: If you select the Range radio button, the IP ACL rule matches only if the

Layer 4 destination port number is within the specified port range. The starting

port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.

The Start Port and End Port fields identify the first and last ports that are part of

the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.

You can either select the enter the port range yourself or select one of the

following protocols from the menu:

•The destination IP TCP port range names are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata,

www-http, smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The destination IP UDP port range names are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip,

time, who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter a port number. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the field blank, it means any.

The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A

wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that none of the bits are important. A wildcard

of 255.255.255.255 indicates that all of the bits are important.

• IGMP Type: If your selection from the Protocol Type menu is IGMP and you specify

the IGMP type, the IP ACL rule matches the specified IGMP message type. The

range is from 0 to 255. If this field is left empty, it means any.

• ICMP: If your selection from the Protocol Type menu is ICMP, you can select either

the Type or Message radio button:

-If you select the Type radio button, note the following:

•The Type and Code fields are enabled only if the protocol is ICMP. Use these

fields to specify a match condition for ICMP packets:

•If you specify information in the Type field, the IP ACL rule matches the

specified ICMP message type. The type number can be from 0 to 255.

•If you specify information in the Code field, the IP ACL rule matches the

specified ICMP message code. The code can be from 0 to 255.

•If these fields are left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Message radio button, from the menu, select the type of the

ICMP message to match with the selected IP ACL rule. Specifying a type of

message implies that both the ICMP type and ICMP code are specified. The

ICMP message is decoded into the corresponding ICMP type and ICMP code

within the ICMP type.

The IPv4 ICMP message types are echo, echo-reply, host-redirect,

mobile-redirect, net-redirect, net-unreachable, redirect, packet-too-big,

port-unreachable, source-quench, router-solicitation, router-advertisement,

ttl-exceeded, time-exceeded, and unreachable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual420

• Fragments: Either select the Enable radio button to allow initial fragments (that is,

the fragment bit is asserted) or leave the default Disable radio button selected to

prevent initial fragments from being used.

This option is not valid for rules that match L4 information such as a TCP port number,

because that information is carried in the initial packet.

• Service Type: Select a service type match condition for the extended IP ACL rule.

The possible options are IP DSCP, IP precedence, and IP TOS, which are alternative

methods to specify a match criterion for the same service type field in the IP header.

Each method uses a different user notation. After you make a selection, you can

specify the appropriate values:

- IP DSCP: This is an optional configuration. Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) field. The DSCP is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the service type

octet in the IP header. Enter an integer from 0 to 63. To select the IP DSCP, select

one of the DSCP keywords from the menu. To specify a numeric value, select

Other and a field displays in which you can enter numeric value of the DSCP.

- IP Precedence: This is an optional configuration. The IP precedence field in a

packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the service type octet in the IP header.

Enter a number from 0 to 7.

- IP TOS: This is an optional configuration. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined

as all 8 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. The ToS bits value is a

hexadecimal number that is composed of numbers 00 to 09 and AA to FF. The

ToS mask value is a hexadecimal number that is composed of numbers 00 to FF.

The ToS mask denotes the bit positions in the ToS bits value that are used for

comparison against the IP ToS field in a packet.

For example, to check for an IP ToS value for which bit 7 is set and is the most

significant value, for which bit 5 is set, and for which bit 1 is cleared, use a ToS

bits value of 0xA0 and a ToS mask of 0xFF.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the match criteria for an extended IPv4 ACL rule

To modify the match criteria for an existing extended IPv4 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual421

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules.

The IP Extended Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.

8. In the Extended ACL Rule Table, click the rule.

The rule is a hyperlink. The Extended ACL Rule Configuration page displays.

9. Modify the extended IP ACL rule criteria.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an extended IPv4 ACL rule

To delete an extended IPv4 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual422

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules.

The IP Extended Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to delete.

8. In the Extended ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.

9. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

Configure an IPv6 ACL

An IPv6 ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet. When

a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken,

and the additional rules are not checked for a match. You must specify the interfaces to

which an IPv6 ACL applies, as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic.

Multiple steps are involved in defining an IPv6 ACL and applying it to the switch:

1. Add an IPv6 ACL ID (see Add an IPv6 ACL on page 422).

An IPv6 ACL must start with a name string that is up to 31 alphanumeric characters in

length. The name must start with an alphabetic character.

2. Create an IPv6 rule (see Configure rules for an IPv6 ACL on page 425).

3. Associate the IPv6 ACL with one or more interfaces (see Configure IP ACL interface

bindings on page 432).

You can display or delete IPv6 ACL configurations in the IP ACL Binding table (see Display

or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding table on page 434.

Add an IPv6 ACL

To add an IPv6 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual423

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 ACL.

The IPv6 ACL page displays.

7. In the IPv6 ACL field, specify a name to identify the IPv6 ACL.

This is the IPv6 ACL name string, which includes up to 31 alphanumeric characters only.

The name must start with an alphabetic character.

8. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 ACL is added.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 80. IPv6 Configuration and IPv6 ACL Table information

Field Description

Current Number of ACL The current number of ACLs configured on the switch.

Maximum ACL The maximum number of ACLs that can be configured on the switch.

Rules The number of the rules associated with the IPv6 ACL.

Type The type is IPv6 ACL.

Change the name of an IPv6 ACL

To change the name of an IPv6 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual424

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 ACL.

The IPv6 ACL page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the IPv6 ACL.

8. In the IPv6 ACL field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv6 ACL

To delete an IPv6 ACL:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual425

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 ACL.

The IPv6 ACL page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the IPv6 ACL.

8. Click the Delete button.

The IPv6 ACL is removed.

Configure rules for an IPv6 ACL

You can define rules for IPv6 ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that specify

whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded.

Add a rule for an IPv6 ACL

Add a rule for an ACL IPv6:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual426

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules.

The IPv6 Rules page displays.

If no rules exists, the IPv6 ACL Rule Table might show the message No rules were

configured for this ACL. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the

IPv6 Rules table.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the IPv6 ACL for which you want to add a rule.

An IPv6 ACL can contain up to 50 rules.

8. Click the Add button.

9. Configure the following match criteria for the rule:

• Action: Select the ACL forwarding action by selecting one of the following radio

buttons:

-Permit: Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.

- Deny: Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.

• Egress Queue: If you select the Permit radio button, select the hardware egress

queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching this IPv6 ACL rule. The

range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.

•Logging: If you select the Deny radio button, you can enable logging for the ACL by

selecting the Enable radio button. (Logging is subject to resource availability in the

device.)

If the access list trap flag is also enabled, periodic traps are generated, indicating the

number of times this rule was evoked during the report interval. A fixed five-minute

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual427

report interval is used for the switch. A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is

zero for the current interval.

• Interface: If you select the Permit radio button, use either a mirror interface or a

redirect interface:

-Select the Mirror radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to

which the matching traffic stream is copied, in addition to being forwarded

normally by the device.

-Select the Redirect radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface

to which the matching traffic stream is forced, bypassing any forwarding decision

normally performed by the device.

• Match Every: Select whether all packet must match the selected IPv6 ACL rule:

- False: Not all packets need to match the selected IPv6 ACL rule. You can

configure other match criteria on the page.

- True: All packets must match the selected IPv6 ACL rule and are either permitted

or denied. In this case, you cannot configure other match criteria on the page.

• Protocol Type: Specify the IPv6 protocol type in one of the following ways:

-From the Protocol Type menu, select IPv6, ICMPv6, TCP, or UDP.

-From the Protocol Type menu, select Other, and in the associated field, specify

an integer ranging from 0 to 255. This number represents the IPv6 protocol.

• Src: In the Src field, enter a source IPv6 address or source IPv6 address range to be

compared to a packet’s source IPv6 address as a match criterion for the selected

IPv6 ACL rule:

-If you select the IPv6 Address radio button, enter an IPv6 address or IPv6 range

to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Host radio button, enter a host source IPv6 address to match the

specified IPv6 address. If this field is left empty, it means any.

The source IPv6 address argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373

where the address is specified in hexadecimal numbers using 16-bit values between

colons.

• Src L4: The options are available only if the selection from the Protocol Type menu is

TCP or UDP. Use the source L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for

L4 port numbers in the IPv6 ACL rule.

You can select either the Port radio button or the Range radio button:

- Port: If you select the Port radio button, you can either enter the port number

yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:

•The source IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, www-http,

smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The source IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip, time,

who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual428

Select Other from the menu to enter a port number. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the field blank, it means any.

The only relevant matching condition for L4 port numbers is Equal. This means

that an IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is equal to

the specified port number or port protocol.

- Range: If you select the Range radio button, the IPv6 ACL rule matches only if

the Layer 4 source port number is within the specified port range. The starting

port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.

The Start Port and End Port fields identify the first and last ports that are part of

the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.

You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following

protocols from the menu:

•The source IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, www-http,

smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The source IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip, time,

who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter port numbers. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the fields blank, it means any.

• Dst: In the Dst field, enter a destination IPv6 address to be compared to a packet’s

destination IPv6 address as a match criterion for the selected IPv6 ACL rule:

-If you select the IPv6 Address radio button, enter an IPv6 address to apply this

criteria. If this field is left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Host radio button, enter a host source IPv6 address to match the

specified IPv6 address. If this field is left empty, it means any.

The source IPv6 address argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373

where the address is specified in hexadecimal numbers using 16-bit values between

colons.

• Dst L4: The options are available only if the selection from the Protocol Type menu is

TCP or UDP. Use the destination L4 port option to specify relevant matching

conditions for L4 port numbers in the IPv6 ACL rule.

You can select either the Port radio button or the Range radio button:

- Port: If you select the Port radio button, you can either enter the port number

yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:

•The destination IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata,

www-http, smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The destination IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip,

time, who, and tftp.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual429

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter a port number. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the field blank, it means any.

The only relevant matching condition for L4 port numbers is Equal. This means

that an IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is equal

to the specified port number or port protocol.

- Range: If you select the Range radio button, the IPv6 ACL rule matches only if

the Layer 4 destination port number is within the specified port range. The starting

port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.

The Start Port and End Port fields identify the first and last ports that are part of

the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.

You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following

protocols from the menu:

•The destination IP TCP port protocols are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata,

www-http, smtp, telnet, pop2, pop3, and bgp.

•The destination IP UDP port protocols are domain, echo, snmp, ntp, rip,

time, who, and tftp.

Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as

both the start and end of the port range.

Select Other from the menu to enter port numbers. If you select Other from the

menu but leave the fields blank, it means any.

• ICMPv6: The Type and Message fields are enabled only if the protocol is ICMPv6.

Use these fields to specify a match condition for ICMPv6 packets. Select either the

Type or Message radio button:

-If you select the Type radio button, note the following:

•The Type and Code fields are enabled only if the protocol is ICMPv6. Use

these fields to specify a match condition for ICMPv6 packets:

•If you specify information in the Type field, the IPv6 ACL rule matches the

specified ICMPv6 message type. The type number can be from 0 to 255.

•If you specify information in the Code field, the IPv6 ACL rule matches the

specified ICMPv6 message code. The code can be from 0 to 255.

•If these fields are left empty, it means any.

-If you select the Message radio button, note the following:

•Select the type of the ICMPv6 message to match with the selected IPv6 ACL

rule. Specifying a type of message implies that both the ICMPv6 type and

ICMPv6 code are specified. The ICMPv6 message is decoded into the

corresponding ICMPv6 type and ICMPv6 code within the ICMP type.

•The ISMPv6 message types are destination-unreachable, echo-reply,

echo-request, header, hop-limit, mld-query, mld-reduction, mld-report,

next-header, no-admin, no-route, packet-too-big, port-unreachable,

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual430

router-solicitation, router-advertisement, router-renumbering,

unreachable, time-exceeded, nd-na, and nd-ns.

• Fragments: Either select the Enable radio button to allow initial fragments (that is,

the fragment bit is asserted) or leave the default Disable radio button selected to

prevent initial fragments from being used.

This option is not valid for rules that match L4 information such as TCP port number,

because that information is carried in the initial packet.

• Routing: Either select the Enable radio button to match packets that include a routing

extension header or leave the default Disable radio button selected to ignore the

routing extension headers in packets.

• IPv6 DSCP Service: Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field. This is an

optional configuration.

The DSCP is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the service type octet in the IPv6

header. Enter an integer from 0 to 63. To select the IPv6 DSCP, select one of the

DSCP keywords. To specify a numeric value, select Other and enter the numeric

value of the DSCP.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the match criteria for an IPv6 ACL rule

To modify the match criteria for an IPv6 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual431

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules.

The IPv6 Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.

8. In the IPv6 ACL Rule Table, click the rule.

The rule is a hyperlink. The IPv6 ACL Rule Configuration page displays.

9. Modify the IPv6 ACL rule criteria.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv6 ACL rule

To delete an IPv6 ACL rule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules.

The IPv6 Rules page displays.

7. From the ACL Name menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to delete.

8. In the IPv6 ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.

9. Click the Delete button.

The rule is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual432

Configure IP ACL interface bindings

When you bind a basic IPv4, extended IPv4, or IPv6 ACL to an interface, all the rules that you

defined for the IP ACL are applied to the selected interface.

If resources on the switch are insufficient, an attempt to bind an ACL to an interface fails.

To bind an IP ACL to one or more interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Binding Configuration.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual433

7. From the ACL ID menu, select the existing IP ACL for you which you want to add an IP ACL

interface binding.

The fixed selection from the Direction menu is Inbound, which means that IP ACL rules

are applied to traffic entering the interface.

8. In the Sequence Number field, optionally specify a number to indicate the order of the

access list relative to other access lists already assigned to the interface and direction.

A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use

for the interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached

access list using that sequence number. If you do not specify the sequence number

(meaning that the value is 0), a sequence number that is one number greater than the

highest sequence number currently in use for the interface and direction is used. The

range is from 1 to 4294967295.

9. To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, in the Ports table or LAG table, click the port or

LAG so that a check mark displays.

You can add the ACL to several ports and LAGs.

The Ports and LAG tables display the available interfaces for ACL bindings.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 81. Interface Binding Status information

Field Description

Interface The selected interface.

Direction The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL, which is always Inbound.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual434

Display or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding

table

You can display or delete bindings for basic IPv4, extended IPv4, and IPv6 ACLs.

To display or delete IP ACL bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL > Advanced > Binding Table.

The Binding Table page displays. This table displays the IP ACL-to-interface bindings.

7. To delete an IP ACL-to-interface binding, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the interface.

ACL Type The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

ACL ID The ACL number or name identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and

direction.

Sequence Number The sequence number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs

assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Table 81. Interface Binding Status information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual435

b. Click the Delete button.

The binding is removed.

The following table describes the information displayed in the IP ACL binding table.

Table 82. IP ACL Binding Table

Field Description

Interface The interface.

Direction The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL, which is always Inbound.

ACL Type The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.

ACL ID The ACL number or name identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and

direction.

Sequence Number The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs

assigned to the selected interface and direction.

Configure VLAN ACL bindings

You can associate a MAC ACL, any type of IPv4 ACL, or an IPv6 ACL with a VLAN. When

you do so, the ACL is applied to all interfaces that are members of the VLAN.

Add a VLAN ACL binding

To add a VLAN ACL binding:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual436

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL> Advanced > VLAN Binding Configuration.

The VLAN Binding Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID to which the binding must apply.

The direction for packet filtering is always inbound.

8. In the Sequence Number field, enter an optional sequence number.

You can specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list

relative to other access lists that are already assigned to the VLAN ID and selected

direction. A lower number indicates a higher precedence order. If a sequence number is

already in use for the VLAN ID and selected direction, the specified access list replaces

the currently attached ACL using that sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence

number (the value is 0), a sequence number that is one greater than the highest

sequence number currently in use for the VLAN ID and selected direction is used.The

range is from 1 to 4294967295.

9. From the ACL Type menu, select the type of ACL.

You can select a MAC ACL, IP ACL, or IPv6 ACL.

10. From the ACL ID list, select the ID or name of the ACL that must be bound to the specified

VLAN.

11. Click the Add button.

The VLAN ACL binding is added.

Remove a VLAN ACL binding

To remove a VLAN ACL binding:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Manage Device Security User Manual437

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > ACL> Advanced > VLAN Binding Configuration.

The VLAN Binding Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the VLAN binding that you want to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN ACL binding is removed.

438

7Monitor the Switch and the Traffic

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Monitor the switch and the ports

•Logs

•Port mirroring

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual439

Monitor the switch and the ports

You can display and clear port and switch statistics and perform a cable test.

Display or clear switch statistics

You can display detailed statistical information about the traffic that the switch processes.

To display or clear the switch statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network s the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Switch Statistics.

The Switch Statistics page displays.

7. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

8. To clear all the statistics counters, click the Clear button.

Clearing resets all switch summary and detailed statistics to default values. However, the

discarded packets count cannot be cleared.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual440

The following table describes the switch statistics displayed on the page.

Table 83. Switch statistics

Field Description

ifIndex The interface index of the interface table entry associated with the processor of

this switch.

Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding framing

bits, but including FCS octets).

Packets Received Without

Errors

The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast

packets) received by the processor.

Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address. This does not include multicast packets.

Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded, even though

no errors were detected, in order to prevent their being delivered to a

higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free

up buffer space.

Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing

characters.

Packets Transmitted Without

Errors

The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were

discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted to a multicast address, including those that were discarded or not

sent.

Broadcast Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted to the broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not

sent.

Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded, even

though no errors were detected, in order to prevent their being delivered to a

higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free

up buffer space.

Most Address Entries Ever

Used

The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that were

learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.

Address Entries in Use The number of learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address

Table for this switch.

Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of VLANs allowed on this switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual441

Display port statistics

You can display a summary of per-port traffic statistics on the switch.

To display port statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Port Statistics.

The Port Statistics page displays.

Most VLAN Entries Ever

Used

The largest number of VLANs that were active on this switch since the last

reboot.

Static VLAN Entries The number of active VLAN entries on this switch that were created statically.

VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that were created and then deleted since

the last reboot.

Time Since Counters Last

Cleared

The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics for

this switch were last cleared.

Table 83. Switch statistics (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual442

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

The following table describes the per-port statistics displayed on the page.

Table 84. Port statistics

Field Description

Interface The interface or LAG.

Total Packets Received

Without Errors

The total number of packets received that were without errors.

Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from

being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address. This does not include multicast packets.

Packets Transmitted Without

Errors

The number of frames without errors that were transmitted by the port.

Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of

errors.

Collision Frames The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

Link Down Events The total number of link down events on a physical port.

Time Since Counters Last

Cleared

The elapsed time in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for

the port were last cleared.

Reset the counters for all interfaces on the switch

To reset the counters for all interfaces on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual443

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Port Statistics.

The Port Statistics page displays.

7. Select the check box in the heading of the table.

8. Click the Clear button.

All counters are reset to 0.

Reset the counters for one or more interfaces

To reset the counters for one or more interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Port Statistics.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual444

The Port Statistics page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• All: Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To reset a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the

port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To reset multiple interfaces, select the check box associated with each interface.

9. Click the Clear button.

The counters for the interface are reset to 0.

Display and manage detailed port statistics

You can display a variety of per-port traffic statistics.

To display or clear detailed port statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual445

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Port Detailed Statistics.

The Port Detailed Statistics page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface (a physical port or LAG) for which you want to

display the statistics.

8. From the MST ID menu, select the MST ID associated with the interface (if available).

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

10. To clear all the counters, click the Clear button.

All statistics for the port are reset to the default values.

The following table describes the detailed port information that displays for a particular port.

Table 85. Detailed port statistics

Field Description

ifIndex The interface or LAG.

Port Type For normal ports, this field is displayed as blank. Otherwise, the options are as

follows:

• Mirrored: The port is a participating in port mirroring as a mirrored port.

• Probe: The port is a participating in port mirroring as the probe port.

• Port Channel: The port is a member of a LAG.

Port Channel ID If the port is a member of a port channel (LAG), the port channel’s interface ID

and name are shown. Otherwise, Disable is shown.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root, Designated, Alternate,

Backup, Master, or Disabled.

STP Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port

or port channel. The options are as follows:

• Enable: Spanning tree is enabled for the port.

• Disable: Spanning tree is disabled for the port.

STP State The port's current Spanning Tree state. This state controls what action a port

takes on receipt of a frame. If the bridge detects a malfunctioning port, it places

that port into the broken state. The states are defined in IEEE 802.1D:

• Disabled

• Blocking

• Listening

• Learning

• Forwarding

• Broken

Admin Mode The port control administration state. The port must be enabled for it to be

allowed into the network. The default is Enabled.

Flow Control Mode Indicates whether flow control is enabled or disabled for the port. This field does

not apply to LAGs.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual446

LACP Mode Indicates the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administrative state. The mode

must be enabled for the port to participate in link aggregation.

Physical Mode Indicates the port speed and duplex mode. In autonegotiation mode the duplex

mode and speed are set from the autonegotiation process.

Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode for physical interfaces.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Link Trap Indicates whether or not the port sends a trap when link status changes.

Packets RX and TX 64

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets RX and TX 65-127

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but

including FCS octets).

Packets RX and TX 128-255

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but

including FCS octets).

Packets RX and TX 256-511

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but

including FCS octets).

Packets RX and TX 512-1023

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits

but including FCS octets).

Packets RX and TX

1024-1518 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted that

were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits

but including FCS octets).

Octets Received The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on

the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can be

used as a reasonable estimate of Ethernet utilization. If you need greater

precision, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects must be sampled

before and after a common interval.

Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64

octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received 65-127

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Packets Received 128-255

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Packets Received 256-511

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Table 85. Detailed port statistics (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual447

Packets Received 512-1023

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including

FCS octets).

Packets Received 1024-1518

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including

FCS octets).

Packets Received > 1518

Octets

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well

formed.

Total Packets Received

Without Errors

The total number of packets received that were without errors.

Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast

address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast

address.

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address. This does not include multicast packets.

Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets that were discarded even though no errors were

detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. A possible

reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Total Packets Received with

MAC Errors

The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from

being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and included either a bad

frame check sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a

bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error). This definition of

jabber is different from the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5 (10BASE5)

and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents define jabber as the

condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to detect jabber

is between 20 ms and 150 ms.

Fragments Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with

ERROR CRC (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Undersize Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with

GOOD CRC (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Alignment Errors The total number of packets received with a length (excluding framing bits, but

including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but included a

bad frame check sequence (FCS) with a nonintegral number of octets.

Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received with a length (excluding framing bits, but

including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but included a

bad frame check sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets.

Table 85. Detailed port statistics (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual448

Total Received Packets Not

Forwarded

The number of valid frames received that were discarded (that is, filtered) by the

forwarding process.

802.3x Pause Frames

Received

The number of MAC control frames received on the interface with an opcode

indicating the PAUSE operation. This counter does not increment when the

interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

Total Packets Transmitted

(Octets)

The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted

on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can

be used as a reasonable estimate of Ethernet utilization. If yo need greater

precision, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects must be sampled

before and after a common interval.

Packets Transmitted 64

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64

octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Transmitted 65-127

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Packets Transmitted 128-255

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Packets Transmitted 256-511

Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS

octets).

Packets Transmitted

512-1023 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including

FCS octets).

Packets Transmitted

1024-1518 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including

FCS octets).

Packets Transmitted > 1518

Octets

The total number of packets transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well

formed. This counter supports a maximum increment rate of 815 counts per sec

at 10 Mb/s.

Maximum Frame Size The maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured to use,

including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload. The possible range is 1522 to

10000. The default maximum frame size is 1522.

Total Packets Transmitted

Successfully

The number of frames that were transmitted successfully by the port.

Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted

to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not

sent.

Multicast Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted

to a multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Table 85. Detailed port statistics (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual449

Broadcast Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted

to the broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even

though no errors were detected to prevent them from being delivered to a

higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free

up buffer space.

Total Transmit Errors The sum of single, multiple, and excessive collisions.

Total Transmit Packets

Discarded

The sum of single collision frames discarded, multiple collision frames

discarded, and excessive frames discarded.

Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for

which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.

Multiple Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for

which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.

Excessive Collision Frames The number of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due

to excessive collisions.

Dropped Transmit Frames The number of transmit frames discarded at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Received The number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Received The number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Received The number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

802.3x Pause Frames

Transmitted

The number of MAC control frames transmitted on the interface with an opcode

indicating the PAUSE operation. This counter does not increment when the

interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPoL frames of any type that were received by this

authenticator.

EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPoL frames of any type that were transmitted by this

authenticator.

Time Since Counters Last

Cleared

The elapsed time in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for

the port were last cleared.

Table 85. Detailed port statistics (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual450

Display or clear EAP and EAPoL statistics

You can display information about Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and EAP over

LAN (EAPoL) packets that are received on physical ports.

To display or clear EAP and EAPoL statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > EAP Statistics.

The EAP Statistics page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8. To clear the counters, which resets the EAP and EAPoL statistics to default values, take

one of the following actions:

•To clear the counters for a specific port, select the check box associated with the port,

and click the Clear button.

•To clear the counters for multiple ports, select the check boxes associated with the

ports, and click the Clear button.

•To clear all counters for all ports, select the check box in the row heading, and click

the Clear button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual451

The following table describes the EAP statistics displayed on the page.

Table 86. EAP statistics

Field Description

Port The port number.

EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPoL frames of any type that were received by this

authenticator.

EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPoL frames of any type that were transmitted by this

authenticator.

EAPOL Start Frames

Received

The number of EAPoL start frames that were received by this authenticator.

EAPOL Logoff Frames

Received

The number of EAPoL logoff frames that were received by this authenticator.

EAPOL Last Frame Version The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPoL frame.

EAPOL Last Frame Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPoL frame.

EAPOL Invalid Frames

Received

The number of EAPoL frames that were received by this authenticator in which

the frame type is not recognized.

EAPOL Length Error Frames

Received

The number of EAPoL frames that were received by this authenticator in which

the frame type is not recognized.

EAP Response/ID Frames

Received

The number of EAP response/identity frames that were received by this

authenticator.

EAP Response Frames

Received

The number of valid EAP response frames (other than resp/ID frames) that were

received by this authenticator.

EAP Request/ID Frames

Transmitted

The number of EAP request/identity frames that were transmitted by this

authenticator.

EAP Request Frames

Transmitted

The number of EAP request frames (other than request/identity frames) that

were transmitted by this authenticator.

Perform a cable test

You can test and display information about the cables that are connected to switch ports.

To perform a cable test:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual452

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Ports > Cable Test.

The Cable Test page displays.

7. Select the check boxes that are associated with the physical ports for which you want to test

the cables.

8. Click the Apply button.

A cable test is performed on all selected ports. The cable test might take up to two

seconds to complete. If the port forms an active link with a device, the cable status is

always Normal. The test returns a cable length estimate if this feature is supported by the

PHY for the current link speed. Note that if the link is down and a cable is attached to a

10/100 Ethernet adapter then the cable status might be Open or Short because some

Ethernet adapters leave unused wire pairs unterminated or grounded.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 87. Cable Test information

Field Description

Cable Status Indicates the cable status:

• Normal: The cable is working correctly.

• Open: The cable is disconnected or a faulty connector exists.

• Short: An electrical short exists in the cable.

• Cable Test Failed: The cable status could not be determined. The cable might in

fact be working.

• No cable: The cable is not present or too short to test.

• Untested: The cable is not yet tested.

• Port Disabled: The port is disabled.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual453

Logs

The switch generates messages in response to events, faults, or errors occurring on the

platform as well as changes in configuration or other occurrences. These messages are

stored locally and can be forwarded to one or more centralized points of collection for

monitoring purposes or long-term archival storage. Local and remote configuration of the

logging capability includes filtering of messages logged or forwarded based on severity and

generating component.

Manage and display the memory log

The memory log stores messages in memory based upon the settings for message

component and severity. You can set the administrative status and behavior of logs in the

system buffer. These log messages are cleared when the switch reboots.

To manage and display the memory log:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

Cable Length The estimated length of the cable in meters. The length is displayed as a range

between the shortest estimated length and the longest estimated length. Unknown is

displayed if the cable length could not be determined. The cable length is displayed

only if the cable status is Normal.

Failure Location The estimated distance in meters from the end of the cable to the failure location. The

failure location is displayed only if the cable status is Open or Short.

Table 87. Cable Test information (continued)

Field Description

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual454

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > Memory Log.

The Memory Log page displays.

7. Select one of the following Admin Status radio buttons:

•Enable: Enable system logging. This is the default setting.

•Disable: Prevent the system from logging messages.

8. From the Behavior menu, specify the behavior of the log when it is full:

• Wrap: When the buffer is full, the oldest log messages are deleted as the system logs

new messages.

•Stop on Full: When the buffer is full, the system stops logging new messages and

preserves all existing log messages.

9. From the Severity Filter menu, select the logging level for messages that must be logged.

Log messages with the selected severity level and all log messages of greater severity

are logged. For example, if you select Warning, the logged messages include Warning,

Error, Critical, Alert, and Emergency. The default severity level is Informational (6).

The severity can be one of the following levels:

• Emergency: Level 0, the system is unusable.

• Alert: Level 1, action must be taken immediately.

•Critical: Level 2, critical conditions occurred.

• Error: Level 3, error conditions occurred.

• Warning: Level 4, warning conditions occurred.

• Notice: Level 5, normal but significant conditions occurred.

• Informational: Level 6, informational messages are generated. This is the default

setting.

• Debug: Level 7, debug-level messages are generated.

Note: A log records messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Memory Log table displays on the Memory Log page.

The Total number of Messages field displays the number of messages the system logged

in memory. Up to 450 of the most recent entries can be displayed.

The rest of the page displays the Memory Log messages. The format of the log message

is the same for messages that are displayed for the message log, persistent log, or

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual455

console log. Messages logged to a collector or relay through syslog support the same

format as well.

The following example shows the standard format for a log message:

*Jan 05 2021 00:00:18: AAA-5-CONNECT: New http connection for user

admin, source 192.168.1.111 ACCEPTED

The message was generated by component AAA on January 5, 2021 at 00:00:18 a.m.

with severity 5 (Notice). The message indicates that the administrator logged on to the

HTTP management interface from a host with IP address 192.168.1.111.

11. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

12. To clear the messages from the buffered log in the memory, click the Clear button.

Manage and display the flash log

The flash log is a persistent log, that is, is a log that is stored in persistent storage. Persistent

storage survives across platform reboots. The first log type is the system startup log. The

system startup log stores the first 32 messages received after system reboot. The second log

type is the system operation log. The system operation log stores messages received during

system operation.

To manage and display the flash log:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual456

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > FLASH Log.

The FLASH Log Configuration page displays.

7. Select one of the following Admin Status radio buttons:

•Enable. A log that is enabled logs messages.

•Disable. A log that is disabled does not log messages.

8. From the Severity Filter menu, select the logging level for messages that must be logged.

Log messages with the selected severity level and all log messages of greater severity

are logged. For example, if you select Warning, the logged messages include Warning,

Error, Critical, Alert, and Emergency. The default severity level is Error (level 3).

The severity can be one of the following levels:

- Emergency: Level 0, the highest warning level. If the device is down, or not

functioning properly, an emergency log message is saved to the device.

- Alert: Level 1, the second-highest warning level. An alert log message is saved if

a serious device malfunction occurs, such as all device features being down.

Action must be taken immediately.

- Critical: Level 2, the third-highest warning level. A critical log message is saved if

a critical device malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not

functioning, while the rest of the device ports remain functional.

- Error: Level 3, a device error occurred, such as a port being offline. This is the

default setting.

- Warning: Level 4, the lowest level of a device warning.

- Notice: Level 5, normal but significant conditions. Provides the network

administrators with device information.

- Informational: Level 6, provides device information.

- Debug: Level 7, provides detailed information about the device.

9. From the Logs to be Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

• Current Logs. The log messages for the current switch session are displayed. This is

the default setting.

• Previous Logs. The previous log messages are displayed, that is, the log messages

that are still in the flash memory from before the switch was rebooted.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Total Number of Messages field shows is the total number of persistent log

messages that are stored on the switch. The maximum number of persistent log

messages displayed on the switch is 64.

*Jan 05 2021 00:00:18: AAA-5-CONNECT: New http connection for user

admin, source 192.168.1.111 ACCEPTED

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual457

The message was generated by component AAA on January 5, 2021 at 00:00:18 a.m.

with severity 5 (Notice). The message indicates that the administrator logged on to the

HTTP management interface from a host with IP address 192.168.1.111.

Manage the server log

You can let the switch send log messages to remote logging hosts. A remote log server is the

same as a remote syslog host.

You must enable the server log on the switch and specify one or more remote syslog hosts.

Enable the server log and add a remote syslog host

To enable the server log and add a remote syslog host:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > Server Log.

The Server Log page displays.

7. In the Server Log Configuration section, select one of the following Admin Status radio

buttons:

•Enable: Send log messages to all configured hosts (syslog collectors or relays) using

the values configured for each host.

• Disable: Stop logging to all syslog hosts. Disable means no messages are sent to

any collector or relay.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual458

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. In the Server Configuration section, specify the following settings:

•IP Address Type: Specify the IP address type of the host, which can be IPv4, IPv6,

or DNS.

• Host Address: Specify the IP address or host name of the syslog host.

• Port: Specify the port on the host to which syslog messages must be sent. The

default port number is 514.

•Severity Filter: Use the menu to select the severity of the logs that must be sent to

the logging host. Logs with the selected severity level and all logs of greater severity

are sent to the host. For example, if you select Error, the logged messages include

Error, Critical, Alert, and Emergency. The severity can be one of the following levels:

- Emergency: Level 0, the highest warning level. If the device is down or not

functioning properly, an emergency log is saved to the device.

-Alert: Level 1, the second-highest warning level. An alert log is saved if a serious

device malfunction occurs, such as all device features being down.

- Critical: Level 2, the third-highest warning level. A critical log is saved if a critical

device malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning,

while the rest of the device ports remain functional.

- Error: Level 3, a device error occurred, such as a port being offline.

- Warning: Level 4, the lowest level of a device warning.

- Notice: Level 5, provides the network administrators with device information.

- Informational: Level 6, provides device information.

- Debug: Level 7, provides detailed information about the log.

10. Click the Add button.

The remote syslog host is added.

The Status field in the Server Configuration table shows whether the remote logging host

is currently active.

Modify the settings for a remote syslog host

To modify the settings for a remote syslog host:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual459

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > Server Log.

The Server Log Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the host.

8. Change the information as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete the settings for a remote syslog host

To delete the settings for a remote syslog host:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual460

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > Server Log.

The Server Log Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box that is associated with the host.

8. Click the Delete button.

The host is removed.

Display or clear the trap logs and the counters

You can display information about the SNMP traps generated on the switch.

You can also display information about the traps that were sent.

To display or clear the trap logs and the counters:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Logs > Trap Logs.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual461

The Trap Logs page displays.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

8. To clear the messages from the trap logs in the memory and clear the counters, click the

Clear button.

The following table describes the Trap Log information that is displayed on the page.

Table 88. Trap Logs information

Field Description

Number of Traps Since Last

Reset

The number of traps that occurred since the switch last rebooted.

Trap Log Capacity The maximum number of traps stored in the log. If the number of traps exceeds

the capacity, the entries overwrite the oldest entries.

Number of Traps since log

last viewed

The number of traps that occurred since the traps were last displayed. Displaying

the traps by any method (terminal interface display, web display, upload file from

switch, and so on) causes this counter to be cleared to 0.

Log The sequence number of the trap.

System Up Time The time when this trap occurred, expressed in days, hours, minutes, and

seconds, since the last reboot of the switch.

Trap Information describing the trap.

Port mirroring

Port mirroring lets you select the network traffic of specific switch ports for analysis by a

network analyzer. You can select many switch ports as source ports but a single switch port

only as the destination port. You can configure how traffic is mirrored on a source port by

selecting packets that are received, transmitted, or both.

A packet that is copied to the destination port is in the same format as the original packet.

This means that if the mirror is copying a received packet, the copied packet is VLAN-tagged

or untagged as it was received on the source port. If the mirror is copying a transmitted

packet, the copied packet is VLAN-tagged or untagged as it is being transmitted on the

source port.

To globally enable port mirroring, specify the destination port, and specify one or

more source ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual462

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Monitoring > Mirroring > Port Mirroring.

The Port Mirroring page displays.

7. Select an Admin Mode radio button:

•Disable. Port mirroring is disabled. This is the default setting.

•Enabled: Port mirroring is enabled.

8. From the Destination Port menu, select the physical destination port to which port traffic

must be copied.

You can configure one destination port only. The port functions as a probe port and

receives traffic from all configured source ports. If no port is configured, None is

displayed. The default is None.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

In the Source Interface Configuration section, perform the following steps.

10. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, the CPU, or al by clicking one of the

following links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch): Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG: Only LAGs are displayed.

• CPU: Only the CPU is displayed.

• All: The physical interfaces, LAGs, and CPU are displayed.

11. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To select a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the

port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To select multiple interfaces, select the check box associated with each interface.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Monitor the Switch and the Traffic User Manual463

Traffic from the selected ports will be sent to the destination port.

12. From the Direction menu, specify the direction of the traffic that must be mirrored from the

selected source ports:

• None: No traffic direction is selected. This is the default setting.

• Tx and Rx: Monitors both transmitted and received packets.

•Rx: Monitors received (ingress) packets only.

•T

x: Monitors transmitted (egress) packets only.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Status field indicates the interface status. The destination port is listed as Probe. The

source ports are listed as Mirrored.

464

8Maintain or Troubleshoot the

Switch

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Reboot from the device UI

•Reset to factory default settings

•Export a file from the switch

•Update software or download a file

•Manage software images

•Diagnostics and troubleshooting

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual465

Reboot from the device UI

You can reboot the switch from the device UI.

Note: If you can physically access the switch, you can reboot the switch by

pressing the multi-function Reset button on the front panel for less

than 5 seconds. (Do not press the button for more than 5 seconds!)

To reboot the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Reset > Device Reboot.

The Device Reboot page displays.

7. Select the check box.

8. Click the Apply button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

9. Click the OK button to confirm.

The switch reboots.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual466

Reset to factory default settings

You can reset the system configuration to the factory default values. All changes that you

made are lost. If the IP address changes, your web session might disconnect.

Note: If you reset the switch to the default configuration, the IP address is

reset to 192.168.0.239, and the DHCP client is enabled. If you lose

network connectivity after you reset the switch to the factory defaults,

see Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet on

page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not connected to the

Internet on page 27.

If you reset the switch to factory default settings, you can select to either maintain the

NETGEAR registration status or reset the NETGEAR registration status. In the latter

situation, you must reregister the switch with NETGEAR.

Reset the switch to factory default settings but maintain the

registration status

Note: If you can physically access the switch, you can reset the switch to

factory default settings but maintain the registration status by pressing

the multi-function Reset button on the front panel for more than

5 seconds but less than 10 seconds. (Do not press the button for

more than 10 seconds!)

To reset the switch to factory default settings but maintain the registration status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual467

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Reset > Factory Default.

The Default Settings page displays.

7. Select the Reset configuration to factory default (EXCEPT registered device status),

and clear device logs radio button.

This option resets the switch to its factory default settings but does not change its

registration status with NETGEAR.

8. Click the Apply button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

9. Click the OK button.

All configuration settings are reset to their factory default values. All changes that you

made are erased, even if you saved the configuration. This process takes about 135

seconds.

Reset the switch to factory default settings and reset the

registration status

This option can be useful if you want to register the switch under a different name or account.

This option requires you to first contact NETGEAR support at netgear.com/support so that

the NETGEAR registration status on the NETGEAR server can be reset. Then, you can use

this option to erase all settings, reset the switch to factory defaults, go through the initial

log-in process again, and reregister the switch with NETGEAR.

Note: If you can physically access the switch, you can reset the switch to

factory default settings and reset the registration status by pressing

the multi-function Reset button on the front panel for more than

10 seconds.

To reset the switch to factory default settings and reset the registration status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual468

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Reset > Factory Default.

The Default Settings page displays.

7. Select the Reset and erase everything including registered device status radio button.

This option requires you to first contact NETGEAR support at netgear.com/support so

that the NETGEAR registration status on the NETGEAR server can be reset.

After the switch reboots, you can reregister the switch using your NETGEAR account

credentials. If you previously obtained a registration key, you can reenter the registration

key. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

Note: If you do not first contact NETGEAR, after you reset the switch to factory

default settings, the Device UI login page displays rather than the

password is reset to the default password (password).

8. Click the Apply button.

An Alert pop-up window displays.

9. Click the OK button.

All configuration settings are reset to their factory default values. All changes that you

made are erased, even if you saved the configuration. This process takes about 135

seconds.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual469

Export a file from the switch

You can export configuration (ASCII) or log (ASCII log) files from the switch to a file server by

using TFTP or to a computer by using HTTP.

Use TFTP to export a file from the switch to a TFTP server

You can upload (export) configuration (ASCII or log ASCII) files from the switch to a TFTP

server on the network.

To export a file from the switch to a TFTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Export > TFTP File Export.

The TFTP File Export page displays.

7. From the File Type menu, select the type of file:

• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured

text file (startup-config) offline as needed. The most common usage of

text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it

offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device

name or IP address), and download it to that device. This is the default setting.

• Trap Log: The trap log with the switch trap records.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual470

• Buffered Log: The switch buffered (in-memory) log.

• Tech Support: The tech support file is a text-based file that contains a variety of

hardware, software, and configuration information that can assist in device and

network troubleshooting.

• Crash Logs: The switch crash logs, if any are available.

8. From the Server Address Type menu, select the format for the Server Address field:

• IPv4: Indicates that the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal

format. This is the default setting.

• DNS: Indicates that the TFTP server address is a host name.

9. In the Server Address field, enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the

format indicated by the server address type.

The default is the IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.

10. In the Transfer File Path field, specify the path on the TFTP server where you want to save

the file.

You can enter up to 160 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A path

name with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root TFTP

directory.

11. In the Transfer File Name field, specify a destination file name for the file to be uploaded.

You can enter up to 32 characters. The transfer fails if you do not specify a file name.

12. Select the Start File Transfer check box.

13. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the file transfer progress. The page refreshes

automatically when the file transfer completes.

Use HTTP to export a file from the switch to a computer

You can upload (export) files of various types from the switch to a computer through an HTTP

session by using your web browser.

To export a file from the switch to a computer by using HTTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual471

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Export > HTTP File Export.

The HTTP File Export page displays.

7. From the File Type menu, select the type of file:

• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured

text file (startup-config) offline as needed. The most common usage of

text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it

offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device

name or IP address), and download it to that device.

• Tech Support: The tech support file is a text-base file that contains a variety of

hardware, software, and configuration information that can assist in device and

network troubleshooting.

• Crash Logs: The switch crash logs, if any are available.

8. Click the Apply button.

A pop-up window displays.

9. Navigate to a location on the computer and save the file.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the file transfer progress. The page refreshes

automatically when the file transfer completes.

Update software or download a file

You can manually check for the latest software version (also referred to as firmware version)

through the device UI of the switch, download the firmware, and upload the firmware to the

switch. If firmware release notes are available with new firmware, read the release notes to

find out if you must reconfigure the switch after updating.

You can download system files from a remote system to the switch by using either TFTP or

HTTP

. In this context, downloading is also referred to as updating.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual472

Use TFTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image

You can download a software (firmware) image, configuration files, and SSL files from a

TFTP server to the switch.

Before you download a file to the switch, the following conditions must be true:

•The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.

•The file is in the correct format.

•The switch contains a path to the TFTP server.

You can also download files by using HTTP (see Use HTTP to download a file to the switch

or update the software image on page 474).

To download a file to the switch from a TFTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Update > TFTP Firmware/File Update.

The TFTP Firmware/File Update page displays.

7. From the File Type menu, select the type of file:

• Software: The system software image, which is saved in one of two flash sectors

called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy, while

the other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the active

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual473

image. If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the

nonactive image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade

process. This is the default setting.

• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured

text file (startup-config) offline as needed. The most common usage of

text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it

offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device

name or IP address), and download it to that device.

• X.509 Public Certificate PEM: SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM Encoded).

• X.509 Certificate Private Key PEM: SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).

• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak

Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong

Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

8. If the selection from the File Type menu is Software, the Image Name menu is displayed

and you must select the software image that must be downloaded to the switch:

• Image1: Select image1 to upload image1.

• Image2: Select image2 to upload image2.

Note: We recommended that you do not overwrite the active image.

9. From the Server Address Type menu, select the format for the TFTP Server IP field:

• IPv4: Indicates that the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal

format. This is the default setting.

• DNS: Indicates that the TFTP server address is a host name.

10. In the TFTP Server IP field, enter the IP address of the TFTP server indicated by the server

address type.

The default is the IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.

11. In the Transfer File Path field, specify the path on the TFTP server where the file is located.

Enter up to 160 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A path name

with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root TFTP

directory.

12. In the Remote File Name field, specify the name of the file to download from the TFTP

server.

You can enter up to 32 characters. A file name with a space is not accepted.

13. Select the Start File Transfer check box to initiate the file upload.

14. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The page refreshes

automatically when the file transfer completes.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual474

Note: After you download a text configuration file, the switch applies the

configuration automatically.

15. After you download a software image file, if you want the switch to run the software image,

do the following:

a. Select the new software image file (see Change the software image that loads when

the switch starts or reboots on page 479).

b. Reboot the switch (see Reboot from the device UI on page 465).

Use HTTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image

You can download a software (firmware) image, configuration files, and SSL files from a

computer to the switch by using an HTTP session over a web browser.

To download a file to the switch using HTTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Update > HTTP Firmware/File Update.

The HTTP Firmware/File Update page displays.

7. From the File Type menu, select the type of file:

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual475

• Software: The system software image, which is saved in one of two flash sectors

called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy, the

other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the active image.

If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the nonactive

image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade process.

This the default setting.

• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured

text file (startup-config) offline as needed. The most common usage of

text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it

offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device

name, serial number, IP address), and download it to that device.

• X.509 Public Certificate PEM: SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM Encoded).

• X.509 Certificate Private Key PEM: SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).

• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak

Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong

Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

8. If the selection from the File Type menu is Software, the Image Name menu is displayed

and you must select the software image that must be downloaded to the switch:

• Image1: Select image1 to upload image1.

• Image2: Select image2 to upload image2.

Note: We recommended that you do not overwrite the active image.

9. Click the Browse button and locate and select the file that you want to download.

The file name can contain up to 80 characters.

10. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. After a file transfer is

started, wait until the page refreshes. When the page refreshes, the option to select a file

is no longer available, indicating that the file transfer is complete.

Note: After you download a text configuration file, the switch applies the

configuration automatically.

11. After you download a software image file, if you want the switch to run the software image,

do the following:

a. Select the new software image file (see Change the software image that loads when

the switch starts or reboots on page 479).

b. Reboot the switch (see Reboot from the device UI on page 465).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual476

Use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL

security certificate file on the switch

Note: You are not required to obtain an SSL certificate. The security warning

that might display in your browser prompts you to confirm that the

self-signed certificate of the switch is valid. Once you do so, the

browser warning might no longer display when you log in.

If you obtain an SSL security certificate from a certificate authority, you can download and

install the SSL security certificate through an HTTP session using your web browser.

For an SSL security certificate, you must download two Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) files to

the switch:

• X.509 Public Certificate PEM: The SSL trusted root certificate PEM file, which must be

in the format xxxxCERTxxxxx.pem.

• X.509 Certificate Private Key PEM: The SSL server certificate PEM file (the key file),

which must be in the format xxxxKEYxxxxx.pem.

Before you can download and install an SSL security certificate, you must disable HTTPS on

the switch.

To disable HTTPS and use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL security

certificate file on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual477

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Access > HTTPS.

The HTTPS page displays.

7. Select the Admin Mode Disable radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. Because you changed the access mode from HTTPS to HTTP,

you are logged out of the switch.

9. Wait one minute, refresh your browser, and log back in to the switch (see steps 3 through 5).

10. Select Maintenance > Update > HTTP Firmware/File Update.

The HTTP Firmware/File Update page displays.

11. From the File Type menu, select X.509 Public Certificate PEM.

12. Select the Select File Browse button and locate the file that you want to download.

This the certificate file, which must be in the format xxxxCERTxxxxx.pem.

13. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The page refreshes

automatically when the file transfer completes (or if it fails).

14. From the File Type menu, select X.509 Certificate Private Key PEM.

This is the key file, which must be in the format xxxxKEYxxxxx.pem.

15. Select the Select File Browse button and locate the file that you want to download.

The file name can contain up to 80 characters.

16. Click the Apply button.

The file transfer begins.

The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The page refreshes

automatically when the file transfer completes.

Manage software images

The switch maintains two versions of the switch software in permanent storage. One image is

the active image, and the second image is the backup image. The active image is loaded

when the switch starts or reboots. This feature reduces switch down time when you are

updating the switch software.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual478

Note: A switch that runs an older software version might not load a

configuration file that is created by a newer software version. In such

a situation, the switch displays a warning.

Copy a software image

You can copy a software image from one location (primary or backup) to another.

To copy a software image:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > File Management > Copy.

The Copy page display.

7. Select the Source Image image1 or image2 radio button to specify the image to be copied.

8. Select the Destination Image image1 or image2 radio button to specify the destination

image.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual479

Configure dual image settings

The Dual Image feature allows the switch to retain two images in permanent storage. You

can select which image must be loaded when the reboots, specify an image description, or

delete an image. This feature reduces switch down time when you are upgrading or

downgrading the software image.

Change the software image that loads when the switch starts or reboots

To change the image that loads during the boot process:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image Configuration.

The Dual Image Configuration page displays.

7. From the Image Name menu, select the image that is not the image displayed in the

Current-active field but that is the image that you want the switch to run after it reboots.

The Current-active field displays the name of the active image.

8. As an option, specify a name for the selected image by entering one in the Image

Description field.

9. Select the Activate Image check box.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual480

11. After activating the image, reboot the switch (see Reboot from the device UI on

page 465).

If you do not reboot the switch, it continues running the image shown in the Current-active

field until the next time that the switch reboots.

Delete a software image

To delete a software image:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image Configuration.

The Dual Image Configuration page displays.

7. From the Image Name menu, select the image that is not the image displayed in the

Current-active field.

The Current-active field displays the name of the active image. You cannot delete the

active image.

8. Select the Delete Image check box.

9. Click the Apply button.

The image is removed.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual481

View the dual image status

You can view information about the active and backup images on the switch.

To view dual image status information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image > Dual Image Status.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 89. Dual Image Status information

Field Description

Image1 Ver The version of the image1 file.

Image2 Ver The version of the image2 file.

Current-active The currently active image on this switch.

Next-active The image to be used after the switch reboots.

Image1 Description The description, if any, associated with the image1 file.

Image2 Description The description, if any, associated with the image2 file.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual482

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

You can send a ping or a traceroute, and you can perform a memory dump.

Ping an IPv4 address

You can configure the switch to send a ping request to a specified IPv4 address. You can use

this option to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IPv4 device. When

you send a ping, the switch sends a specified number of ping requests and the results are

displayed.

If a reply to the ping is received, the following message displays:

PING x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w): size data bytes

size bytes from x.y.z.w: seq=0 ttl=xyz

--- x.y.z.w ping statistics ---

count packets transmitted, count packets received, x% packet loss

If a reply to the ping is not received, the following message displays:

PING x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w): size data bytes

--- x.y.z.w ping statistics ---

count packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss

To ping an IPv4 address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual483

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Ping IPv4.

The Ping IPv4 page displays.

7. In the IP Address/Host Name field, enter the IP address or host name of the device that

must be pinged.

8. In the Count field, enter the number of echo requests that must be sent.

The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 15.

9. In the Interval (secs) field, enter the time between ping packets in seconds.

The default value is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 60.

10. In the Size field, enter the size of the ping packet. The default value is 0 bytes. The range is

0 to 13000.

11. From the Source menu, as an option, you can select the IP address or interface that must

be used to send echo request packets:

• None: The source address of the ping packet is the address of the default egress

interface.

•IP Address: The source IP address that must be used when echo request packets

are sent. With this selection, the IP Address field displays and you must enter the

IPv4 address that must be used as the source.

• Interface: The interface that must be used when echo request packets are sent. The

Interface menu displays, but the only available selection from the menu is Network.

12. Click the Apply button.

The specified address is pinged. The results are displayed below the configurable data in

the Results field.

Ping an IPv6 address

You can configure the switch to send a ping request to a specified IPv6 address. You can use

this option to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IPv6 device. When

you send a ping, the switch sends a specified number of ping requests and the results are

displayed.

If a reply to the ping is received, the following message displays:

PING x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w): size data bytes

size bytes from x:y::z:w: seq=0 ttl=xyz

--- x:y::z:w ping statistics ---

count packets transmitted, count packets received, x% packet loss

If a reply to the ping is not received, the following message displays:

PING x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w): size data bytes

--- x:y::z:w ping statistics ---

count packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual484

To ping an IPv6 address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Ping IPv6.

The Ping IPv6 page displays.

7. From the Ping menu, select the type of ping:

• Global: Pings a global IPv6 address.

• Link Local: Pings a link-local IPv6 address over a specified interface. With this

selection, the Interface menu displays, and you must select the interface.

8. In the IPv6 Address/Hostname field, enter the IPv6 address or host name of the station

that must be pinged.

The format is xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx. The maximum number of

characters is 255.

9. In the Count field, enter the number of echo requests that must be sent.

The range is 1 to 15. The default value is 3.

10. In the Interval (secs) field, enter the time in seconds between ping packets.

The range is 1 to 60. The default value is 3.

11. In the Datagram Size field, enter the datagram size.

The valid range is 0 to 13000. The default value is 0 bytes.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual485

12. From the Source menu, as an option, you can select the IP address or interface that must

be used to send echo request packets:

• None: The source address of the ping packet is the address of the default egress

interface.

•IP Address: The source IP address that must be used when echo request packets

are sent. With this selection, the IPv6 Address field displays and you must enter the

IPv6 address that must be used as the source.

• Interface: The interface that must be used when echo request packets are sent. The

Interface menu displays, but the only available selection from the menu is Network.

13. Click the Apply button.

The specified address is pinged. The results are displayed below the configurable data in

the Results field.

Send an IPv4 traceroute

You can configure the switch to send a traceroute request to a specified IPv4 address or host

name. You can use this to discover the paths that packets take to a remote destination.

When you send a traceroute, the switch displays the results below the configurable data.

If a reply to the traceroute is received, the following message displays:

traceroute to x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w), maxTTL hops max, size byte packets

initTTL x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

initTTL+1 x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

initTTL+2 x.y.z.w (x.y.z.w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

To send an IPv4 traceroute:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual486

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Traceroute IPv4.

The Traceroute IPv4 page displays.

7. In the IP Address/Hostname field, enter the IP address or host name of the device for

which the path must be discovered.

8. In the Probes Per Hop field, enter the number of probes per hop.

The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 10.

9. In the Max TTL field, enter the maximum time to live (TTL) for the destination.

The default value is 30. The range is 1 to 255.

10. In the Init TTL field, enter the initial TTL to be used.

The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.

11. In the MaxFail field, enter the maximum number of failures allowed in the session.

The default value is 5. The range is 1 to 255.

12. In the Interval (secs) field, enter the time between probes in seconds.

The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 60.

13. In the Port field, enter the UDP destination port for the probe packets.

The default value is 33434. The range is 1 to 65535.

14. In the Size field, enter the size of the probe packets.

The default value is 38. The range is 38 to 32768.

15. From the Source menu, as an option, you can select the IP address or interface that must

be used to send probe packets:

• None: The source address of the probe packet is the address of the default egress

interface.

•IP Address: The source IP address that must be used when probe request packets

are sent. With this selection, the IP Address field displays and you must enter the

IPv4 address that must be used as the source.

• Interface: The interface that must be used when probe request packets are sent. The

Interface menu displays, but the only available selection from the menu is Network.

16. Click the Apply button.

A traceroute request is sent to the specified IP address or host name. The results are

displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual487

Send an IPv6 traceroute

You can configure the switch to send a traceroute request to a specified IPv6 address or host

name. You can use this to discover the paths that packets take to a remote destination.

When you send a traceroute, the switch displays the results below the configurable data.

If a reply to the traceroute is received, the following message displays:

traceroute to x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w), maxTTL hops max, size byte packets

initTTL x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

initTTL+1 x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

initTTL+2 x:y::z:w (x:y::z:w) 0.000 ms * 0.000 ms

To send an IPv6 traceroute:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Traceroute IPv6.

The Traceroute IPv6 page displays.

7. In the IPv6 Address/Host Name field, enter the IPv6 address or host name of the device for

which the path must be discovered.

8. In the Probes Per Hop field, enter the number of probes per hop.

The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 10.

9. In the Max TTL field, enter the maximum time to live (TTL) for the destination.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual488

The default value is 30. The range is 1 to 255.

10. In the Init TTL field, enter the initial TTL to be used.

The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.

11. In the MaxFail field, enter the maximum number of failures allowed in the session.

The default value is 5. The range is 1 to 255.

12. In the Interval (secs) field, enter the time between probes in seconds.

The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 60.

13. In the Port field, enter the UDP destination port for the probe packets.

The default value is 33434. The range is 1 to 65535.

14. In the Size field, enter the size of the probe packets.

The default value is 38. The range is 38 to 32768.

15. From the Source menu, as an option, you can select the IP address or interface that must

be used to send probe packets:

• None: The source address of the probe packet is the address of the default egress

interface.

•IP Address: The source IP address that must be used when probe request packets

are sent. With this selection, the IPv6 Address field displays and you must enter the

IPv6 address that must be used as the source.

• Interface: The interface that must be used when probe request packets are sent. The

Interface menu displays, but the only available selection from the menu is Network.

16. Click the Apply button.

A traceroute request is sent to the specified IP address or host name. The results are

displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.

Enable remote diagnostics

For enhanced security, the remote diagnostic option is disabled by default. You can enable

the option to access the switch remotely. When remote access is enabled, you or technical

support can perform remote diagnostics services.

To enable remote diagnostics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Maintain or Troubleshoot the Switch User Manual489

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 19 or Access the switch off-network and not

connected to the Internet on page 27.

The Device UI login page displays.

If you did not yet activate your warranty, the Register to activate your warranty page

displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 30.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•Enter your device admin password.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the device UI on page 28.

5. Click the Go button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Remote Diagnostics.

The Remote Diagnostics page displays.

7. Select the Enable radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

490

AConfiguration Examples

This appendix contains the following sections:

•Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

•Access control lists (ACLs)

•Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

•802.1X access control

•Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

•VLAN routing interfaces

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual491

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

A local area network (LAN) can generally be defined as a broadcast domain. Hubs, bridges,

or switches in the same physical segment or segments connect all end node devices. End

nodes can communicate with each other without the need for a router. Routers connect LANs

together, routing the traffic to the appropriate port.

A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on

some basis other than geographic location (for example, by department, type of user, or

primary application). To enable traffic to flow between VLANs, traffic must go through a

router, just as if the VLANs were on two separate LANs.

A VLAN is a group of computers, servers, and other network resources that behave as if they

were connected to a single network segment—even though they might not be. For example,

all marketing personnel might be spread throughout a building. Yet if they are all assigned to

a single VLAN, they can share resources and bandwidth as if they were connected to the

same segment. The resources of other departments can be invisible to the marketing VLAN

members, accessible to all, or accessible only to specified individuals, depending on how the

IT manager set up the VLANs.

VLANs present a number of advantages:

•It is easy to do network segmentation. Users who communicate most frequently with

each other can be grouped into common VLANs, regardless of physical location. Each

group’s traffic is contained largely within the VLAN, reducing extraneous traffic and

improving the efficiency of the whole network.

•They are easy to manage. The addition of nodes, as well as moves and other changes,

can be dealt with quickly and conveniently from a management interface rather than from

the wiring closet.

•They provide increased performance. VLANs free up bandwidth by limiting node-to-node

and broadcast traffic throughout the network.

•They ensure enhanced network security. VLANs create virtual boundaries that can be

crossed only through a router. So standard, router-based security measures can be used

to restrict access to each VLAN.

Packets received by the switch are treated in the following way:

•When an untagged packet enters a port, it is automatically tagged with the port’s default

VLAN ID tag number. Each port supports a default VLAN ID setting that is configurable

(the default setting is 1). The default VLAN ID setting for each port can be changed on the

Port PVID Configuration page. See Configure the PVID settings for an interface on

page 164.

•When a tagged packet enters a port, the tag for that packet is unaffected by the default

VLAN ID setting. The packet proceeds to the VLAN specified by its VLAN ID tag number.

•If the port through which the packet enters is not a member of the VLAN as specified by

the VLAN ID tag, the packet is dropped.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual492

•If the port is a member of the VLAN specified by the packet’s VLAN ID, the packet can be

sent to other ports with the same VLAN ID.

•Packets leaving the switch are either tagged (T) or untagged (U), depending on the

setting for that port’s VLAN membership properties. A U for a port means that packets

leaving the switch from that port are untagged. Inversely, a T for a port means that

packets leaving the switch from that port are tagged with the VLAN ID that is associated

with the port.

The example in this section comprises numerous steps to illustrate a wide range of

configurations to help provide an understanding of tagged VLANs.

VLAN configuration examples

This example demonstrates several scenarios of VLAN use and describes how the switch

handles tagged and untagged traffic.

In this example, you create two new VLANs, change the port membership for default VLAN 1,

and assign port members to the two new VLANs:

1. On the Basic VLAN Configuration page (see VLANs on page 157), create the following

VLANs:

•A VLAN with VLAN ID 10.

•A VLAN with VLAN ID 20.

2. On the VLAN Membership page (see Configure VLAN membership on page 161) specify

the VLAN membership as follows:

•For the default VLAN with VLAN ID 1, specify the following members: port 7 (U) and

port 8 (U).

•For the VLAN with VLAN ID 10, specify the following members: port 1 (U), port 2 (U),

and port 3 (T).

•For the VLAN with VLAN ID 20, specify the following members: port 4 (U), port 5 (T),

and port 6 (U).

3. On the Port PVID Configuration page (see Configure the PVID settings for an interface

on page 164), specify the PVID for ports g1 and g4 so that packets entering these ports are

tagged with the port VLAN ID:

•Port g1: PVID 10

•Port g4: PVID 20

4. With the VLAN configuration that you set up, the following situations produce results as

described:

•If an untagged packet enters port 1, the switch tags it with VLAN ID 10. The packet

can access port 2 and port 3. The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to leave port 2

as an untagged packet. For port 3, the outgoing packet leaves as a tagged packet

with VLAN ID 10.

•If a tagged packet with VLAN ID 10 enters port 3, the packet can access port 1 and

port 2. If the packet leaves port 1 or port 2, it is stripped of its tag to leave the switch

as an untagged packet.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual493

•If an untagged packet enters port 4, the switch tags it with VLAN ID 20. The packet

can access port 5 and port 6. The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to become an

untagged packet as it leaves port 6. For port 5, the outgoing packet leaves as a

tagged packet with VLAN ID 20.

Access control lists (ACLs)

ACLs ensure that only authorized users can access specific resources while blocking off any

unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.

ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control, restrict contents of routing updates, decide

which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked, and provide security for the network. ACLs

are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned between the internal network and an

external network, such as the Internet. They can also be used on a router positioned between

two parts of the network to control the traffic entering or leaving a specific part of the internal

network. The added packet processing required by the ACL feature does not affect switch

performance. That is, ACL processing occurs at wire speed.

Access lists are sequential collections of permit and deny conditions. This collection of

conditions, known as the filtering criteria, is applied to each packet that is processed by the

switch or the router. The forwarding or dropping of a packet is based on whether or not the

packet matches the specified criteria.

Traffic filtering requires the following two basic steps:

1. Create an access list definition.

The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is

forwarded normally or discarded. Additionally, you can assign traffic that matches the

criteria to a particular queue or redirect the traffic to a particular port. A default deny all

rule is the last rule of every list.

2. Apply the access list to an interface in the inbound direction.

The switch allow ACLs to be bound to physical ports and LAGs. The switch supports MAC

ACLs and IP ACLs.

MAC ACL example configuration

The following example shows how to create a MAC-based ACL that permits Ethernet traffic

from the Sales department on specified ports and denies all other traffic on those ports.

1. On the MAC ACL page, create an ACL with the name Sales_ACL for the Sales

department of your network (see Configure a MAC ACL on page 397).

By default, this ACL is bound on the inbound direction, which means that the switch

examines traffic as it enters the port.

2. On the MAC Rules page, create a rule for the Sales_ACL with the following settings:

•Sequence Number: 1

• Action: Permit

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual494

• Assign Queue ID: 0

• Match Every: False

• CoS: 0

• Destination MAC: 01:02:1A:BC:DE:EF

• Destination MAC Mask: 00:00:00:00:FF:FF

• EtherType: User Value

•Source MAC: 02:02:1A:BC:DE:EF

• Source MAC Mask: 00:00:00:00:FF:FF

• VLAN ID: 2

For more information about MAC ACL rules, see Configure MAC ACL rules on

page 400.

3. On the MAC Binding Configuration page, assign the Sales_ACL to ports 6, 7, and 8, and

then click the Apply button. (See Configure MAC bindings on page 404.)

You can assign an optional sequence number to indicate the order of the access list

relative to other access lists if any are already assigned to the interface and direction.

4. The MAC Binding Table displays the interface and MAC ACL binding information. (See

Display or delete MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding table on page 406.)

The ACL named Sales_ACL looks for Ethernet frames with destination and source MAC

addresses and MAC masks defined in the rule. Also, the frame must be tagged with VLAN

ID 2, which is the Sales department VLAN. The CoS value of the frame must be 0, which is

the default value for Ethernet frames. Frames that match this criteria are permitted on

interfaces 6, 7, and 8 and are assigned to the hardware egress queue 0, which is the default

queue. All other traffic is explicitly denied on these interfaces. To allow additional traffic to

enter these ports, you must add a new Permit rule with the desired match criteria and bind

the rule to interfaces 6, 7, and 8.

Basic IPv4 ACL example configuration

The following example shows how to create an IPv4-based ACL that prevents any IP traffic

from the Finance department from being allowed on the ports that are associated with other

departments. Traffic from the Finance department is identified by each packet’s network IP

address.

1. On the IP ACL page, create a new IP ACL with an IP ACL ID of 1. (See Configure a

basic or extended IPv4 ACL on page 407.)

2. On the IP Rules page, create a rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings:

•Sequence Number: 1

• Action: Deny

• Assign Queue ID: 0 (optional: 0 is the default value)

• Match Every: False

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual495

• Source IP Address: 192.168.187.0

• Source IP Mask: 255.255.0

For additional information about IP ACL rules, see Configure rules for a basic IPv4 ACL

on page 411.

3. Click the Add button.

4. On the IP Rules page, create a second rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings:

•Sequence Number: 2

• Action: Permit

• Match Every: True

5. Click the Add button.

6. On the IP Binding Configuration page, assign ACL ID 1 to ports 2, 3, and 4, and assign a

sequence number of 1. (See Configure IP ACL interface bindings on page 432.)

By default, this IP ACL is bound on the inbound direction, so it examines traffic as it

enters the switch.

7. Click the Apply button.

8. On the IP Binding Table page, you can view the interfaces and IP ACL binding information.

(See Display or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding table on page 434.)

The IP ACL in this example matches all packets with the source IP address and subnet mask

of the Finance department’s network and deny it on interfaces 2, 3, and 4 of the switch. The

second rule permits all non-Finance traffic on the ports. The second rule is required because

an explicit deny all rule exists as the lowest priority rule.

Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best

effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is

no guarantee that it does. During times of congestion, packets might be delayed, sent

sporadically, or dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as email and file transfer, a

slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. However, any

degradation of service can negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such

as voice or multimedia.

Quality of Service (QoS) can provide consistent, predictable data delivery by distinguishing

between packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay.

Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable

network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. If one node

cannot meet the necessary timing requirements, this creates a deficiency in the network path

and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual496

Two basic types of QoS are supported:

• Integrated Services: Network resources are apportioned based on request and are

reserved (resource reservation) according to network management policy (RSVP, for

example).

• Differentiated Services: Network resources are apportioned based on traffic

classification and priority, giving preferential treatment to data with strict timing

requirements.

The switch supports DiffServ.

The DiffServ feature contains a number of conceptual QoS building blocks that you can use

to construct a differentiated service network. Use these same blocks in different ways to build

other types of QoS architectures.

You must configure three key QoS building blocks for DiffServ:

•Class

•Policy

•Service (the assignment of a policy to a directional interface)

Class

You can classify incoming packets at Layers 2, 3, and 4 by inspecting the following

information for a packet:

•Source/destination MAC address

•EtherType

•Class of Service (802.1p priority) value (first/only VLAN tag)

•VLAN ID range (first/only VLAN tag)

•Secondary 802.1p priority value (second/inner VLAN tag)

•Secondary VLAN ID range (second/inner VLAN tag)

•IP Service Type octet (also known as: ToS bits, Precedence value, DSCP value)

•Layer 4 protocol (TCP, UDP and so on)

•Layer 4 source/destination ports

•Source/destination IP address

From a DiffServ point of view, two types of classes exist:

•DiffServ traffic classes

•DiffServ service levels/forwarding classes

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual497

DiffServ traffic classes

With DiffServ, you define which traffic classes to track on an ingress interface. You can define

simple BA classifiers (DSCP) and a wide variety of multifield (MF) classifiers:

•Layer 2; Layers 3, 4 (IP only)

•Protocol-based

•Address-based

You can combine these classifiers with logical AND operations to build complex

MF-classifiers (by specifying a class type of all or any, respectively). That is, within a single

class, multiple match criteria are grouped together as an AND expression, depending on the

defined class type. Only classes of the same type can be nested; class nesting does not

allow for the negation (exclude option) of the referenced class.

To configure DiffServ, you must define service levels, namely the forwarding classes/PHBs

identified by a DSCP value, on the egress interface. You define these service levels by

configuring BA classes for each.

Create policies

Use DiffServ policies to associate a collection of classes that you configure with one or more

QoS policy statements. The result of this association is referred to as a policy.

From a DiffServ perspective, two types of policies exist:

• Traffic Conditioning Policy: A policy applied to a DiffServ traffic class

• Service Provisioning Policy: A policy applied to a DiffServ service level

You must manually configure the various statements and rules used in the traffic conditioning

and service provisioning policies to achieve the desired Traffic Conditioning Specification

(TCS) and the Service Level Specification (SLS) operation, respectively.

Traffic conditioning policy

Traffic conditioning pertains to actions performed on incoming traffic. Several distinct QoS

actions are associated with traffic conditioning:

• Dropping: Drop a packet upon arrival. This is useful for emulating access control list

operation using DiffServ, especially when DiffServ and ACL cannot coexist on the same

interface.

• Marking IP DSCP or IP precedence: Marking/re-marking the DiffServ code point in a

packet with the DSCP value representing the service level associated with a particular

DiffServ traffic class. Alternatively, the IP precedence value of the packet can be

marked/re-marked.

• Marking CoS (802.1p). Sets the 3-bit priority field in the first/only 802.1p header to a

specified value when packets are transmitted for the traffic class. An 802.1p header is

inserted if it does not already exist. This is useful for assigning a Layer 2 priority level

based on a DiffServ forwarding class (such as the DSCP or IP precedence value)

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual498

definition to convey some QoS characteristics to downstream switches that do not

routinely look at the DSCP value in the IP header.

• Policing: A method of constraining incoming traffic associated with a particular class so

that it conforms to the terms of the TCS. Out-of-profile packets that are either in excess of

the conformance specification or are nonconformant are dropped.

• Counting: Updating octet and packet statistics to keep track of data handling along traffic

paths within DiffServ. In this DiffServ feature, counters are not explicitly configured by the

user, but are designed into the system based on the DiffServ policy being created. For

more information, see Monitor the switch and the ports on page 439.

• Assigning QoS queue: Directs a traffic stream to the specified QoS queue. This allows a

traffic classifier to specify which one of the supported hardware queues are used for

handling packets belonging to the class.

• Redirecting: Forces a classified traffic stream to a specified egress port (physical or

LAG). This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action. It can also be specified

along with a QoS queue assignment.

DiffServ example configuration

To create a DiffServ class and policy and attach them to a switch interface, follow these

steps:

1. On the QoS Class Configuration page, create a new class with the following settings:

• Class Name: Class1

• Class Type: All

For more information, see Configure a DiffServ class on page 300.

2. Click the Class1 hyperlink to display the DiffServ Class Configuration page for this class.

3. Configure the following settings for Class1:

• Protocol Type: UDP

• Source IP Address: 192.12.1.0.

• Source Mask: 255.255.255.0.

• Source L4 Port: Other, and enter 4567 as the source port value.

•Destination IP Address: 192.12.2.0.

• Destination Mask: 255.255.255.0.

• Destination L4 Port: Other, and enter 4568 as the destination port value.

For more information, see Configure a DiffServ class on page 300.

4. Click the Apply button.

5. On the Policy Configuration page, create a new policy with the following settings:

•Policy Selector: Policy1

• Member Class: Class1

For more information, see Configure a DiffServ policy on page 311.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual499

6. Click the Add button.

The policy is added.

7. Click the Policy1 hyperlink to display the Policy Class Configuration page for this policy.

8. Configure the Policy attributes as follows:

• Assign Queue: 3

• Policy Attribute: Simple Policy

• Color Mode: Color Blind

• Committed Rate: 1000000 Kbps

• Confirm Action: Send

• Violate Action: Drop

For more information, see Configure a DiffServ policy on page 311.

9. On the Service Configuration page, select the check box next to interfaces 7 and 8 to attach

the policy to these interfaces, and then click the Apply button. (See Configure the DiffServ

service interface on page 317.)

All UDP packet flows destined to the 192.12.2.0 network with an IP source address from the

192.12.1.0 network that include a Layer 4 Source port of 4567 and Destination port of 4568

from this switch on ports 7 and 8 are assigned to hardware queue 3.

On this network, traffic from streaming applications uses UDP port 4567 as the source and

4568 as the destination. This real-time traffic is time sensitive, so it is assigned to a

high-priority hardware queue. By default, data traffic uses hardware queue 0, which is

designated as a best-effort queue.

Also the confirmed action on this flow is to send the packets with a committed rate of

1000000 Kbps. Packets that violate the committed rate and burst size are dropped.

802.1X access control

Local area networks (LANs) are often deployed in environments that permit unauthorized

devices to be physically attached to the LAN infrastructure, or permit unauthorized users to

attempt to access the LAN through equipment already attached. In such environments you

might want to restrict access to the services offered by the LAN to those users and devices

that are permitted to use those services.

Port-based network access control makes use of the physical characteristics of LAN

infrastructures to provide a means of authenticating and authorizing devices attached to a

LAN port with point-to-point connection characteristics. If the authentication and authorization

process fails, access control prevents access to that port. In this context, a port is a single

point of attachment to the LAN, such as a port of a MAC bridge and an association between

stations or access points in IEEE 802.11 wireless LANs.

The IEEE 802.11 standard describes an architectural framework within which authentication

and consequent actions take place. It also establishes the requirements for a protocol

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual500

between the authenticator (the system that passes an authentication request to the

authentication server) and the supplicant (the system that requests authentication), as well

as between the authenticator and the authentication server.

The switch supports a guest VLAN, which allows unauthenticated users limited access to the

network resources.

Note: You can use QoS features to provide rate limiting on the guest VLAN

to limit the network resources that the guest VLAN provides.

Another 802.1X feature is the ability to configure a port to enable or disable EAPoL packet

forwarding support. You can disable or enable the forwarding of EAPoL when 802.1X is

disabled on the device.

The ports of an 802.1X authenticator switch provide the means by which it can offer services

to other systems reachable through the LAN. Port-based network access control allows the

operation of a switch’s ports to be controlled to ensure that access to its services is permitted

only by systems that are authorized to do so.

Port access control provides a means of preventing unauthorized access by supplicants to

the services offered by a system. Control over the access to a switch and the LAN to which it

is connected can be desirable if you restrict access to publicly accessible bridge ports or to

restrict access to departmental LANs.

Access control is achieved by enforcing authentication of supplicants that are attached to an

authenticator's controlled ports. The result of the authentication process determines whether

the supplicant is authorized to access services on that controlled port.

A port access entity (PAE) is able to adopt one of two distinct roles within an access control

interaction:

1. Authenticator: A port that enforces authentication before allowing access to services

available through that port.

2. Supplicant: A port that attempts to access services offered by the authenticator.

Additionally, a third role exists:

3. Authentication server: Performs the authentication function necessary to check the

credentials of the supplicant on behalf of the authenticator.

All three roles are required for you to complete an authentication exchange.

The switch supports the authenticator role only, in which the PAE is responsible for

communicating with the supplicant. The authenticator PAE is also responsible for submitting

the information received from the supplicant to the authentication server for the credentials to

be checked, which determines the authorization state of the port. The authenticator PAE

controls the authorized/unauthorized state of the controlled port depending on the outcome of

the RADIUS-based authentication process.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual501

Figure 3. 802.1X authentication roles

802.1X example configuration

This example shows how to configure the switch so that 802.1X-based authentication is

required on the ports in a corporate conference room (5 through 8). These ports are available

to visitors and must be authenticated before access is granted to the network. The

authentication is handled by an external RADIUS server. When the visitor is successfully

authenticated, traffic is automatically assigned to the guest VLAN. This example assumes

that a VLAN was configured with a VLAN ID of 150 and VLAN name of Guest.

1. On the Port Authentication page, select ports 5, 6, 7, and 8.

2. From the Port Control menu, select Unauthorized.

The selection from the Port Control menu for all other ports on which authentication is

not needed must be Authorized. When the selection from the Port Control menu is

Authorized, the port is unconditionally put in a force-authorized state and does not

require any authentication. When the selection from the Port Control menu is Auto, the

authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode.

3. In the Guest VLAN field for ports 5 through 8, enter 150 to assign these ports to the guest

VLAN.

You can configure additional settings to control access to the network through the ports.

See Configure a port security interface on page 376 for information about the settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

5. On the 802.1X Configuration page, set the port based authentication state and guest VLAN

mode to Enable, and then the Apply button. (See Configure the global port security

mode on page 375.)

This example uses the default values for the port authentication settings, but you can

configure several additional settings. For example, the EAPOL Flood Mode field allows

you to enable the forwarding of EAPoL frames when 802.1X is disabled on the device.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual502

6. On the RADIUS Server Configuration page, configure a RADIUS server with the following

settings:

• Server Address: 192.168.10.23

• Secret Configured: Yes

• Secret: secret123

• Active: Primary

For more information, see RADIUS servers on page 325.

7. Click the Add button.

8. On the Authentication List page, configure the default list to use RADIUS as the first

authentication method. (See Authentication lists on page 338.)

This example enables 802.1X-based port security on the switch and prompts the hosts

connected on ports 5 through 8 for an 802.1X-based authentication. The switch passes the

authentication information to the configured RADIUS server.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) runs on bridged networks to help eliminate loops. If a bridge

loop occurs, the network can become flooded with traffic. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning

Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of spanning tree to efficiently channel

VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the spanning tree behaves in the

manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree, with slight modifications in the

working but not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to

the forwarding state).

The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to

configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end stations,

resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state and the suppression of

Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the parameters

pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP. It behaves in a way

that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges.

An MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

So, an IEEE 802.1s bridge inherently also supports IEEE 802.1w and IEEE 802.1D.

The MSTP algorithm and protocol provide simple and full connectivity for frames assigned to

any VLAN throughout a bridged LAN comprising arbitrarily interconnected networking

devices, each operating MSTP, STP, or RSTP. MSTP allows frames assigned to different

VLANs to follow separate paths, each based on an independent Multiple Spanning Tree

Instance (MSTI), within Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) regions composed of LANs and or

MSTP bridges. These regions and the other bridges and LANs are connected into a single

Common Spanning Tree (CST). (IEEE DRAFT P802.1s/D13)

MSTP connects all bridges and LANs with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree

(CIST). The CIST supports the automatic determination of each MST region, choosing its

maximum possible extent. The connectivity calculated for the CIST provides the CST for

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual503

interconnecting these regions, and an Internal Spanning Tree (IST) within each region.

MSTP ensures that frames with a VLAN ID are assigned to one and only one of the MSTIs or

the IST within the region, that the assignment is consistent among all the networking devices

in the region, and that the stable connectivity of each MSTI and IST at the boundary of the

region matches that of the CST. The stable active topology of the bridged LAN with respect to

frames consistently classified as belonging to any VLAN thus simply and fully connects all

LANs and networking devices throughout the network, though frames belonging to different

VLANs can take different paths within any region, per IEEE DRAFT P802.1s/D13.

All bridges, whether they use STP, RSTP, or MSTP, send information in configuration

messages through Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) to assign port roles that determine

each port’s participation in a fully and simply connected active topology based on one or

more spanning trees. The information communicated is known as the spanning tree priority

vector. The BPDU structure for each of these different protocols is different. An MSTP bridge

transmits the appropriate BPDU depending on the received type of BPDU from a particular

port.

An MST region comprises of one or more MSTP bridges with the same MST configuration

identifier, using the same MSTIs, and without any bridges attached that cannot receive and

transmit MSTP BPDUs. The MST configuration identifier includes the following components:

1. Configuration identifier format selector

2. Configuration name

3. Configuration revision level

4. Configuration digest: 16-byte signature of type HMAC-MD5 created from the MST

Configuration Table (a VLAN ID to MSTID mapping)

Because multiple instances of spanning tree exist, an MSTP state is maintained on a

per-port, per-instance basis (or on a per-port, per-VLAN basis, as any VLAN can be in one

and only one MSTI or CIST). For example, port A can be forwarding for instance 1 while

discarding for instance 2. The port states changed since IEEE 802.1D specification.

To support multiple spanning trees, configure an MSTP bridge with an unambiguous

assignment of VLAN IDs (VIDs) to spanning trees. For such a configuration, ensure the

following:

1. The allocation of VIDs to FIDs is unambiguous.

2. Each FID that is supported by the bridge is allocated to exactly one spanning tree instance.

The combination of VID to FID and then FID to MSTI allocation defines a mapping of VIDs to

spanning tree instances, represented by the MST Configuration Table.

With this allocation we ensure that every VLAN is assigned to one and only one MSTI. The

CIST is also an instance of spanning tree with an MSTID of 0.

VIDs might be not be allocated to an instance, but every VLAN must be allocated to one of

the other instances of spanning tree.

The portion of the active topology of the network that connects any two bridges in the same

MST region traverses only MST bridges and LANs in that region, and never bridges of any

kind outside the region. In other words, connectivity within the region is independent of

external connectivity.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual504

MSTP example configuration

This example shows how to create an MSTP instance from the switch. The example network

includes three different switches that serve different locations in the network. In he following

figure, ports 1/0/1–1/0/5 are connected to host stations, so those links are not subject to

network loops. Ports 1/0/6–1/0/8 are connected across switches 1, 2, and 3.

Figure 4. MSTP example configuration

Perform the following procedures on each switch to configure MSTP:

1. On the VLAN Configuration page, create VLANs 300 and 500 (see Configure VLAN

settings on page 158).

2. On the VLAN Membership page, include ports 1 through 8 as tagged (T) or untagged (U)

members of VLAN 300 and VLAN 500 (see Configure VLAN settings on page 158).

3. On the STP Configuration page, enable the Spanning Tree State option (see Configure the

STP settings and view the STP status on page 188).

Use the default values for the rest of the STP configuration settings. By default, the STP

operation mode is MSTP and the configuration name is the switch MAC address.

4. On the CST Configuration page, set the bridge priority value for each of the three switches

to force Switch 1 to be the root bridge:

• Switch 1: 4096

• Switch 2: 12288

• Switch 3: 20480

Note: Bridge priority values are multiples of 4096.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual505

If you do not specify a root bridge and all switches are assigned the same bridge priority

value, the switch with the lowest MAC address is elected as the root bridge (see

Configure the CST settings on page 190).

5. On the CST Port Configuration page, select ports 1 through 8 and select Enable from the

STP Status menu (see Configure the CST port settings on page 192).

6. Click the Apply button.

7. Select ports 1 through 5 (edge ports), and select Enable from the Fast Link menu.

Because the edge ports are not at risk for network loops, ports with Fast Link enabled

transition directly to the forwarding state.

8. Click the Apply button.

You can use the CST Port Status page to view spanning tree information about each

port.

9. On the MST Configuration page (see Manage the MST settings on page 197), create an

MST instance with the following settings:

• MST ID: 1

• Priority: Use the default (32768)

• VLAN ID: 300

10. Click the Add button.

11. Create a second MST instance with the following settings

•MST ID: 2

• Priority: 49152

• VLAN ID: 500

12. Click the Add button.

In this example, assume that Switch 1 became the root bridge for the MST instance 1, and

Switch 2 became the root bridge for MST instance 2. Switch 3 supports hosts in the sales

department (ports 1, 2, and 3) and in the HR department (ports 4 and 5). Switches 1 and 2

also include hosts in the sales and HR departments. The hosts connected from Switch 2 use

VLAN 500, MST instance 2 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly. Likewise,

hosts of Switch 1 use VLAN 300, MST instance 1 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3

directly.

The hosts use different instances of MSTP to effectively use the links across the switch. The

same concept can be extended to other switches and more instances of MSTP.

VLAN routing interfaces

VLANs divide broadcast domains in a LAN environment. When hosts in one VLAN must

communicate with hosts in another VLAN, the traffic must be routed between them. This is

known as inter-VLAN routing. On the switch, it is accomplished by creating Layer 3 interfaces

(switch virtual interfaces [SVI]).

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Configuration Examples User Manual506

When a port is enabled for bridging (the default) rather than routing, all normal bridge

processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its

MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address

table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is

that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet

is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was

received on a routed VLAN.

Because a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be

enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN routing can be used to allow

more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a

VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is

required. A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN

port can be part of a VLAN that is itself a router port.

Complete these steps to configure a switch to perform interVLAN routing:

1. Use the IP Configuration page to enable routing on the switch.

For more information about this step, see Manage the IPv4 routing mode on page 250.

2. Determine the IP addresses that you want to assign to the VLAN interface on the switch.

For the switch to be able to route between the VLANs, the VLAN interfaces must be

configured with an IP address. When the switch receives a packet destined for another

subnet/VLAN, the switch looks at the routing table to determine where to forward the

packet. The packet is then passed to the VLAN interface of the destination. It is then sent

to the port where the end device is attached.

3. Use the VLAN Routing Wizard page to create a routing VLAN, configure the IP address and

subnet mask, and add the member ports.

For more information about this step, see Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static

Routing Wizard on page 272.

In the following figure, VLAN 70 is a routing interface VLAN with IP address

203.0.113.118 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0. For information about viewing the

member ports of the VLAN, see View the VLAN status on page 163. (The figure also

shows a second routing interface VLAN with ID 65.)

507

BSpecifications and Default Settings

This appendix contains the following sections:

•Switch default settings

•General feature default settings

•System setup and maintenance settings

•Port characteristics

•Traffic control settings

•Quality of Service settings

•Security settings

•System management settings

•Settings for other features

•Hardware technical specifications

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual508

Switch default settings

The following table describes the switch default settings.

Table 90. Switch default settings

Feature Default

IP address 192.168.0.239

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 192.168.0.254

Protocol DHCP client enabled

Management VLAN ID 1

IPv6 admin mode Enabled

IPv6 address auto configuration Disabled

DHCPv6 Disabled

Minimum length for the device admin password Eight characters

SNTP client Enabled

Global logging Enabled

Memory logging Enabled (Severity level: informational and above)

Persistent (flash) logging Disabled

DNS Enabled (No servers configured)

SNMP traps Enabled

Automatic saving to the startup configuration Enabled, but you must click the Apply button to save

changes that you make on a page.

TACACS+ No server configured

RADIUS No server configured

Denial of service protection Disabled

Dot1x authentication (IEEE 802.1X) Disabled

MAC-based port security All ports are unlocked

Access control lists (ACL) None configured

Protected ports None

Private VLANs None

Advertised port speed Maximum capacity

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual509

Broadcast storm control Disabled

MAC table address aging 300 seconds (dynamic addresses)

Default VLAN IDs and names 1: Default VLAN

4086: Auto-WiFi VLAN

4087: Auto-Camera VLAN

4088: Auto-VoIP VLAN

4089: Auto-Video VLAN

Note: All ports are members of VLAN 1. No ports are

members of the Auto-WiFi, Auto-Camera, Auto-VoIP, and

Auto-Video VLANs.

GARP switch configuration (GVRP) Disabled

RADIUS-assigned VLANs Disabled

Multiple Spanning Tree Disabled

Link aggregation No link aggregation groups (LAGs) configured

LACP system priority 32768

DiffServ Enabled, no rules configured

IGMP snooping Disabled

IGMP multicast routing Disabled

IGMP snooping querier Disabled

MLD snooping Disabled

MLD multicast routing Disabled

MLD snooping querier Disabled

Routing mode Disabled

Router discovery Disabled

Table 90. Switch default settings (continued)

Feature Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual510

General feature default settings

The following table describes the general feature default settings.

Table 91. General feature default settings

Feature Name/Setting Default

Virtual LAN (IEEE 802.1Q)

Default VLANs • 1 (Default). All ports are members.

• 4086 (Auto-WiFi). No ports are members.

• 4087 (Auto-Camera). No ports are members.

• 4088 (Auto-VoIP). No ports are members.

• 4089 (Auto-Video). No ports are members.

PVID 1

Acceptable frame types Admit All

Ingress filtering Disabled

Port priority 0

GARP

Join timer 20 (centiseconds)

Leave timer 60 (centiseconds)

Leave all timer 1000 (centiseconds)

GVRP, Global

GVRP mode Disabled

GVRP, Interface

Port GVRP mode Disabled

Jumbo Frames

Frame size 1522

Flow Control

Admin mode Disabled

802.1X

Port-based authentication state Disabled

VLAN assignment mode Disabled

Dynamic VLAN creation mode Disabled

EAPOL flood mode Disabled

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual511

Port control Auto

Unauthenticated VLAN ID 0 (none)

Periodic reauthentication Disabled

Reauthentication period 3600

Quiet period 60

Number of EAP request resubmitted 30

Maximum number of EAP requests 2

Supplicant time-out 30

Server time-out 30

STP/RSTP/MSTP, Global

Spanning tree state Enabled

STP operation mode IEEE 802.1s RSTP

Configuration name MAC address

Configuration revision level 0

Forwarding of BPDUs while STP is disabled Disabled

CST bridge priority 32768

CST bridge maximum age 20

CST bridge hello time 2

CST bridge forward delay 15

CST spanning tree maximum number of hops 20

MST default instance ID 0

MST instance 0 priority 32768

MST instance 0 VLAN IDs 1,4088,4089

STP/RSTP/MSTP, Interface

CST STP status Enabled

CST auto edge Enabled

CST fast link Disabled

CST BDPU forwarding Disabled

CST path cost 0

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual512

CST priority 128

CST external path cost 0

Link Aggregation

Lag name ch<n> where n is 1 to 8

Admin mode Enabled

Hash mode 1 Src/Dest MAC, incoming port

STP mode Enabled

Link trap Enabled

LAG type Static

Local Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP), Global

TLV advertised interval 30

Hold multiplier 4

Reinitializing delay 2

Transmit delay 5

Fast start duration 3

Local Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP), Interface

Admin status Tx and Rx

Management IP address Auto advertise

Notification Disabled

Optional TLVs Enabled

DHCP Snooping, Global

Admin mode Disabled

MAC address validation Enabled

DHCP Snooping, Interface

Trust mode Disabled

Logging invalid packets Disabled

Rate limit N/A

Burst interval N/A

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual513

Persistent Configuration

Store Local

Write delay 300

IP Routing

Admin mode Disabled

Time-to-live 64

Maximum number of next hops 1

Router Discovery Protocol

Advertise mode Disabled

Advertise address 224.0.0.1 and 255.255.255.255

Maximum advertise interval 600

Minimum advertise interval 450

Advertise lifetime 1800

Preference level 0

ARP/ARP Aging

Age time (seconds) 1200

Response time (seconds) 1

Retries 10

Cache size 512

Dynamic renewal Enabled

Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

Admin mode Enabled

Class of Service (CoS), Global

Trust mode 802.1p

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual514

802.1p to queue mapping (802.1p -> queue) 0 -> 1

1 -> 0

2 -> 0

3 -> 1

4 -> 2

5 -> 2

6 -> 3

7 -> 3

Class selector:

(CS 0) 000000 -> 1

(CS 1) 001000 -> 0

(CS 2) 010000 -> 0

(CS 3) 011000 -> 1

(CS 4) 100000 -> 2

(CS 5) 101000 -> 2

(CS 6) 110000 -> 3

(CS 7) 111000 -> 3

Assured forwarding:

(AF 11) 001010 -> 0

(AF 12) 001100 -> 0

(AF 13) 001110 -> 0

(AF 21) 010010 -> 0

(AF 22) 010100 -> 0

(AF 23) 010110 -> 0

(AF 31) 011010 -> 1

(AF 32) 011100 -> 1

(AF 33) 011110 -> 1

(AF 41) 100010 -> 1

(AF 42) 100100 -> 1

(AF 43) 100110 -> 1

Expedited forwarding:

(EF) 101110 -> 2

Other:

(1) 000001 -> 1

(2) 000010 -> 1

(3) 000011 -> 1

(4) 000100 -> 1

(5) 000101 -> 1

(6) 000110 -> 1

(7) 000111 -> 1

(9) 001001 -> 0

(11) 001011 -> 0

(13) 001101 -> 0

(15) 001111 -> 0

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual515

802.1p to queue mapping (802.1p -> queue)

(continued)

(17) 010001 -> 0

(19) 010011 -> 0

(21) 010101 -> 0

(23) 010111 -> 0

(25) 011001 -> 1

(27) 011011 -> 1

(29) 011101 -> 1

(31) 011111 -> 1

(33) 100001 -> 2

(35) 100011 -> 2

(37) 100101 -> 2

(39) 100111 -> 2

(41) 101001 -> 2

(43) 101011 -> 2

(45) 101101 -> 2

(47) 101111 -> 2

(49) 110001 -> 3

(50) 110010 -> 3

(51) 110011 -> 3

(52) 110100 -> 3

(53) 110101 -> 3

(54) 110110 -> 3

(55) 110111 -> 3

(57) 111011 -> 3

(58) 111010 -> 3

(59) 111011 -> 3

(60) 111100 -> 3

(61) 111101 -> 3

(62) 111110 -> 3

(63) 111111 -> 3

Class of Service (CoS), Interface

Trust mode 802.1p

Interface shaping rate 0

802.1p to queue mapping (802.1p –> queue) 0 -> 1

1 -> 0

2 -> 0

3 -> 1

4 -> 2

5 -> 2

6 -> 3

7 -> 3

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual516

Queue minimum bandwidth 0

Queue scheduler type Weighted

Auto-WiFi

Admin mode Disabled on all ports

Auto-WiFi VLAN 4086

OUI-based priority 7

Auto-Camera

Admin mode Disabled on all ports

Auto-Camera VLAN 4087

OUI-based priority 7

Auto-VoIP, Protocol-Based

Admin mode Disabled on all ports

Prioritization type Traffic class

Auto-VoIP traffic class 7

Auto-VoIP, OUI-Based

Admin mode Disabled on all ports

Auto-VoIP VLAN 4088

OUI-based priority 7

L2 Loop Protection

Admin mode Disabled

Table 91. General feature default settings (continued)

Feature Name/Setting Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual517

System setup and maintenance settings

The following table describes the system setup and maintenance settings.

Table 92. System setup and maintenance settings

Feature Sets Supported Default

Boot code update 1 N/A

DHCP 1 Enabled

Static IP address 1 192.168.0.239

System name configuration 1 N/A

Configuration save/restore 1 N/A

Firmware upgrade 1 N/A

Restore defaults 1 (device UI and rear-panel

button)

N/A

Dual image support 1 Enabled

Factory reset 1 N/A

Port characteristics

The following table describes the port characteristics.

Table 93. Port characteristics

Feature Sets Supported Default

Auto negotiating speed and

full/half duplex

All ports Auto negotiation

Auto MDI/MDIX For crossover cables on all ports Enabled

802.3x flow control/back pressure All ports Disabled

Port mirroring: TX, RX, Both 1 Disabled

Port trunking (aggregation) 8 Preconfigured

802.1D spanning tree 1 Disabled

802.1w RSTP 1 Enabled

802.1s spanning tree 8 instances Disabled

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual518

Traffic control settings

The following table describes the traffic control settings.

Table 94. Traffic control settings

Feature Sets Supported Default

Storm control All ports Disabled

Jumbo frame All ports 1522

Max = 10,000 bytes

Quality of Service settings

The following table describes the Quality of Service settings.

Table 95. Quality of Service settings

Feature Sets Supported Default

Number of queues 8 N/A

802.1p 1 Enabled

DSCP 1 Disabled

Egress rate limiting All ports Disabled

Static 802.1Q tagging 256 VID = 1

Max member ports are equal to

the number of ports on the switch

Learning process Supports static and dynamic MAC

entries

Dynamic learning is enabled by

default

Table 93. Port characteristics (continued)

Feature Sets Supported Default

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual519

Security settings

The following table describes the security settings.

Table 96. Security settings

Feature Sets Supported Default

802.1X All ports Disabled

MAC ACLs 100 (shared with IPv4 and IPv6

ACLs)

All MAC addresses allowed

IPv4 ACLs 100 (shared with MAC and IPv6

ACLs)

All IPv4 addresses allowed

IPv6 ACLs 100 (shared with IPv4 ACL and

MAC ACL)

All IPv6 addresses allowed

Password control access 1 Idle time-out = 5 mins.

Device admin password 1 Password = password

Management security 1 profile with 20 rules for

HTTP/HTTPS/SNMP access to

allow/deny an IP address/subnet

All IP addresses allowed

Port MAC lockdown All ports Disabled

System management settings

The following table describes the system management settings.

Table 97. System management settings

Feature Sets Supported Default

Multi-session web connections 4 Enabled

SNMPv1/v2

SNMPv3

Max 5 community entries Enabled (read, read/write

communities)

Time control 1 (Local or SNTP) Local time enabled

LLDP/LLDP-MED All ports Enabled

Logging 3 (Memory/Flash/Server) Memory log enabled

MIB support 1 Disabled

Smart Control Center N/A Discovery option enabled but

configuration option disabled

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual520

Settings for other features

The following table describes the settings for other features.

Table 98. Settings for other features

Feature Sets Supported Default

IGMP snooping v1/v2/v3 All ports Disabled

EAPoL flooding All ports Disabled

BPDU flooding All ports Disabled

Multicast groups 256 Disabled

Filter multicast control All ports Disabled

Number of DHCP snooping bindings 256 N/A

Number of DHCP static entries 256 N/A

MAC address database size 16k N/A

Number of IPv4/IPv6 static routes 32 N/A

Number of supported VLANs 64 N/A

Number of supported routed VLANs 15 N/A

Number of supported ARP entries 512 N/A

Hardware technical specifications

The tables in the following sections describes the main hardware technical specifications for

each model. For more hardware information, see the data sheet, which you can download by

visiting netgear.com/support/download/.

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual521

Model MS510TXM hardware technical specifications

Table 99. Hardware technical specifications for model MS510TXM

Feature Description

Network interfaces • Four multispeed Ethernet ports (1–4), each of which supports 2.5G, 1G,

and 100M.

• Four multispeed Ethernet ports (5–8), each of which supports 10G, 5G,

2.5G, 1G, and 100M.

• Two dedicated SFP+ fiber uplink ports (9F and 10F), each of which is

capable of 10G and 1G.

AC power input 100–240V ~ 50–60Hz, 1.2A max.

Maximum power consumption 47.0W

Minimum power consumption 23.9W

Dimensions (W x D x H) 13.0 x 8.12 x 1.7 in. (330 x 206 x 43 mm)

Weight 4.25 lb (2.08 kg)

Operating temperature 32º to 122ºF (0° to 50°C)

Operating humidity 95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

Storage temperature –4° to 158°F (–20º to 70ºC)

Storage humidity 95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

Electromagnetic certifications

and compliance

CE: EN 55032:2012+AC:2013; EN 55032:2015+AC:2016; EN 55035:2017;

EN 55024:2010; EN 61000-3-2:2014; EN 61000-3-3:2013, Class A

VCCI: VCCI 32-1:2016, Class A

RCM: AS/NZS CISPR 32:2013 Class A

FCC: 47 CFR FCC Part 15, Class A, ANSI C63.4:2014

ISED: ICES-003:2016 Issue 6, Class A, ANSI C63.4:2014

BSMI: CNS 13438 Class A

Safety certifications CB report / certificate IEC 60950-1:2005 (ed.2)+A1:2009+A2:2013

CSA mark, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1-14, UL 62368-1, 2nd Ed.

CE LVD: EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A2:2013;

EN 62368-1:2014/AC:2015

RCM AS/NZS 62368.1:2018

BSMI: CNS 14336-1

8-Port Multi-Gigabit/10G Ethernet (Ultra60 PoE++) Smart Managed Pro Switch

Specifications and Default Settings User Manual522

Model MS510TXUP hardware technical specifications

Table 100. Hardware technical specifications for model MS510TXUP

Feature Description

Network interfaces • Four multispeed Ethernet Ultra60 PoE++ (802.3bt) ports (1–4), each of

which supports 2.5G, 1G, and 100M.

• Four multispeed Ethernet Ultra60 PoE++ (802.3bt) ports (5–8), each of

which supports 10G, 5G, 2.5G, 1G, and 100M.

• Two dedicated SFP+ fiber uplink ports (9F and 10F), each of which is

capable of 10G and 1G.

AC power input 100–240V ~ 50–60Hz, 4.9A max.

Maximum power consumption 380.9W (with PoE)

Minimum power consumption 31.5W

Switch PoE power budget 295W

Dimensions (W x D x H) 13.0 x 8.12 x 1.7 in. (330 x 206 x 43 mm)

Weight 5.53 lb (2.51 kg)

Operating temperature 32º to 122ºF (0° to 50°C)

Operating humidity 95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

Storage temperature –4° to 158°F (–20º to 70ºC)

Storage humidity 95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing

Electromagnetic certifications

and compliance

CE: EN 55032:2012+AC:2013; EN 55032:2015+AC:2016; EN 55035:2017;

EN 55024:2010; EN 61000-3-2:2014; EN 61000-3-3:2013, Class A

VCCI: VCCI 32-1:2016, Class A

RCM: AS/NZS CISPR 32:2013 Class A

FCC: 47 CFR FCC Part 15, Class A, ANSI C63.4:2014

ISED: ICES-003:2016 Issue 6, Class A, ANSI C63.4:2014

BSMI: CNS 13438 Class A

Safety certifications CB report / certificate IEC 60950-1:2005 (ed.2)+A1:2009+A2:2013

CSA mark, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1-14, UL 62368-1, 2nd Ed.

CE LVD: EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A2:2013;

EN 62368-1:2014/AC:2015

RCM AS/NZS 62368.1:2018

BSMI: CNS 14336-1

Table of Contents

NETGEAR MS510TXM User Manual

Related Manuals